TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - CONSIDERATIONS

1. Destination- TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch may be configured andadministered by the software "Topex multiACCESS/QUTEX - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance" through serial port or through Ethernetinterface.

- The installation CD-ROM coming with the equipment includes the operation,administration and maintenance program (OAM). The program may run on anydesktop PC or laptop that fulfills the following minimal requirements: -Operating system Windows 95 or later versions

-Minimum processor 486

-Recommended minimum 1GB free space on HDD

-Minimum 64 MB RAM

-CD-ROM unit

-One free serial port or one Ethernet interface

-Graphics resolution 1024 by 768 pixels - colors High Color (16bit) orTrue Color (32bit)

- Through the OAM program you can configure and manage maximum 50different TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX or 50 different EONES systems. Fromthe same OAM application you can't operate on both kind of equipments -multiACCESS/QUTEX, EONES or multiswitch. Each of the systems has aassociated directory folder (in the same place with the executable application"gwconfig.exe"). Also there are subdirectories for each types of files: foralarms - Alarms, for billing - Billing, for activity - Activity, for log files - Logand for viewing text files - Viewer. - You can access all remote TOPEX systems in order to configure and maintainthem. You may download files from remote systems into the appropriatesubdirectory on the local HDD, or upload edited configuration files to the Topexgateways.

2. InstallationTo install the OAM program on a desktop PC or notebook please follow thesesteps:- Insert the Topex CD-ROM into the drive. - The program features auto-run, it should begin installation by itself:

- The installation screen shows up: the Topex logo, the name of the programbeing installed and the equipment for which the program is intended, and inthe right bottom corner the progress indicator for the Setup program. You justwait for the OAM program to be installed on your computer.

- Then the Welcome screen appears, mentioning which version of the programis currently installing. In the last picture for example the displayed version is"2.3". The actual software version may be different from the one shown in"Welcome" window, so after finishing installation, you should use "About"command to see the OAM version currently running on your computer.

- Then the window "Choose Destination Location" appears, asking you tospecify the folder where the "gwconfig" application will be installed. Thedefault value is a folder named "TOPEX" in the "Program Files" system folder.

Select "Next" to continue or "Browse" if you want to specify another folder forthe installation. Usually, you do not need to change the default location.

- The "Select Program Folder" window comes next. Here you must specify thename of the Programs folder were the startup icon for the OAM will beinstalled. The setup program will create in Programs a folder called "TOPEXGATEWAY - OAM". Again, you should not change this default value.

- Now the effective installation begins, you will see a progress bar showing theprogress of the installation:

- When the setup is successfully ended, the window "Setup Complete" willshow up. It asks you if you want to see the README file and if you want tolaunch the OAM program immediately.- To end the installation, click the button "Finish".

- Now the OAM program is fully installed on your system. - To launch it, go to the Start menu, select "Programs" and then click "TOPEXGATEWAY - OAM".

Note 1: If the "autorun" feature for CD's is not enabled on your computer,then you must launch the Setup program manually. Go to "My Computer" andclick on your CD drive. You will see the contents of the Topex installation disk.Double click the "Setup" icon to launch the installation program.

Note 2: You may want to remove the OAM program from your computer. - From the Start menu, go to "Settings" and select "Control Panel". - From Control Panel, double click the icon "Add or Remove Programs". Searchin the list of currently installed program the application "Topex Gateway -OAM" and click the "Change/Remove" button if you want to uninstall theprogram.

- A window called "Confirm File Deletion" shows up, asking you to confirm thatyou want to remove the OAM program. Press YES to continue.Now the un-installation of the program begins. You will see onscreen aprogress indicator.

- The OAM program is removed from your computer, but the TOPEX folderwon't be deleted. Consequently, if you had configuration, billing or monitoringfiles in this folder, the files will be kept. Also, when you re-install the OAMprogram over a previous installation, the configuration and log files won't beoverwritten, so you may keep your settings, activity and billing records.

Note 3: on Topex CD-ROM there is also a folder named "OAM". It contains allfiles which are necessary for the OAM application to run in case that you needto copy them manually to a folder you want to use.

Note 4: if you have checked the box "I like to launch TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM"or when you go to "Start - Programs- TOPEX GATEWAY - OAM", the OAMprogram will start up.

3. Menu description

Systems Through the OAM program you can configure and managemaximum 50 different TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateways.

- Add Adds a system in the arborescent structure

- Remove Removes a system

Facilities

- Font Chooses the font type for the text in the "Modify Configuration" and"View Configuration" windows.

- Colorsignification

Shows the significance of colors used in "Modify Configuration" and"View Configuration" windows in the representation of cards andports. The user is allowed to modify the colors at his own choice.

- View printfiles

Opens a window in which you may see the text files in which othertext files or data information have been printed using the button"Print" (or icon "Print").

-Commands

Opens a dialog box in which expert users may enter directcommands to the connected system

About Shows the software version

Help Opens the help window

Exit Exit from the OAM program

4. Icons description- The toolbar including button icons is a dynamic bar which is changingaccording to certain actions performed by the user. Some buttons areequivalent to options from the Menu or from System.

- Definition of the button icons:

Equivalent to System > Add

Equivalent to System > Eliminate

Save Current Configuration of remoteconnected Topex System

Downloading Configuration (for TOPEXequipments with redundancy - with twoprocessor cards)

Upload Configuration (for TOPEXequipments with redundancy - with twoprocessor cards)

Upload Configuration to remote connectedTopex System

Defines gateway parameters

Defines directions (trunk groups) name

Defines classes of directions for incomingand outgoing calls (direction definition)

Defines table for the routing of the call

Defines LCR table

Defines restriction classes for calls

Defines table with indexes for SIM usage

Defines table with holidays

Defines callback table

Defines circuit groups for SS7 configuration

Defines signaling points for SS7configuration

Defines parameters for the VoIP card

Displays a window that allows the filetransfer from the system to the program

Shows a window which permitsautomatically transfer of files from systemto OAM computer

Clean HDD Space

Displays a window for file editing

Downloads the output of a previous LINUX-like command that has been sent from"Facilities - Commands" to the connectedTopex system.

In a state of connection between"gwconfig" program and a gateway,launches directly the "putty" application."Putty" will connect on port 22 the same IPaddress to which "gwconfig" software isconnected. The username will be sentautomatically (it is taken from the nameused for logging into the gateway).

Sets the gateway system time with thetime of the computer on which the OAMprogram is running

GSM Reprogramming

Defines parameters for alerting

Defines and programs test calls

This is the command for HALT the gateway

This is the command for REBOOT thegateway

Status monitoring - command for onlinedisplay of the port status

Cell, Level and Channel Info monitoring

Calls monitoring - command for onlinedisplay of current calls

Prints the files, to the printer or in a textfile

Defines text to find

Find next text

Configuration list

Starts protocol message monitoring

Stops protocol message monitoring

Starts / stops password working mode

Allows definition of users for "gwconfig"software

Starts the automatic interrogationprocedure for all installed system findingthe alarms and (or) the ASR ("AnswerSeizure Ratio") values

Equivalent to About from the main menu

Equivalent to Help from the menu

Equivalent to Exit from the menu

Note: There are two additionals icons used in a particular situation whenTOPEX equipment is supplied with 2 processor cards (one active and onebackup) - this can be the case of redundancy for softswitch or EONES boxes.

Download configuration files from one ofthe selected processor cards.

Upload configuration files in selectedprocessor card. This operation can be also

performed in the same time on bothselected processors.

- The toolbar including button icons is a dynamic bar which changes accordingto certain actions performed by the user. The OAM software can be in one ofthe following states:

- onesystemconnected

- viewingfiles for asystem

- none ofthe abovesituations

5.Tree options

- The OAM program for TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateway is using a treestructure of files and folders. - Since the OAM program can configure and manage up to maximum 50different multiACCESS/QUTEX, each of them uses a different folder for its files.

- Description of the tree structure

cfg_<Name>viz_<Name>

Identifier of the system: - "cfg_" are configurations of remote gateways where theprogram is connected- "viz_" identifies local configurations, saved on the HDD for

editing and later uploadingConnect Initiates a connection to the system

Disconnect Disconnect, breaks the existing connection to the system

Parameters Displays the parameters of the connection to the system

Lastconfiguration

Displays the configuration received at the latest status inquiry tothe system

Alarms Displays the alarm files

Billing Displays the billing files

Loading Displays call statistics on ports and directions

Activity Displays the monitor files

ASRDisplays the ASR ("Answer Seizure Ratio") files. These filescontain ASR values, average time, total number of calls andanswered calls, total seized time and total connected time.

SMS Displays the SMS and CALLS files (both SMS and CALLS aresupposed to be sent from internet)

Viewer You can view text files with every kind of extension

Log Displays the log and lch files

6. Language option

- On the icon buttons bar there is also a listbox which allows changing thelanguage that is used in all menus, dialog boxes, windows and messages. Thedefault language is English, shown by the corresponding flag.

- English language - French language - Romanian language

7. Status bar

- The status bar is divided into six columns.

- The first three columns (starting from the left side) are displaying indicatorsfor supervising a connection. These three fields are filled in only in connectionstate between the "gwconfig" software and a TOPEX gateway. Exception: ifusing automatic interrogation procedure then first column displays the timeremaining until a new interrogation procedure is scheduled. - First column " " is indicating the number of commandsthat will be sent to the gateway. Each modification (changes in configurationfiles or on gateway ports) or data request that is performed on the gateway istranslated into commands. These commands are send to the equipment.

- The second column and the third column are showing protocol messages,protocol which is running between "gwconfig" software and the connectedgateway. - The fourth column displays the date and time of the system. (the format isdd-mm-yyyy hh-mm-ss(" "). Also, this column maycontain information about the time limit for the Topex licence. It can be shownhere either that no licence limitation is present on your system ("no limitlicence") or that a time limit is present for the licence ("30 licence days"). Thenumber shows how many days you have left for the limited licence. After thespecified period, the application running on the gateway will stop processingthe calls. Then you must contact Topex to get a “serial” (character string)which will allow further operation of the gateway.

By clicking with the mouse over this column, a window will pop up, showingthe licence features which are currently granted to your gateway. In the list offeatures, each granted features will be shown as an enabled checkbox).

Following the list of features, the version of the gateway application will beshown as x.z.y. In the last example, this is "Ver 4.1.158".

- The fifth column is an indicator for the occupied HDD space on the target:the percent value is displayed. The color used is light blue if the available HDDspace is under the 90% and red otherwise. This value is shown only inconnection state.- The sixth and rightmost column is an indicator for the connection: light blueif the program is connected to a system (" ") or red if the program is NOTconnected to a TOPEX system (" ")

Note: if the TOPEX equipment is supplied with 2 processor cards (forredundancy purposes) then in the bottom area of the OAM main window willbe two status bars. Each status bar corresponds to a processor card. In thiscase the first column will contains the IP address of the processor card.The fourth column contains the licence information for each processor card.Date and time is displayed just for the second status bar.Last column will contains also the information about the active processor - theinformation is "ACTIV".

8. Display issues

- The panel located on the right side of the tree window is used by two kind ofwindows. - First type of window is called "Modify Configuration" and it is displayedduring a state of connection between the "gwconfig" software and a TOPEXgateway; also the same type of window is used for "View Configuration"window, window which is displayed when "Last configuration" command isselected.- In "Modify Configuration" window the right mouse button is used for adding/removing cards; if you click the right mouse button over the status bar amessage ("Do you wish to disconnect?") will be displayed, asking you if youwant to disconnect the connection. The same message is displayed if you clickthe button to close the window or if you choose the corresponding treecommand option "Disconnect".- For the second case when "View Configuration" window is displayed the rightmouse button is used to hide the window. The confirmation message that isused is "Do you wish to hide last configuration?". The same message isdisplayed if you click the button to close the window or if you choose thecorresponding tree command option "Disconnect".

- The second kind of window is the one used to display different kind of files asa result of actions over tree options: "Billing", "Alarms", ASR", "SMS","Activity","Log" and "Viewer". In this situation the title of the window includesthe words "Local Viewer" and the system name. An action with the right mouseclick will cause the message "Do you wish to hide?" to be displayed. For"Billing","ASR","SMS" and "Activity" an appropriate filter can be applied forviewing the records, then the window which contains the list of the files will beautomatically hidden. For the other options the data will be displayed in thesame "Local Viewer" window.

- The content of that second window can be updated with other data simply byselecting another option from the tree structure.

Note 1): if "Last Configuration" command is used while "Local Viewer" windowis displayed, then the "View Configuration" window will be displayed over theprevious "Local Viewer" window.

Note 2): if "Local Viewer" command is used while "Modify Configuration" or"View Configuration" window is displayed then the "Local Viewer" window will

be displayed over the other window. The user must hide (using the rightmouse button) the "Local Viewer" window to see again the "ModifyConfiguration" or "View Configuration" window.

Note 3): Just above the status bar there is an icon " " which allows theprinting of the screen. This icon is used also in all windows that are displayedby the "gwconfig.exe". This way you can have immediately a hard copy of allsettings of the windows you want.

9. Files

- Files used: the OAM program uses several types of files: for alarms, events,billing information, etc. Most of the files are text type, so they can be easilyviewed and also modified using a standard text file editor such as Notepad forWindows. - The files have different extension, in order to be quickly identified: '.alr' forfiles with the alarms, '.tax' for billing (taxation) files, '.mon' for monitor(supervision) files that include detailed information about each call, '.asr' forcalls statistics, '.sms' for sms files, '.log' files for recording the events, '.lch' forthe files that record the changes made to the system. The name of these filesis given by the field "name" (option "Gateway Parameters") concatenated withthe current day and the extension.

10. Password mode

- The "gwconfig" software includes a multiple (hierarchical) passwordprotection implementation. - Password protection mode is useful when several users are working with"gwconfig" software and certain actions on gateway(s) must be performedcarefully. Different users may have different rights. The implementationassumes that one user is the administrator of the "gwconfig" software andthe first step is to create such a privileged user.

- The definition of the administrator is achieved by the option "Usersdefinition".

- If you go to password protected mode without defining an administrator,following error message will appear:

- For defining an administrator you must choose the option "User definition" (""). After entering the password "topex" in the access password window, the

next image will inform you that you must enter the identification data for theadministrator:

- After pressing "OK" button:

- To add a user to the list you must select "Add" button:

- In case of definition for the administrator account all possible rights arealready selected: "Changes allowed" and "Transfer allowed". For each new user two fields must be always filled in: "Name" and "Password". An additional window is used to confirm name and password.

- Only the administrator can define new users.

- He can add, edit and delete other users. As a safety rule the administratoraccount cannot be deleted.

- Once the definition of an administrator is done, the subsequent access to theicon "Users definition" (" ") will require administrator name and password:

- Also, to enter into password protected mode (when icon option "Passwordmode" is selected (" ")) it is required the administrator's name and password.Protected mode is shown on the title bar of the "gwconfig" software by thewords "protected mode" at the end.- When protected mode is launched then another action on the icon "Passwordmode" will end this mode.

- When protected mode is started then all access connections to thegateway(s) will be protected by additionally user identifications. - A user without any of the two rights (changing data and transfering files) willbe able only to connect to gateway(s) and see current status and settingswithout the possibility to change data and transfer files. - A user who has the right to transfer files will be able moreover to transferfiles from the gateway but not to change data. Finally a user with all rights will have full control of the gateway(s).

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - SYSTEMS

1. Add- If you select "System > Add" the following window will appear, asking you toadd another TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system to the arborescent structure.

Directory - enter a name for the folder in where the files downloaded fromthe TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system will be stored.On HDD it will be madea directory in the following shape "cfg_xxxxxxx" where directory is the nametyped in the "Directory" field. The folder will be created on HDD in thedirectory where the executable 'gwconfig.exe' is located.

Name - enter a name for the connection to the system. This names isconcatenated at "cfg_" and this it will be the text used in tree structure foridentifying the system.

Serial communication / IP communication - is specified link type betweenOAM computer and E1/30 GSM equipment. This are the two exclusive optionsfor the communication with a TOPEX gateway equipment.

IP Parameters:

IP address - enter the IP address of the system. It can be a numeric IPaddress or a text address (in that case a dns request will be made bysoftware).

IP Port num - enter the number of the port through which thecommunication with the system is achieved. The default value is 9009. Thisvalue is established also into the gateway system and should not be modified.

DialUp Connection - in case of IP communication this setting allows if ischecked, a dialup connection to be established. The Dialup Connection must becreate from Windows (from "Dial-Up Networking") and the connection namemust not contained character space inside the text.

Option "Use PPP address" is used to indicate the "gwconfig" software toconnect to the dialup server address after a successfully connection. If thisoption is not validated, then the "gwconfig" software will try to connect to theaddress specified in the "IP address" field.

If this parameter is checked you may choose a dialup connection from "DialUpconnection name". You must enter a "DialUp Number" which override thenumber used at the creation of the Dialup Connection. Also by pressing "Edit"button you can override the "User" and "Password" used in process ofauthentication.

You must note that if changes are made to "User" or "Password", thosechanges are made also in the Windows registry.

The field "Connection Timeout" is the time in seconds wait from the moment ofstarting the DialUp connection and the obtaining the connection state.

Serial Communication:

Serial Port num - enter the serial port used in case of serial communicationwith the gateway. The default value is COM1. This value must be in rangeCOM1-COM12.

There is a text limit of 19 characters for the "Directory" and "Name" fields and

2 characters for the "Serial Port num".A value check is performed for the serial port value. If the value is not in therange 1 - 12, an error message will be displayed and the incorrect field will becolored in red.Also, value check is performed for the "Directory" and "Name" fields. If one ofthis values is not filled or is the same as an already existent "Directory" or"Name" (are used for another system), an error message will be displayed andthe incorrect field will be colored in red, as shown in the following image:

Save - saves the setting and adds in the tree structure a system with themodified settingsCancel - closes the window without saving the settings.

Note: in case of reduncancy when two processor card are used the "Addsystem on position..." window will be different:

In this last window - you can notice one IP address, one port number and oneserial port number for each processor card.

2. Remove- If you select "System > Remove" then you will see the next window:

- To remove a TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system from the structure, select itand then click on 'Save' button: the selected system will be deleted from thetree structure; the folder (directory) on your hard disk drive won't be deleted,you must erase it manually. If you select Cancel the window will be closed.

Note: There is also a tree command for changing systems parameters: Name,communication type, IP Address, IP port number, DialUp parameters and serialport number.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - FACILITIES

1. Font

If you select "Facilities > Font" the following window will appear:

In this window you can select according to your preferences the font, the styleand size of characters. The changes will only affect the windows called: "ViewConfiguration" and "Modify Configuration".

2. Colors signification

The significance of the colors used in the "View Configuration" and "ModifyConfiguration" windows is here described, as explained below:- Dark blue - that position is available (free)- Red - that position is in alarm- White - that position is already used (busy)- Light blue - that position is not installed (the checkbox "Installed" from thewindow for configuring the settings of the port has not been installed).The colors which are here presented are the default settings.

There are also shown the colors used for "TextColor", "BackColor" and"TreeColor".All these colors can be modified according to users preferences by clicking onit.

You can select the color you want, either from the predefined "Basic" colors,either from the detailed zone of custom colors.

- The "Default" button is used to restore color settings to the original color set.

- The text column at the right of "Color signification" window explains themeaning of values shown for a GSM port in alarm. When a user selects theicon "Status monitoring" in a connected state, additional information will beprovided for GSM ports. If the GSM module is displayed in red color (thereforeno SIM registered) then after the port position and a line character a value isshown, describing the cause of the error.

- example of a GSM module in alarm displayed in red color. Here thecause of error "2" - "no physical SIM".

Possible error causes are:0 - GSM module in initialisation phase (programming)1 - no GSM network available ("at+creg?" phase)2 - no physical SIM3 - no logical SIM. This value may be obtained in the following situations: - when the "SIM index" rule is used for changing the SIM cards for the GSMmodule but for the current time moment no SIM value is specified in the "SIMindex".- If "LOAD BALANCING" algorithm is selected to change the SIM on the GSMmodule and the "Load Sim" value (the usage time of the SIM) is over the SIMmaximum time to use ("Max").4 - GSM module error - the module is not responding at "AT" commands5 - the GSM module is requesting PUK code

3. View print files

- This command is a facility for viewing text files located in "FORMAT" folder.These files can be made by printing data into files from different locations fromprogram. To see a file, select its name from the list and click the 'View' button.A window for viewing/editing the file will appear. - You can also perform searches by using the buttons marked 'FIND' and'NEXT' or you can send to the printer a listing of the file.

4.Commands

Use this option for entering direct commands for the system. This part of theOAM program is "expert level only". You may resize or move the window"Configuration manager” on the screen as you wish. The window’s position anddimensions will be saved in a file on HDD in order to be preserved for futureuse.

"Log Section" - if the option "LogFile" is checked, then a log file will begenerated. This file allows the user to analyse later the commands sent to thegateway and the responses from the gateway. The logfile is always named"command.txt". The option "Reset" is used to clear the file used for saving thelog.

The commands to be issued to the TOPEX gateway are filled in "OAM" editfield, at the top of the window. A command is sent to the gateway afterpressing the <ENTER> key.

The command window is useful for several purposes. For instance it allows adirect conversation with a GSM module (by using AT commands). The user canalso set PIN codes, start debugging, display the number of calls, etc.

"AT commands": if you want a GSM module to accept AT commands youmust put the associated port into a monitoring state (that port must belong toan installed GSM board).

Therefore the first command sent for putting the GSM module into ATcommands accepting mode is "set moni xxx", where "xxx" is the GSM portnumber (as it appears on the "gwconfig" panel). The gateway must send backthe confirmation message "moni xxx", where 'xxx' is the GSM port position. Ifthe GSM port can't be placed into the monitoring state the following warningmessage is received: "res moni" (in the "Exchange response zone" section).This message is received if the GSM port is busy or initialisations areperformed on that module. If that is the case the user must type first "resmoni' and then "set moni xxx". When the confirmation from the gateway is received, several AT commandscan be sent to the gateway:

AT Command Purpose Response

AT

Allows the user tocheck thefunctionallity of theGSM module

Should be "OK" incase of success

AT+CPIN?

The GSM module isinterrogating aboutpin code. This is auseful method tocheck if a SIM card isplugged in a GSMmodule.

-ERROR - there is noSIM installed or thereis another error-READY - if no PINcode is required-SIM PIN - the SIM iswaiting for PIN code-SIM PUK - the SIM iswaiting for PUK code

This AT command isused to check if themodule is registered

The response is:+CREG:<n>,<stat>,"xxxx","xxxx"where <stat> can be:- stat = 0 - themodule is notregistered and doesnot try to register toa GSM operator- stat = 1- themodule is registeredwithin a GSM network

AT+CREG? within the GSMnetwork.

- stat = 2- themodule is notregistered but istrying to register to aGSM operator - stat = 3- theregistration is notallowed- stat = 4- unknown- stat = 5- themodule is registeredand he has roaming

AT+CLIR=<n>where n=0 fordefault,where n=1 fornot sending theidentity andn=2 to allowthe sending theidentity

This command isused to enable ordisable the sendingof the identity (callerID)

The module isresponding with "OK"with a delay thatdepends upon theloading of the GSMnetwork. Until theresponse is waiting anadditional ATcommand must not besent to the module

AT+CLIR? To check the settingof identity

+CLIR:1,4 - theidentity is not send+CLIR:2,4 - theidentity is send +CLIR:0,4 - defaultvalue

AT+CLIP=<n>where n=0 fornot displayingthe identity ofthe calling partand n=1 toallow displayingof the callingpart identity

To display or to notdisplay the identityof the calling part incase of a call throughthe monitored GSMport

The module isresponding with "OK"

The response can be:OK - the destination

ATD<number>;Where<number> isthe number tobe dialed

This is an usefulmethod to make acall test directly fromthe GSM module

part has answeredNO CARRIER - thedestination part doesnot respond or it isnot in the coveredareaBUSY - thedestination part isbusy

ATA

Is used forresponding to anincoming call. Whenincoming call isrouted through aGSM module which isin monitoring state,the "RING" word willappear at each 5seconds. If CLIP isactivated then amessage with thecalling number willbe displayed:+CLIP:"callingnumber",xxx

The GSM module isresponding with "OK"

ATH The command is usedto end a call

The GSM module isresponding with "OK"

AT+COPS=?

This command willdetect and display allactive GSM operatorsin the gateway area

AT+COPS?

This command willdisplay the operator'sname to which theGSM module hasregistered

First Command:- AT+CMGF=<n>where <n> is 1 for

Sending a SMS

text format and 0 forPDU format. Thevalue to be used is 1.The module willrespond with "OK".

-AT+CMGS="number"This command isused to complete thedestination phonenumber. The module willrespond with ">".

- @send <textmessage>This command willsend the SMS

- the response forconfirmation is:+CMGS: <messagereference> OK- the response forerror is:+CMS ERROR:<error>

AT+SIM=<n>,n=0,1,2,3

(Note: here thevalues foridentifying theSIM card arefrom 0 to 3(instead of 1 to4))

This is an usefulmethod to check ifthe GSM module isworking properly:the command is usedto set a new activeSIM (this is not a ATcommand: it is acommand interpretedby the controller ofthe GSM card)These settings aremade directly withthe GSM module.

The confirmationresponse is "OKSIMn"where "n" is 0,1,2 or3 if that SIM wasselected

To release a GSM module from the monitoring state the command "res moni"must be typed.

There are also additional commands that are interpreted by the gatewayapplication. The command "help" must be sent to see the list of availablecommands:

set pin sim sss pppp used to set the pin codes for GSM modules atmodule "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set pin range sss sss pppp used to set the pin codes for GSM modules inrange "sss" to "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set/res moni ppp used to put / extract a GSM port frommonitoring state

send gsm at....... (used to dial a number)

set debug ppp ppp

used to start debugging on a port. The portfor debugging purposes is completed in "ppp"section: for example to activate debug forport 1 the command is "set debug 1 2"

set view pppmust be sent to port "ppp" after thecommand "start debug ppp ppp" in order toactivate the debugging facility

res debug ppp ppp

used to stop debugging on port "ppp". Theport is completed in "ppp" section: to stopthe debugging for port "1" the command is"res debug 1 2"

res view pppmust be sent to port "ppp" after thecommand "res debug ppp ppp" in order todeactivate the debugging facility

set tmax sss sss ttt

allows you to define a time interval ('ttt') afterwhich a SIM will be blocked. “sss” is the simcoresponding value. You may specify a rangeof SIM cards values. Value of 'sss' may becomputed as follows: number of card (shownin "Port status) * 8 + number of sim (0,1,2 or3) for the first GSM module or number of card(shown in "Port status) * 8 + 4 + number ofsim (0,1,2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

set tsim sss tttallows setting the time counter (loading time):'sss' is the sim coresponding value and 'ttt' isthe value in seconds.

set calls

it is used for displaying the total number ofcall attempts ("TCalls"), answered calls ("Tspech"), total duration of calls ("Dcalls"), totalduration of speaking ("Dspech) and thenumber of calls released from "A" side("Arelease") and from "B" side ("Brelease")

set calls offthis command is used to reset the previousvalues

set block ppp ppp command used to send block message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res block ppp ppp command used to send unblock message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

set loop ppp ppp command used to send loop message on SS7signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res loop ppp ppp command used to send unloop message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

set tchange 1800/3600 speaking time period in seconds followingwhich the active SIM is changed

kill call portthis command disconnect an active call on aGSM module. The position of the GSM moduleis specified by the "port" parameter

test callbqack idthis command is used for making tests overthe quality of voice. In this chapter thiscommand is detailed presented

The following commands are used for settings concerning the second SIMselection algorithm, called LOAD BALANCING. If you select the "equal load"mode of work for the algorithm, each SIM on a GSM module will be used for acertain period of speaking time, then the system will go to select the next SIMcard with the lowest load. The commands are:"set tchange 1800/3600" - speaking time period in seconds following whichthe active SIM is changed (the gateway looks for the SIM card with the lowestload for the same GSM module). Usual values are 1800 or 3600 seconds. Thisparameter is the same for all GSM modules and can be viewed and changed inany GSM settings window."set tsim sss ttt" - allows setting the time counter (loading time): 'sss' is thesim coresponding value and 'ttt' is the value in seconds. Value of 'sss' may becomputed as follows: number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + number ofsim (0,1,2 or 3) for the first GSM module or number of card (shown in "Portstatus) * 8 + 4 + number of sim (0,1,2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

Execute AT commands

In "Configuration manager" window the user is also able to execute ATcommands on all GSM modules.

The execution of these commands is based on a script file which is given ascommand parameter. This file must be placed in the same folder with"gwconfig" application. In this file the user can enter a batch of AT commandsto be executed over the GSM modules. The file must include the AT commands

you want to be to be executed over the GSM modules, the expected response,the time delay to wait the appropriate response and the the option to save theresponses into a file. The command to start this process is "execute -f xxxxx.txt" for all GSMmodules (where "xxxxx.txt" is the script file), or "execute -f xxxxx.txt -d GSM"to start the process just for the modules belonging to the "GSM" direction. ATcommands are read from the "xxxxx.txt" file.A window called "AT Commands Confirmation" is displayed for monitoringthe process.

In order to clarify this facility, here is shown a commented example of a scriptfile:at+gsnOK101at+cimiOK101

Each command is grouped as four lines:1. AT command to be sent to GSM modules; (in the example above thesecommands are "at+gsn" for IMEI code and "at+cimi" for IMSI code).2. response wanted for the AT command; (in both cases the expected responseis OK; the expected value is included in responses before the "OK" text).3. time to wait for the expected response; the next field is a value (0,1 or 2)that has two meanings: the first significance (for a value of 0 or 1) is the timedelay to wait for the response at an AT command. If the response comes in thespecified interval then the process continues immediately. The secondsignificance, if the value read from the file is 2, is this: the application waits allthe specified delay and the last message received from the GSM module issaved into a file. 4. an option about the saving of the response into a file; a 0 value means nosavings are done into a file, while a value 1 means responses will be saved in"atresp.txt" file. If the value for the option is 2 then the last message receivedduring the waiting time will be saved in "atresp.txt". The option value of 2 canbe used to verify the credit for prepaid SIMs.

Notes: - before sending any AT commands the application starts the monitoringprocess (the same as selecting "Status monitoring"). This is done because theapplication needs to know which cards are in alarm, which ports are in alarm

or in a call.- this interrogation is performed just for the SIM cards currently registered.Because AT commands can't pe sent to GSM modules which are in alarm, thosemodules will be skipped in the process. For GSM modules where a conversationis running, the commands are sent after the call is dropped. When the currentinterrogation for a module has reached the last port, then the process will berestarted for the skipped modules. The total number of restart cycles is 2.- after a new interrogation process is started (after an "execute" command isperformed) the file "atresp.txt" will be deleted.

The first column representing the portposition. The second column displaysthe current "Status" of executing ATcommands over that port. Possiblevalues are:- WAITING - AT commands are notyet sent to the port; (light blue colourbackground)- FINISHED - AT commands have beensuccesfully sent to the port; (darkblue background)- CONNECTED – the port was found ina call at the time when it wassupposed to be placed under theprocess of executing AT commands;(red background). Call is dropped. ATcommands are sent.- PORT ERROR- the port was found inalarm at the time when it wassupposed to be placed under theprocess of executing AT commands;(red background). The port will beinterrogated in the next cycle.- TIMEOUT- there was a timeout forreceiving responses for an ATcommand; (red background). The portwill be interrogated in the next cycle - CARD ERROR- the card to which theport belongs was in alarm when theapplication was tried to execute ATcommands for that port; (redbackground). This port will NOT not beinterrogated in the next cycle. - UNINSTALLED- the port is notplaced on any direction or the INSTcategory is not given; (greybackground). The uninstallled port willNOT not be interrogated in the nextcycle.

- The third (rightmost) column showsthe number of interrogation cycles.The maximum number of restartcycles is 2.

Voice Quality Tests - In the same "Configuration manager" window the usercan to perform tests over the quality of voice on two GSM modules. In order tomake those tests, the user must first define the ports on which he wants tomake the tests.

This selection is done in the "Callback Table":<identity (number) to test quality of voice> 1 <code 1> <code 2>The first field of the line is an arbitrary number used to start the test of thequality of voice. The second field must be "1" (callback functionality). The lasttwo fields are containing the prefix used in routing table, the GSM portnumber and the number to call.<code1>=<prefix>+032+0744000001 (GSM port position - 032, number tocall -0744000001 )<code2>=<prefix>+033+0744000002 (GSM port position - 033, number tocall -0744000002 )

The Topex gateway will call the GSM module on first port, and following itsanswer, it will connect the two, allowing you to check the quality of voice forthe respective connection.

For example:9999 1 720320720000000 720330740000000 - the identity used for test is"9999". The prefix used in routing table for the test service is "72". First GSMport is 32 and the second is 33. First number to be called is "0720000000" andthe second one is "0740000000".

In routing table must exist a record to route "72" (the test prefix) to SERV("Action" = SERV) and destination "11".

The command to start the voice test is performed from "Configurationmanager": test callbqack 9999When the last command is executed, the gateway calls the first number0720000000 from port 32. When the calls is answered at destination, thesecond part of the test is done. The phone number 0740000000 is dialed andthe two are connected.

This way you can connect two by two all of the GSM ports of the gateway andtest the quality of the voice on the respective connections.

Linux commandsAlso you can type in the "Configuration manager" LINUX-like commands that

will be sent to the connected gateway. The syntax must always begin with"system" characters. After a separation character (space character) a LINUXcommand may follow. By pressing ">" character after a command the softwareautomatically adds the destination file for the command output. Thisdestination is by default "/mnt/app/out/out". After such a command the usermay analyse the output file by selecting the "Output File" icon command (" ")from the toolbar.

5. Licence

This last option of “Facilities” menu is used to send a license message to theTopex gateway.

The purpose of the "license" feature is to implement control over the time-limited application running on the gateway. This limited application will serveincoming calls only for a specific number of days. After the expiration of thisperiod, the application will no longer process the calls. A license message issent by Topex company, message that is unique for each gateway (it can't beused with another gateway).

Licenses can enable the control over some of the gateway's features. Theavailable features are:- Basic- SS7- VoIP- Callback- Portability- Tax - Pulses calculation

The license-enabling message consists of several lines. This message can bereceived by the customer as an e-mail message. The user copies the messageinto the "License" window and it send to the gateway.The gateway should answer with the confirmation message: "LICENCEACCEPTED". If the license message is not valid, the answer will be "LICENCEREJECTED". If the license is accepted then the number of working day isdisplayed in the status bar.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ABOUT

If you select "About" the window shown below will appear in order to tell youwhat version of application software you have installed. Select OK to close thiswindows.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - HELP

This is the command for showing this electronic manual.

The left pane of the help window shows an index of pre-defined keywordswhere you can search for the item (Icon command, menu command, Treecommand, general considerations) you want to learn about.

The right pane offers detailed pages structured as "Menu description"(Systems, Facilities and so on) and respectively "Tree Commands" (Connect,Disconnect, Alarms, Billing etc) and "Icon Commands" ("Gateway Parameters","Directions Names", "Call Directions", "Routing Table", "LCR Table" and so on).

The left pane of the help screen also include the search facilities. You click onthe "Search" tab and enter the word or the expression you want to look for,for example <<billing files>>, then click "List Topics" to start the search: Thehelp program will display all the occurences it has found, together with thename of the help page where they are located and and the rank (1,2, 3 etc).

Please note that, according to the general rules for text search, if you enterseveral words in the "Search field", the help program will look for occurencesof EITHER word. This is like telling the help program <<search for 'billing" ORfor 'files">>.

If you want to be more specific, you should select the boolean operator ANDinstead of OR. For instance, if you want to know about the billing files, youmust search for "billing files", using quotes. In this case, the help program willdisplay only the occurences where ALL the words inside the quotes are foundtogether.

You select one of the occurences and click "Display" to show the respectivehelp page in the right pane. The words or expressions you look for will behighlighted (marked with reverse video). If you want to search further insidethe help page, press Ctrl F and a "Find" window will show up. You type theexpression to search in the field "Find what", You may select additionaloptions: "Match whole word only" and "Match case" if you want to narrow thesearch. You must specify the direction of the search inside the page, Up orDown. "Find Next" shows the following occurence of the word you want tosearch.

The Search function of the help program remembers the words you entered,even if you close down the help. When you run "Help" next time the same

word or expression will be displayed.

The window of each command now has a "Help" button of its own. This meansthat you no longer need to issue the "Help" command and then search or theitem of interest. When you run a command, for instance "Add System", youjust click its "Help" button and the respective help window will be displayed,showing you information about that particular command.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - CONNECT...

1. Connecting steps

First click on the Connect… property and wait until the connection with theremote TOPEX system is established.

A dialog window will appear after the connection was successfully established.The login procedure on the remote equipment will follow.

A dialog box will appear and in case of connection successfully established theOAM program tries to download the configuration information, as follows:· File with information about the installed cards ("card.cfg");· File with information about the port settings ("port.cfg");. File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.cfg");· File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg");· File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin");· File with information about pin codes on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("pin.cfg");· File with information about loading on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("loadsim.bin");· File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces("tmaxsim.bin");· File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation toLeast Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg");· Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting andprogramming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg");

· File with information concerning the parameters used for communicationbetween a Topex gateway and the "gwconfig" application, and the parametersused for debug purposes ("exec.cfg");· File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg");· Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC(circuit identification codes) allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files usedin case of SS7 card presence;- Files used for VOIP-H323/SIP configuration: "voip.cfg" and "h323.cfg" and"sip_pbx.cfg".

There are progress indicators for all of these files. All these files create agateway configuration. The "gwconfig" application allows the user to save agateway configuration into a separate location (directory). Then you can edit(modify) this configuration and later upload it to one or more TOPEX gateways.

There are a few situations that can occurr while attempting to connect:

1.The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to a system. If it can'tconnect at the fourth retry it displays the following error message: "PassingConnection Retry Error".

2. In the case of passing fourth attempts for login the following error messagewill appear: "Passing Authentication Retry Error". User will not be able toview or modify system configuration.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of theconfiguration files, it displays the following error message:"Downloading Configuration Failed". User will not be able to view or modify

system configuration.

4. If the dialog process between system and OAM computer falls (up to anumber of consecutive errors) a "Passing LAPD Retry Error" messageoccurs.

5. If connection breaks down (because of IP) during the configurationdownloading process or during the connected state, a "Connection Lost"message appears.

You can only connect to one TOPEX system at a time. So if you want toconnect to another system, you must first disconnect from the previous one.

Please note that there are two types of windows used by the program. There isone window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewingand changing the configuration (settings) of the Topex systems. When youwork with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands fromthe tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mousebutton you will be able to hide the window. If you work (change or view) witha certain configuration, this can be hidden using the right mouse button. If theOAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clickingwith the right mouse button over the status bar, you will make pop up awindow with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

Note: - In order to allow additional facilities, the application may also be launchedtogether with the following parameters:1) The OAM software includes a protection against starting more then oneinstance. If it is necessary to start the software more then one time, youshould use the following command to start the software: "gwconfig.exe -d"or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several Topexgateways.2) Parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administrationprogram to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a spacedelimiter and the three following fields: identification name for the remotesystem, user name and password (to allow automated log-in).For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>".In case of redundancy when the password is not explicity requested - thisparameter ("-c") must be used to provide the username/password to connectto each processor card.3) Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of date. Theinformation saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, livemonitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and

signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S"4) There are situations in which the configuration contains files with largedimensions and the process of downloading is taking too much time. In such asituation the "z" parameter must be used in order to compress and transferfrom and to proccesor card the compressed files.

All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

Note: if another user is connected at the same time with the "gwconfig"software from another PC, when you try to access the Topex gateway you getthe following error message:

This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to thatgateway has already been accepted.

5) in case of TOPEX equipment with redundancy (multiswitch or EONES) - theapplication is connecting to each processor card but the configuration is notautomatically downloaded like in a normal case. During the system setup - theuser connects to each processor card and downloads the current systemconfiguration - - Downloading Configuration. Every change made from OAMwill be done on both processors in the same time. If one processor card ischanged - then the current configuration can be send through the upload icon:

- Upload Configuration

2. Configuration modifier

Once the configuration files are downloaded, in the right side a "ModifyConfiguration" window will be displayed. In this window you can view andchange the current configuration (settings) of the equipment.

In the previous image (valid for multiACCESS/QUTEX equipments) you willnotice:- a menu bar with names such as "Systems", "Facilities", "About", "Help" and"Exit";- underneath, a toolbar with different buttons marked with icons;- to the left, the tree-like structure of installed gateways;- the right panel, blue, which is the main window;- in the upper corner, the flags for selecting the language;

The previous image is different for an EONES equipment. The EONES systemcan contains up to 11 digital boards. On the OAM pane the EONES structure isdivided on succesive screens, with three slots each. Every slot may hold a 2E1

trunk or a VoIP card. The main difference between multiACCESS/QUTEX OAMpanel and the EONES panel are the navigation arrows that allows you to gofrom one configuration screen to another - arrows which are located on thebottom right zone of the OAM pane.

Note: there is also a situation when an TOPEX EONES is slave of another

TOPEX - case in which there will be 22 E1 or VoIP slots. For example you canhave a multiswitch master with an EONES slave.

At the bottom of the screen (bottom left corner) thereare left and right navigation arrows. These arrows allowsyou to go from one group of three slots to the nextone or to go back

.

Types of boards:

S

AnalogueSubscriber board8 ports (FXScard)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

GGSM/UMTS/CDMAmodules board 2ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

PPBX junctionsboard 8 ports(FXO card)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

E E&M junctionsboard 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

B BL phones board8 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

RG Radio board 4ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

NT/TE ISDN-BRI boardwith 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

D E1R2 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

IE1ISDN-PRIboard (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

T E1SS7 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

R E1R1 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

V

VOIP card - withH323 or SIPprotocol (8,16,32or 64 channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

For multiACCESS/QUTEX systems, the configuration window is divided intothree distinct areas:

- Port status: the analog boards ports (subscriber (FXS), GSM, PBX (FXO),E&M and BL) are viewed;- Trunk status: the E1 trunks or VOIP channels are viewed;- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

For EONES/multiswitch systems, the configuration window is divided into twodistinct areas:- the area with SLOTs - on each succesive screen - the OAM pane displayshree slots. Every slot may hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card; The middle of thescreen shows groups of three slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on,up to “9,10,11”. You may install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP)in an EONES system, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. For the case of an EONES slave - the total number of slots will be 22.For the multiswitch system - if RTP proxy is needed - for example in case ofSIP users behind NAT - then a VoIP card will be declared (but not physicallypresent). Otherwise - the configuration can be empty. If transcoding is neededthen a TOPEX multiaccess or QUTEX equipped with a VoIP card will be declaredas slave to the softswitch configuration.- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

If a SS7 card is present into the gateway configuration then another zone willshow up on the panel: "Remote SP accessibility".

2.1. PORT STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)- In the Port Status area each column represents an analog board physicallyinstalled in the rack of the equipment. You can have maximum 16 boards formultiACCESS equipment (128 ports) or 5 boards for QUTEX equipment (40ports). Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter(character) followed by a three digit number. The letter is an identifier for thetype of board (Ex. the GSM modules boards feature the letter „G"). Thenumber that follows the letter is the port position. Each rectangle also includesunder the port value a text which corresponds to the direction name to whichthe port is allocated (this text is limited to 6 characters).

- Port representation is from right to left and on a card from up to down(position on a card from 0 to 7).

- For a GSM/UMTS/CDMA board the number which follows the "G" character iscalculated by multiplying the card number (the number which is written underthe rectangle with the card representation) with 8 and adding the position onthe board. For example GSM module "G040" is located on card 5 at firstposition (5*8+0=40). Module "G041" is located on card 5 at second position(5*8+1=41). The rule applied is number of card * 8 + position on the board.

- The port representation is changing when the user selects the icon "Statusmonitoring" in a connecting state. Then the color used to display each port ischanging according to the port status: used port- white color, port in alarm -red color, invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" fieldnot set or card error) and available port - dark blue. A detailed explanationwill be presented later in this chapter ("Monitoring"). For a GSM module it willbe presented in case of a registered SIM, the active SIM card (in the nextexample is the first SIM).

- example of a GSM module displayed in dark blue color which is placedon direction "GSM". The active SIM card on the "032" module is "1".If the GSM module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) thenafter the port position and a line character it is presented a value from 0 to 5which describes the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position.

- example of a GSM module displayed in red color with the cause of error"2" meaning "no physical SIM".

- Each port from each card can be individually configured by clicking with leftmouse button on corresponding port.

- Depending on port type different parameters may be set:

Port type Category Direction Number Restriction HuntingGroup

PickupGroup Target SIM

IndexS(Subscriber)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (for "BC"settled)

NO

G (GSM) YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES

P (JPABX) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

E (E&M) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

B (BL) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO

2.2. TRUNK STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)

- By default, only one digital card (2E1 or VOIP) can be used in a TOPEXmultiACCESS or QUTEX gateway. For a multiACCESS system: it must be inserted on position to the right of thePG (Processor Card); According, in the "Trunk Status" window only two Trunkrectangles can be filled with channels (if they were declared), the other twowill be empty (like in the next image); Upon customer's request, the backplaneof the multiACCESS gateway can be modified to accomodate two digital cards(2E1 or VOIP); for example you can have two 2E1 cards ore one 2E1 card andone VOIP card. They will be inserted on positions to the left and to the right ofPG. In this case, on the screen in the "Trunk Status" area all four rectanglescan be filled with channels. Older versions of the multiACCESS used 1E1 cards,

that is the E1 board had a single E1 interface. Consequently, on older TOPEXgateways you may use by default only one E1 trunk - placed on position to theright of PG. If you replace the old 1E1 card with a 2E1 card, you may have twoE1 interfaces. The maximum number of E1 interfaces which can be installed ina TOPEX multiACCESS is four and this is the reason why in "Trunk Status"zone the representation contains four E1 trunks.

For a QUTEX system: QUTEX allows you to use up to 3 cards of 2E1. thenumber of 2E1 cards that can be used in the front side of the equipment isconfigured only by the manufacturer.- if you use 3 cards of 2E1 is important to know that the equipment cannot beequipped with VoIP cards or other subscriber cards. In this case the maximumnumber of E1 interfaces which can be installed in a TOPEX QUTEX is sixth andthis is the reason why in "Trunk Status" zone the representation contains sixthE1 trunks.- If you use only a single 2E1 card - you can install it on the back side ofQUTEX equipment (near the processor card). The other 5 cards positions canbe filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use two 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side and the otheron the front side on the first slot from the base. The other 4 cards positionscan be filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use three 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side, and theothers on the front side on the first slot and on the last slot- If you are using a VoIP card - the VoIP card will be always fixed between thepower supply card and the processor card. Additional 2E1 card can be installedon the front side of the QUTEX equipment.- for a QUTEX system - the user must be aware about the number of availablecard positions (for FXS, FXO, GSM and ISDN-BRI)- positions from 0 to 4 can beavailable in case when just a 2E1 card or a VoIP card is installed. If another2E1 card is used then just positions from 0 to 3 are available.

2.3. SLOT STATUS (EONES/multiswitch)

You can have maximum 11 digital boards on an EONES equipment. Every slotmay hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card. The middle of the screen shows groups ofthree slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on, up to “9,10,11”. Youmay install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP) in an EONESsystem, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. The alarms for the respective E1 boards are also shown as rectangles withcorresponding names: LIS, AIS, LFA, RJA, BER, etc. The color of theserectangles turns to red in case of emergence of an alarm.

2.4.1. E1 card

- The E1 representation of an E1 trunk features on the first two rows thechannels. For each channel, the type of the E1 interface is shown as a smallrectangle marked with a letter, followed by a two-figure number - the numberof the channel. The third row includes representation of the alarm buttons.Each alarm button is marked with an abbreviation for the type of alarm itrepresents, as described in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal

AIS Alarm of Indication Signal

LFA Loss of Frame Alignment

RJA Remote of Junction Alarm

LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment (not foran IDSN or SS7 interface)

RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm (not for anIDSN or SS7 interface)

BER Bit error rate

- Code representation used on drawing the E1 channels:

D E1R2 trunk channel (32positions on a E1 trunk)

I E1ISDN trunk channel ISDN(32 positions)

T E1SS7 (32 positions)

R E1R1 (32 positions)

- Each channel from each E1 interface can be individually configured byclicking with left mouse button on the corresponding channel. For eachchannel the "Category" and the "Direction" parameters can be settled.

-Up to four E1 trunks can be represented. -In the following picture an E1 - SS7 interface (letter "T") and an E1 - ISDNinterface (letter "I") are displayed.

- The indication "SC" is used to highlight the signaling channel.

- In the previous representation with the E1 trunks, the card number isdisplayed in the right side of each trunk. The trunks can be placed on card 16(trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7). - In case of a 2E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is32 (this means that the first E1 interface is located on position 32 and thenext interface is located on position 33). The position on the left side of theprocessor card is 16 (this means that the first E1 interface is located onposition 16 and the next interface is located on position 17).- In case of a E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is 32and the position on the left side of the processor card is 33.

2.4.2. VOIP card

- The VOIP card representation features four rows, each with 16 channels.The total number of channels is 64 (compressed voice channels). For eachchannel, the type of the VOIP card is shown as a small rectangle marked witha letter, followed by a two-figure number - the number of the channel.Depending on customer needs, the VoIP card can be delivered with 8,16,32 or64 channels.

- letter 'V' is used for code representation for drawing the VOIP channels:

- A VOIP card is used instead of a 2E1 board; it can be inserted in the rack ofthe gateway on card positions 16 or 32. The protocols supported are H232 andSIP. The codecs used are G711, G723, G728, G729. Please note that the firsttwo channels on the VoIP card ("V00" and "V01") can't be used as valid voicechannels.

2.5. CARD STATUS

In the area "Card status" of the window, the first row is a representation of thestatus of the boards installed in the cabinet of the equipment. Each board isshown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the 19"rack.(from right to left). The current status of the board is shown by its color.The second row shows the status of the E1 trunk board: cards 16,17, 32 and33.

2.6. LinkStatus & REMOTE SP ACCESSIBILITY

This zone is displayed only if a SS7 card is present into the gatewaymultiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES configuration. This zone is a representation ofthe accessibility of the remote (adjacent or non-adjacent) signaling points.The TOPEX gateway can handle connections to maximum 32 signaling points(SP) which are represented by boxes with values from 00 to 31. Values from 0to 11 are used for adjacent signaling points and values from 4 to 31 for non-

adjacent signaling points.

The used colors in displaying the "Remote SP accessibility" bar are:- connection to a SP not installed - light blue - connection to a SP installed - dark blue. The information regarding theinstalled SP connections is reading from the "MTP Configuration" file (" ") -the enabled routes (option "Route x" where x is from 0 to 31).- connection error (alarm) to a SP installed - red. This information is reread ateach 60 seconds.

On the EONES system - the "LinkStatus & Remote SP Accessibility" zone isdisplayed on the last OAM pane screen - the screen which contains the lastthree EONES slots (9,10 and 11)

2.7. EONES - structure of slots

For EONES equipment - the type of each slot is declared in the bottom side ofthe screen using the " " icon. As you can notice in the next picture, there isa list with all slots (named "PG"), slots starting from 0 to 11. The "Type" ofeach slot is 'E1' for E1 cards, 'VoIP' for VoIP card and 'Not Used' for slotunused.

For softswitch and for configuration with EONES slave - the ">>" button willbe used to navigate to slots 12-23.

The "IP Remote" and "Port Remote" are not used in EONES configuration - areused in master-slave configuration. The "Rez1" and "Rez2" fields are keepedfor further developments.

The "IP Private VoIP" and "IP Public VoIP" fields are used for EONES andrepresent the VoIP private IP - the VoIP IP card and VoIP public IP. For VoIPslots a new line must be filled - the corresponding "VoIPx" line. For examplethe next line corresponds to slot 0 and contents the processor card address -192.168.161.3, the MSPD port - 9677 (for the next VoIP card it will be used9675, 9673, 9671 and so on). It follows the gateway MAC behind which theEONES is located (it is the same for all EONES VoIP card) and the VoIP MACcard.voip 0 2 192.168.161.3 9677 fork /mnt/app/bin/mspd -p 9677 --trace-cmd -v--mem 16 --gw-mac 00:48:54:1A:D2:8D -m 00:52:C2:40:3E:40192.168.244.150 --log /mnt/app/out/%d-%m-%y_mspd.log -

Please notice that in case of EONES - the VoIP configuration is performed hereon "PG configuration" - slot configuration. On "VOIP Configuration" window -the "PG Card IP Address", "VoIP Card IP Address", "Public IP Address", "VoIPCard MAC" and "IP GATEWAY MAC" will be empty.

The "RTP_IP" button is used to fill the IP used in RTP packets. This value canbe different if the TOPOX equipment has more then one ethernet interfaces.

3. Changes available by icons

3.1. Downloading Configuration

This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor card fromwhich the configuration is downloading:

The configuration is downloaded from the selected processor card.

When the configuration is downloaded - the next window appears asking fortaking over the new configuration. If the answer is yes - then the

configuration will be displayed in the OAM panel.

I

3.2. Uploading ConfigurationThis option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor/processorcars to which the configuration will be uploaded:

Once the processor card is selected the uploading process is started.

The confirmation message for succesfully uploaded is "The new configurationhas been uploaded!". If an error occurs the message will be "Uploadingconfiguration Failed".

3.3. Save Current Configuration

A configuration is the collection of files which are downloaded from a gatewayduring the connection progress. These files describe the mode of working for aTOPEX gateway. The "Save Current Configuration" (icon " ") may be use onlyin a state of connection between the "gwconfig" application and a gateway.

The next image is displayed allowing the user to type the "ConfigurationName":

After the validation of button "Save" a new item will appear in the tree windowlocated in the left side of the application panel. The name which was typed inthe "Enter Configuration Name" will be presented together with characters"viz". Note:the gateways to which the user is able to make connections will havecharacters "cfg" before the gateway identification name.

There are two possible options for a saved configuration:- "Edit" - this option will display the saved configuration in the same manneras for a connected gateway. The user is able to make changes. All settings arepreserved when the user choose the "Close" option.- "Close" - this is the option to close the "Edit" configuration mode. Click "OK"to hide the configuration window.

3.4. Upload Edited ConfigurationThis option is used in a state of connection between "gwconfig" application anda gateway. The icon " " is used to launch the uploading process. First step is

to select in "Uploading CONFIGURATIONS" the desired configuration to beupload. All available configurations are displayed in a list. The user must selecta configuration then press the button "Loading".

The uploading process is started. The progress of gateway uploading may befollowed in the "Uploading configuration" window.

A confirmation message is displayed when the uploading process has ended.

The "gwconfig" software will display on the screen the new configuration. Theconfiguration is used also by the gateway main application.

3.5. Gateway ParametersBy clicking the "Gateway Parameters" icon (" ") a window for editing severalgateway parameters is shown. These parameters are regarding IP address,firewall, serial connectivity and IP connectivity with "gwconfig" software,debug, syslog and SNMP messages to be generated by Topex gateway.

Network settings - this zone allows the user to change the IP address of thegateway (in the image the record started by "IPADDR"). Also the user maychange the netmask (line started by "NETMASK") and the gateway address(line started by "GATEWAY"). A line which is started with "#" character will benot taken into account. The gateway must be restarted after one parameterfrom the "Network settings" was changed. The icon used for restarting thegateway is " ".

Connection zone: these settings are related to the serial connectivity and IPconnectivity of the TOPEX equipment with the "gwconfig" software. Thecommand "Parameters" located in the "gwconfig" software is related to the PCcommunication parameters. The parameters set for the gateway mustcorrespond to those established for the OAM program.

Serial Speed - the value is used for serial communication between OAMprogram and the software of the gateway. Allowed values are 0 (it meansunused port and must be set when you want to install a dialup server on thegateway), 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (default value);

Serial Port num - specifies the number of the serial port on the gateway to beused for serial connection with OAM software. Allowed values are 1 or 2 andthe default is 1 (COM1);

IP Port num - the port used for IP connectivity; the default value is 9009. Ifthis value is changed from OAM software, then the connection will beimmediately lost. You must have the same port number established both in theOAM program and in the software running on the TOPEX gateway. Afterperforming a reset, the OAM software will be able to connect to the gatewayusing the new value of IP Port.

Firewall - in this edit zone - user can add incoming firewall rules. Each linefrom the edit zone must contain three fields. - first field is the connection type ("tcp" or "udp");- next the IP address follows - it represents the IP address from which theconnection to the port specified in the third field is allowed. - third field represents the port on which the connection is accepted.

For example "tcp 192.168.1.6 22" means that a TCP connection is accepted onport 22 (SSH port) from "192.168.1.6" address.

To enable firewall protection you must uncomment some lines of theconfiguration file.For this, remove the "#" character from the beginning of these lines:"LAN=ppp0", "WAN=eth0" "USE_FIREWALL=yes"

After this operation is done, you must reboot the gateway for the newsettings to take effect.

Attention!Be careful when you use the embedded firewall. If the firewall protectionis started without the of presence of valid lines in the "Firewall settings", thenthe Topex gateway will be no longer reachable from IP. In that case, the onlysolution for accessing the gateway is to use the serial connection via the COM2port of the PG card. Use this serial connection to fix the firewall settings, thenyou will be able again to access the gateway via IP.

Debug

Activate 'log' file - when the option is checked the debug messages will begenerated in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. These debug files have

extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy).

db_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages will be shown inthe debug log of the TOPEX gateway.

db_cfg - when the option is checked any changes on gateway configuration willbe shown in the gateway debug log.

- the option sets the debug mask that establishes for which subjects will begenerated debug logs. The items that may be recorded in the logs are: "PortActivity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM". To edit the "DebugMask" field, the button "..." must be pressed. Then the "Computing DebugOptions" window will be displayed.

- "Port Activity" option is used to generate debug records for all ports of theTOPEX gateway;- "ComCCS" is used to generate debug records for communication with theISDN and SS7 applications;- "SOmes" is used to debug the main application which is running on theTOPEX gateway;- "comUNIX" is used to debug the commands which are received from the webserver;- "comOAM" is used to debug the communication with OAM software.

Here you just check the boxes for the options you need to generate debuginformation.

Samples of messages from a debug log of a TOPEX gateway:

If option "db_alarms" was set then messages preceeded by "RUN" will appearin the debug file:RUN Com Err cd f cat 43 (this is an alarm message on card 'f' which is cardnumber 15 from the gateway) RUN Com Err cd 10 cat 4003 (this is an alarm message on card '10' which iscard number 16 from the gateway)RUN NLIS 4 (LIS error on card 32)RUN NLFA 4 (LFA error on card 32)RUN NAIS 4 (AIS error on card 32)RUN NRJA 4 (RJA error on card 32)

If option "db_cfg" was set then messages preceeded by "CFG" will appear inthe debug file:CFG Open for read ../cfg/trafic.cfgCFG Alarm run 0 ASRalarm 80 timeasr 12(min) nr min calls 1 alarmmask 0timetest 0CFG Save ASR at 30 minCFG Debug 1 Pstart 0 Pstop 320 SaveFile 1 CFG Trafic run 0CFG Trafic idle time 5CFG Trafic seize time 30CFG GEN TRAFFIC CALL 0 1234567891108 120 port 257 mod 0. Thesemessages contains operations performed over the configuration files.

If option "Port Activity" is validated in the creation of debug file then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:00257 7235150 pid 1 E1CCSidle ACTIV channel 100257 7235150 Digits 1234567891108 Ident 12000257 7235200 Route N 123456 ... NT 123456 ... RxT 900000257 7235200 Dialdig M_CALL len 3000258 7235200 pid 2 E1CCSidle CALL mod 1 mycat 540f b_pid 1 prtb 101param 000258 7235200 Digits Ident 12000257 7235250 Dialdig ACK_CALL->Dialdest00257 7250250 Dialdest TimeOut00258 7250250 E1CCSackout TimeOut|CANCEL ->BUSY. In this casemessages were generated for ports 257 and 258.

If option "SOmes" was validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "GEN" will appear in the debug file: GEN COADA 6 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:19:10 SysDay 2

GEN Run60sec 6872131 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:20:11 SysDay 2GEN Run60sec 6465996 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN COADA 5 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0

If option "comOAM" is validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:OAM ADD CARD 16 CAT 4003 (this is a message which indicates that the card16 was added to the gateway. Value "4003" is a category which describes thetype of card.)

Syslog - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") the debugmessages can be sent to a selected IP address. This Syslog is an UNIX-like filefeature that allows logging of debug messages and sending them to a remotemachine. The destination IP address is written on target in the file"/etc/syslog.conf". All logged messages will contain the identification of thegateway (you enter the identification in the field "Equipment IP").

The type of syslog messages is chosen from the "Facility" list: "LOG_USER","LOG_LOCAL0", "LOG_LOCAL1", "LOG_LOCAL2", "LOG_LOCAL3","LOG_LOCAL4", "LOG_LOCAL5", "LOG_LOCAL6" and "LOG_LOCAL7".

syslog_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages are sent tothe syslog destination;

syslog_cfg - when the option is checked then any changes made upon gatewayconfiguration will be also sent to the syslog destination;

Syslog mask - is similar to debug mask. This option establishes for which item("Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM") the syslogmessage will be generated. Click on "..." button and the next window showsup, allowing you to select the items which will be included in the syslog.

SNMP - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") alarms canbe sent as traps to a selected IP address ("IP destination"). The user canchoose the type of the trap (default value is 6 - "Entreprise Specific"), thecommunity name (default value is "public"). For an alarm appearance - thevalue sent is 0, and for an alarm disappearance is 1. You can allow thattogether with the trap containing the 0 / 1 value, a second trap with the alarmtext specification to be sent. The OID of traps are derived from the specifiedOID ("1.3.6.1.4.1.x")

Name - this field is used as a prefix for the names of different files (alarm,billing, activity, log and ASR) created by the gateway's application. If youleave this field empty, then the name of these files is given by the current dayand an extension (for example "12-01-05.tax" is the billing file created on the12th January 2005). If the "Name" field is filled then the names of these fileswill be given by the name you have typed, concatenated with the current dayand the extension. For example if you type "Topex", the billing file created on12-01-05 will be named "Topex12-01-05.tax".

3.6. Direction - Editing directions namesBy clicking the "Directions names " icon (" ") a window for editing directionsname will be shown listing the directions name. Depending of the gatewaymain application there is a maximum of 20 OR 250 directions. The “Directions” are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have commonrouting characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you must assignone or more trunks to each direction.

To edit a direction name, you select the name of the direction you want to editand double click the name. The following window "Edit direction name" will beshown:

The direction name must be a unique identifier - an alphanumeric text(digits/letters) of maximum 19 characters long. The first character must not bea digit. The direction name must not contain inside the character space " ".Otherwise an error message will be shown:

3.7. Calls direction - Defining the directions table

Click on the icon button "Calls direction" (" ")to open up the window fordefining the table with call directions. There is a maximum of 20 or 250directions (trunk groups).

At the bottom of this window - there are two buttons named "DIR IP InSettings..." and "DIR IP Out Settings". The first one is used to control theincoming access into the TOPEX equipment. The second one is used toestablish the VoIP outgoing destinations.

To edit a direction parameters double click on it and the next window "Edit calldirections parameters" will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Insert" and "Insert_Id"fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "Signaling" 4 characters and for "Signaling2"8 characters.

Name - the name of the direction (cannot be edited here);Type - can be PORT or DIR and specifies how that direction is addressed. Theassociated list contains two strings "PORT" and "DIR". A value of "255"indicates that the direction is ignored; when the "255" value is assigned to adirection - then the entire line will be displayedin white color. The name of thedirection which has "255" assigned to "Type" field will be displayed in red colorin the list used to assign a direction for each kind of port and also in all placesin which the destination will be a direction name.Overflow -overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this overflow direction when the current direction is unavailable(completely busy or out of service); you choose a name of a defined directionfrom the corresponding list.Overflow 2 - second overflow direction for the current direction. The calls willbe re-routed to this second overflow direction when the first overflow directionbecomes unavailable; you choose a name of a defined direction from thecorresponding list. Restriction - the class of restriction applied to that direction; from the list anumber from 0 to 19 can be selected.Ignore - specifies how many digits are ignored from the numbers received onthat direction; the first x digits of the received number will be ignored. The listcontains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Insert - specifies the digits to be inserted in the number received on that

direction; The maximum allowed is 16 digits. If you don't want any digit to beinserted you must enter "---" for this field.Note: First the ignoring operation is performed and then the insertionoperation.Max_d - maximum number of digits that may be dialed on that direction.When the maximum number is reached the system will automatically send outthe call to routing analysis, without waiting to see if the caller part still sendsdigits. This option is especially useful when you define directions for which thenumber of figures to be dialed is well known (for example the numbers forcertain GSM networks). The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Ignore_id - Ignores from the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number ofdigits you have specified; The maximum allowed is 20 figures. The Ignorecommand is performed before the Insert command. The list contains a range ofvalues from 0 to 20 digits.Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID the specified figures; The maximum allowedis 16 digits.Max_id - The maximum number of digits from the Caller ID to be sent to thesubscriber who has been called. The list contains a range of values from 0 to20 digits.Signaling - contains 4 digits with shape 'xyzw' with the following significance:

Digits Purpose

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x1000)

DIRCHECKCALLBACK- when this bit is setthen for an incomingcall on this directionthe callback table willbe analysed with thereceived identity(caller identity)

bit 3 (mask 0x8000)

DIRMODULECDMA -when this bit is set allGSM ports placed onthe selected directionwill be treated asCDMA modules

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0100)

DIRTESTNET (used incase of a directionwhich contains GSMmodules) - when thisbit is 1 one then theoutgoing GSM modulewill be tested if it isregistered

DIRGOODASR - whenthis bit is set then a

y (digit 2)

bit 1 (mask 0x0200)

RELEASE message issent on ISDN with adelay of 5 secondswhen a congestionsituation isencountered on GSMpart. The call will waiton the specified timea free GSM resource.

bit 2 (mask 0x0400)

DIRCATCALL - whenthis bit is set then allcalls will be cut(stopped) on the GSMmodules for which areprogramming isnecessary (forexample when a SIMmust be changedbecause of an usedalgorithm)

bit 3 (mask 0x0800)

verify CLIR - whenthis bit is set then theCLIR setting is verifiedeach time after theCLIR setting is sentto a GSM module

z (digit 3)audio level (in range 0-7 dBm for the directions withGSM interfaces) where '0' is the biggest level valueand '7' the lowest value

w (digit 4)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0001)- when is set identityis received on selecteddirection

bit 1 (mask 0x0002)- when is set identityis sent on selecteddirection

bit 2 (mask 0x0004)

- establish thealgorithm forchanging SIM on GSMinterfaces (when notset, the algorithm forminimal cost is used(SIM selection by timeperiods). When thebit is set, the "loadbalancing algorithm" isused (equal usagetime for each SIM)

- by setting it, youallow coupling of ring-

bit 3 (mask 0x0008)back tone while dialingon the next link,before the called partyanswers

By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Signaling" field will appear:

Signaling2 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. One bit called "Transit Q.850" is used to transfer the Q.850 termination codefrom the GSM link back on the E1-ISDN link. These Q.850 codes are availableonly for the Siemens GSM modules. For Voxson modules and when the"Transit Q.850" option is not checked the main application is sending acongestion message for NO DIALTONE message and for a NO CARRIERreceived under 2 seconds. The BUSY message is also received from GSMnetwork and it is sent as it is. A NO CARRIER message received for a valuegreather than 2 seconds will be treated as a release from the GSM network.A second bit called "Load balancing algorithm on SIM index" is used to enablethe load-balancing algorithm ("equal load") on the SIMs that are alreadyselected by SIM index algorithm.

"Calculate Tax Pulses" - for each direction (group of trunks) for incoming calls,you can establish the calculating (and sending) of the tax pulses. The taxpulses will be generated according to rules you specify and will accumulate inthe billing files. In any case, the calculated tax pulses are saved in the files. Inthe case of an ISDN connection (E1-ISDN trunk) these pulses are also sentout, using ISDN - AOC messages. You must remember that the mask must beapplied to the direction to which E1-ISDN channels belong.Note: You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in“Routing Table”.

The "Search UP" and "Search Down" fields are used for establish a rule inwhich channels are selected - for example for a SS7 E1 trunk - the order inwhich channels are selected in very important - if the trunk is used in bothdirection then one side will choose channels from the first one - and the otherside from the last one.

The "Priority" field is useful in order to implement routes with the same prefixto have different priorities. For example - when a TOPEX softswitch is used toroute calls to several TOPEX gateways - then each outgoing direction will haveassigned a priority. The customer can assign higher priority to the machineswith higher traffic capabilities and performances. The lowest priority is 0 andthe higher is 9.

Signaling3,Signaling4,Signaling5 and Signaling6 - each one contain 8digits which will be fully used in further development.

Verifications are made for the fields that are involving insertion operation:"Insert" and "Insert_id". The allowed characters are digits from 0 to 9, "*","#", "f" and "F". Characters "\","/","-" and "." are ingored in saving process. Anerror message is displayed in case of an error.

By pressing "OK" you validate the settings for the "Signaling" field.

Note: If the field "Signaling" for a direction (for a record with type "DIR" ) ischanged by modifying "Receive identity","Send identity" or "Audio Level", thenall the GSM modules belonging to that direction will be re-programmed (reset)in order to properly activate the sending and the receiving of the identity. Alsothe audio level will be re-programmed. A confirmation message will bedisplayed as follows:

3.7.1. DIR IP Settingsa) DIRIPIN section - this section is used to perform direction settings for VoIPincoming calls.

By clicking the "DIR IP In Settings..." button in "Define calls direction" windowthe following configuration window will show up:

You can Add or remove (Del) records about incoming VoIP calls.

Here the user must allocate to each pair <protocol, IP range> a direction anda maximum number of incoming calls. The name of the direction can be one ofthe already defined directions, so it can be “MYVOIP” - the genericdirection used for group the VoIP channels or another direction if youwant to use ignore / insert features. If you use the generic MYVOIP name, allVoIp calls will be treated in the same way, but if you use speciffic directionnames, you can define different rules for different incoming IPs. This allowsyou to perform operations such ignoring / inserting digits on the incomingnumber or identity (see "Calls direction") like for ordinary calls.

Examples:SIP 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for SIP protocol calls areallowed from all IPs, and maximum 60 calls are allowedH323 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for H323 protocol also callsare allowed from all Ips, and maximum 60 calls are allowed

Note1: in the "IP field" you can complete either a single IP (such as192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just fromthat IP. It is the same as using range /32.For example if you use 192.168.1.0/24 then IPs allowed are 192.168.1.x;For example if you use 192.168.0.0/16 then IPs allowed are 192.168.x.x;For example if you use 192.0.0.0/8 then IPs allowed are 192.x.x.x;For example if you use 0.0.0.0/0 then IPs allowed are x.x.x.x (calls areallowed from all IPs!);

Note2: The maximum number of incoming calls controls the number ofsimultaneosly calls accepted from the specified IP. If you enter 0 (zero) in thefield “Max Calls”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number ofincoming calls. The equipment will accept any number of calls.The default value is 100.

Proxy - must be enabled if the source IP is behind a NAT.Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination havedifferent codecs. This feature works only on the equipments supplied with aVoIP card (or there is a TOPEX slave machine with VoIP card).Congrate - this is the congestion rate. It should not be 0. The default value is1000.Maxrate - this parameter represents the total number of setup calls on asecond. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000.Prefix - this parameter was added in case when calls are coming with differentprefixes from the same IP source. In case of two such prefixes - the user canassign two different directions for the same IP source.Maxcost - this parameter will be used in further developments.

Nrdig - with this parameter - you can control the number of expected digits foreach call coming from the specified IP.Endcause - this field is the release code used when the received number has adifferent number of digits then the expected ones - "NrDig" value. The defaultvalue is 34.

b) DIRIPOUT section - this section is used to perform settings for outgoingVoIP calls.

Here the software application feature a possibility to allow overflow over an IPdirection. The user defines for each direction name a protocol (SIP or H323), adestination IP, a port used for signaling for example 1720 for H323 and 5060for SIP), the maximum number of outgoing calls.

In order to route a call on VoIP to a destination IP address - there are twopossibilities of setting in "Routing Table".- if you use "DIRIP" in "action" field then you can provide a VoIP protocol(SIP/H323) but just one IP.- if you use "DIR" in "action" field then you can provide a direction name (youdon't have any VoIP channel assign to that direction - because all VoIPchannels are assigned to "MYVOIP" direction). Here in "DIR IP OUT" section

you'll make the relation to an IP address and a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323).

- RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT.- Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination hasdifferent codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance if the destinationIP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding;

- Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. Thisparameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition("Define calls direction");

3.8. Routing table Click on the icon button "Routing table" (" ") to open the window with therouting table. You can define a maximum of 128 routing rules (also there aresituations in which the TOPEX machine can handle more routing records suchas 1024 or 4000 records). The user can consult the current settings of theTOPEX machine regarding the number of directions and routing records in thelicence window);

To add a routing rule to the table click the "Add" button. A new record will beadded at the bottom of the list (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To insert a new record over the selected record from the table the "Insert"button can be used (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To delete a rule for routing select it from the list and then click the "Del"button (the deleted line will have an empty "Prefix" field).You can have the same prefix more then once - case in which you can use"Move" buttons to change the prefix order - for the same prefix - the upperline will have a greater priority than the lower one.To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Prefix","Insert" and"Insert_Id" fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "IP" 15 characters and 4 for"Signaling", "Tax" and "Port" fields.

Incoming direction - this parameter is used in case of using several routingrecords with the same prefix in order to make the difference between incomingsource. It have to be interpreted here as incoming source direction. A"DEFAULT" value means that there is not rule to be applied.Prefix - the routing digits (the first digits which are necessary to route a call)- if you leave empty the field the respective routing rule will Not be taken intoaccount at saving action; The maximum allowed is 16 digits;- inside a prefix string the value 'f' can be used to indicate any digit from '0' to

'9'. For example "1f2" means all prefixes from "102", "112" until "192". Thisfeature is very useful because it allows to reduce the number of records in therouting table.Action - the action to be taken: (there is a list with six strings: "PORT", "DIR","SERV","HUNT", "DIRIP" and "LCR".- PORT- the call will get out through the port specified in the 'Dest' list- DIR - the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Dest' list- SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the'Dest' list- HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that was specified inthe 'Dest' list;- DIRIP - in such a case the "Dest" field will be interpreted as VoIP protocol -SIP or H323. The user must provide destinations IP address and port (in casewhen the default values of 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP are not used).- LCR - the call will get out by analising the LCR table for the index specifyedin the "Dest" field. This field can take a value from 0 to 6. Each valuerepresents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specifiedmoment.Dest - the destination may be:- a port number (in range 0-127)- a direction name specified in "Define directions names" (from the list)- a service number (from 0 to 19)- a number of a group of hunting (from 0 to 19);- an index to the LCR tableIgnore - the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the digits(numbering) sent out through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert - Adds to the number sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits; Themaximum allowed is 16 digits;Ignore _Id - the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sentout through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits;The maximum allowed is 16 digitsIP - is used in the situation when "DIRIP" is used to fill the action field. It isthe remote IP address used to establish voice over IP connection.Port - is the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when"DIRIP" is specified in the action field.Signaling - contains 4 digits 'xyzw' with the following significance :

Digits

Bit (fromright to left) Interpretation

Alloc BSS - this option is used in thesituations when the ring-back tone

x (digit 1)

bit 3 (mask0x8000)

must be identified in order to declarethe call as answered. This option isuseful in cases when the gatewayapplication must make the differencebetween a call answered withoutring-back tone and a call answeredafter a ring-back tone. Additionalsoftware must be installed on thegateway.

bit 1 (mask2000)

Simulate Tax - is used in case of FXOjunction - in which the answer atdestination can't be recognized. Insuch a situation this option has to bevalidated. The call is considered asanswered as soon as the call is madeon output link.

bit 0 (mask0x1000)

Retry Attempt - when this bit is 1one retry attempt will be made incase of a first failure on thisdirection; when this bit is 0 no retryattempts will be made

y (digit 2)

Check Operator (mask 0x0800) - is used whenportability facility is desired. For each call, adatabase interrogation is performed. The portabilitydatabase can be located on the same gateway or onanother PC. Additional software must be installedon the gateway.

Restrict ID (mask 0x0400) - is used for SS7direction in order to indicate that the identity isrestricted. The identity can be hidden if in the routing record -the ignore identity field is put to maximum digitallowed - 20.

z (digit 3) enable to set the number of digits which are waitingto take the action specified in the field "Action"

w digit 4)enable to set the number of seconds in which digitsare waiting to take the action specified in the field"Action"

Value of 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). Whena bigger number of digits is required, the value of 'y' may be used. A group of'yz' with values '10' means 16 digits.

By pressing button "..." when action="DIR" or "DIRIP", a window for setting"Signaling" field will appear:

The field called "Number of Seconds" can be filled with values from 0 to 15 andthe field "Number of Digits" with values from 0 to 20. A message error isshown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Note: there are situations when the "Computing Signaling Field"window will look different. When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "FLASHING", the window willlook like in the next image:

When the two specified fields have these values ("SERV", respectively "4"), theincoming calls will be forwarded to a "FLASING" tone. With the "Signaling"field you can specify actions about the tones heard by the incoming user:- "Connect To Music" - the gateway flashing tonality is provided to the

incoming call;- "Connect To DSP" - the tonality will be obtained from a DSP (with possiblevalues from 0 to 63);- "Loop" - the "Tx" and "Rx" sense are looped together;- "Quiet" - no tonality will be provided to the incoming call; the user will nothear anything;

The "Timer" field is used as follows: if a "0" value is used then the tonality willbe heard continously; otherwise the value will specify the amount of time onwhich the tonality will be played to the incoming call.

When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "PLAY_RELEASE", the windowwill look like in the next image:

The release cause for the prefix specified in routing table with action = "SERV"and destination = "PLAY_RELEASE" will be released with the cause specified in"Release Cause". A message to be played on such a situation can be alsorecorded and stored on the TOPEX equipment.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=SELECT PORT" is used for testing thequality of voice through the two GSM modules from the gateway (as explainedin "Facilities-Commands" chapter).

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=DISA" is used for DISA operation onISDN channels. For example a record could be:"Prefix = 8""Action = SERV""Destination = DISA""Ignore =1""Signaling = 0000"The meaning of this record is: calls are coming from ISDN with the prefix (firstdigit) '8'. This digit is deleted (because the value in the field "Ignore" is 1).DISA tone is provided. All those new digits, which are collected in DTMF tone,will be analyzed according to the routing table. If you want to be sure that allthe digits from the original number are deleted you can use instead "Ignore =20". If you want to force the call to be outputted only on a GSM direction, you can

have in the list starting with '8' the "Insert" field filled with the first digit of amobile call. For example "Insert = 0". Then, in the record for prefix "0" in therouting table you must set "Ignore =1" so one digit is deleted.Note: for a GSM port, DISA tone is provided from the GSM port by selectingthe appropriate setting in the "Category" zone.

Tax - type of billing. You can establish the prefixes that will be charged withbilling pulses in “Routing Table”. To can handle charging issues you mustchange the field “Tax”.

Prefix Action Dest. IP Port Ign Ins Ign_id Ins_id Signaling Tax

0 DIR GSM 0 0 0 00a4 110a

There are three methods (rules) for configuring calculation of tax pulse. Thefirst digit (the leftmost of the four) of “Tax” field is used to differentiatebetween those methods. Allowed values for the method are: 0 – no method, 1– method 1, 2 – method 2 and 3 – method 3.

Method 1)“1xyy” – upon answering the call is charged with “x” pulses. During the stateof conversation the call is charged with one pulses every “yy” seconds. So ifyou select “1” you must specify the number of pulses at response (10 in theexample below) and the time period for pulse generation (20 seconds in theexample below).

Method 2)“200x” – the calls are charged according to several zones and tariffs. Thezones are geographical areas where the tariff is the same. This kind oftaxation is performed by several fixed telephony (PSTN) operators. If youselect Method 2 you may change only the “Tariff Index” value.

The list of all zones and tariffs is defined in the next window, “Pulse calculationbased on Zones” that is displayed by pressing “…” button.

You can easily handle zones and tariffs.A maximum number of ten zones and four tariffs can be defined. In the image above you can notice the tariff allocation on each day of theweek.First, you have the day-tariff assignment. “day=>1,0” means that the tariff 0is applied on each “Monday”. The days of the week are allocated beginningwith Monday – 1 up to Sunday – 7. There is also an 8th day of the week, theholidays the first value is 8. These special days that begin with 8 are defined in“Define Holidays”

After day – tariff allocation the tariff – zone correspondence follows:- each line starts with a triplet “tariff=x,yy,zz”, where “x” is the number of thetariff and “yy-zz” is the time interval when the settings that follow are applied.- After the characters “tariff=x,yy,zz” come the ten columns, the zonesshowing time period when a pulse is generated. The temporization values arein msec, so if a value is “60000” this means 60 seconds

Method 3)“ 3xxx” – the calls are charged according with a tariff. This is an extension(refinement) of Method1. Besides the number of pulses upon answering andthe period for generating pulses, now you can specify also a period without taxpulses and the number of pulses per taxing period. This kind of billing is usedby several mobile telephony carriers. If you select method 3, you may changeonly the “Tariff Index” value. There are maximum 10 tariffs, so values for “Tariff Index” can be value from 0to 9.

The list of all tariffs is defined in the window “Pulse Calculation based onTariffs”, which is displayed by pressing the button “…”.

In the picture above, “Tariff1” is defined as follows:- one pulse is sent upon answering- then follows a one minute pause, for 60 seconds no pulses are sent- after 60 seconds one pulse is sent every 10 seconds.

Note. In the “Tax” field, there is also a facility for limiting the maximumduration of a call limit. For this, you select “4” for the value of the field“Method”. This is NOT really a method for calculating the charge for a call!

With this, you may impose a time limit for the call. The value for “Time” is inminutes, so the example above means that no calls longer that one hour willbe allowed.

SecondSign - here the user can specify in case of a SS7 route some

translations parameters as follows:

The first zone is related to "Nature of Address" information. We offer theposibillity to override the "Called Party" nature of address and "Calling Party"nature of address.The "Called Party" nature of address is changed by enabling the first twooptions "Check Called Party NAI" and "Override Called Party NAI".The original "Called Party NAI" - Subscriber,Unknown,National,Internationaland UK Specific - can be changed to "Override Called Party NAI" whichcontains the same list as the first one.

Moreover the "Calling Party NAI" can be override by selecting a value from"Override Calling Party NAI" and enabling the "Override Calling Party NAI"option.

The second zone named "Type of Media Required" - the route will be availablejust for the specified type of media.Possible values are "speech", "64k_unrestr" and "3K1Hz_audio".

The "Translation Occured" is to indicate for SS7 that a translation of numberhas occured

Ctime - this parameter establish the maximum call duration (in minutes). It issimilar to "Tax" method 4. If this value is set here (not 0) the "Tax" method 4will be ignored.

Search Mode - this parameter is used for routing in case of using routes withthe same prefix. In such a case a method for overflowing and dividing the

traffic between several routes must be provided. Each routes from such agroup must have "Retry Atempt" option in "Signaling field" (0x1000).

Overflow is performed if one of the following situations occurs:- when the call is routed on VoIP - the main application is checking if thenumber of simultaneously calls is greater then the maximum number of outputcalls established in diripout settings (see DIRIPOUT section).- when the call is dropped from the remote side with a release cause which isset for rerouting in "trafic.cfg". For example to reroute on congestion messagethe line "rerouteoncause 34 1" must be added in "trafic.cfg".

We assume this premise in the following explanations. This parameter is usedin conjunction with "Search Param" parameters:

SearchMode

SearchParam

Significance

ASR notused

the route will be choosenbased on ASR value

ACD notused

the route will be choosenbased on ACD value

Priority notused

The call will be routedbased on direction priority(direction specified in"dest" field).Calls from the routinggroup (with the sameprefix) will go mostly onthe direction with thehighest priority. If themaximum number of callsis reached (for examplefor a direction specified in"DIR IP OUT" settingswhen "Max Calls Out"value is passed

the route will be choosenfrom the first to the last

Down notused

one. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe first route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Up notused

the route will be choosenfrom the last to the firstone. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe last route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Circular notused

the route will be choosencirculary.

Percentspecifiesthepercent

Calls will be routed basedon percentage. The"Search Parameters"represents in this casethe percentage value. Theapplication running onTOPEX machine knows thenumber of calls on eachmachine.

Sign1 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign2 - is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" canbe override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” isdisplayed by pressing the “…” button.

To override the incoming category - the "Check IN Category" and "Override INCategory" must be selected. In the "IN Catgory" list - you select the incomingcategory which will be replaced with "Override IN Category". The possiblevalues are: "unknown""op_french""op_english""op_german"

"op_russian""op_spain""op_rsrv1""op_rsrv2""op_rsrv3""notused""ord_subscr""prio_subscr""data_call""test_call""payphone""uk_oper_call""uk_admin_diverted"

Sign3 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. Sign4 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

3.9. LCR TableIf you click the appropriate icon the "LCR index table" (" ") window willappear, where the table with the 8 indexes of LCR rules is displayed. Eachindex includes information about the selected direction for specified timeintervals on each day of the week and even the days that were declarednational holidays (non-working days).

To edit a certain LCR index, double click on that index and the next windowwill be displayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears the informationis displayed by default for "Monday".

For each day of the week, a list shows up with the time periods (intervals) thatspecify the direction to be used. In the image above , for 00:00 until 24:00the direction "LOCAL" will be used. The periods are structured as hours andminutes separated by character ":". When the user modifies the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are filled with the line information: period "From" to"Until" and the current direction. Those values can be modify and validate byoption "Mod". If you select"the Add" option, a new line will be added in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of a declared name direction arenot saved in the "LCR" file. The format of the "LCR" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size. An example of LCR file content is as follows:

#---LCR INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_lcr day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min dir(%x)l 00 1 00:00 24:00 0l 00 1e 00:00 24:00 1l 00 20 00:00 00:01 fl 00 20 00:01 12:01 11l 00 20 12:01 14:01 13l 00 20 14:01 23:01 al 00 20 23:01 24:01 9l 07 13 00:00 24:00 1l 07 4 00:00 11:45 1l 07 4 11:45 12:23 8l 07 4 12:23 12:31 1l 07 4 12:31 18:50 8

Each line is containing a letter 'l', a LCR index number (for example 00 and07), a mask (each day of the week has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and finally an index to

specify the direction used. This is the index in the "Directions Names" table (avalue from 0 to 19).Note: if the same periods and the same direction are used on different days(but for the same LCR index) then instead of two records in the file will bewritten only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operationbetween those days. For example "1e" is used to identify Tuesday, Wednesday,Thursday and Friday.

3.10. Classes of restrictions If you select "Restriction Classes" from the icon (" ") then the window"Restriction Classes" will show, allowing you to define certain classes ofrestrictions for the calls.

The window "Restriction Classes" includes 20 classes with 20 restrictions each.To edit (change) the restrictions from a class, double click on that class. A newwindow will appear, called "Edit restriction classes", as shown below. Using thiswindow you can establish up to 20 restrictions for each class.

Rules for establishing restrictions:- each restriction has 8 charactersThe characters can be any figure or the letters 'a' or 'f' - 'a' represents the figure 0 (zero). For instance a subscriber with therestriction aa000000 won't be able to make calls started with digits "00"(international phone calls).- 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restrictionf0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to call any number - it will be ableonly to receive phone calls.- '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there areeight "0" figures this means that no restriction has been defined for that field.- a class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a classwe have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal valuecorresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all therestrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will beadded the restrictions defined in the current class.

3.11. Table with indexes for selection of active SIM cardsIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "SIM card index table" window willappear, where a table with the 4 indexes of SIM cards is displayed. Each indexincludes information about the SIM selected for each hour interval of each dayof the week and even the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days)

To edit a SIM index double click on that index and the next window will bedisplayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, by default theinformation is displayed for "Monday".

A list is displayed with the periods (intervals) when the SIM card (1,2,3 or 4)can be used. The periods are structured in hours and minutes separated by ":"character. When the user changes the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are automatically filled with the line information:period "From" to "Until" and the active SIM card. These values can be modified

and validated by option "Mod". If user selects "Add" option a new line will beadded in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of an active SIM card are not savedin the "simindex" file. The format of the "simindex" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size.

An example of simindex file content is as follows:

#---SIM INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_sim day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min sim(%x)#---HOLYDAYS---#h holydayday holydaymons 00 1f 00:00 06:00 2s 00 17 06:00 20:00 0s 00 1f 20:00 21:30 3s 00 1f 21:30 24:00 0s 00 8 06:00 20:00 1s 00 60 00:00 24:00 0s 00 80 00:00 12:00 0s 00 80 12:00 24:00 1s 01 ff 00:00 06:00 0s 01 ff 06:00 12:00 1s 01 ff 12:00 18:00 2s 01 ff 18:00 24:00 3s 02 ff 00:00 24:00 1s 03 ff 00:00 24:00 0h 01 01h 01 01h 25 12h 08 01

Each line that specifies a sim index begins with the letter 's', then follows aSIM index number (00, 01, 02 and 03), a mask (each week day has anidentifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and aSIM card value. In the file the active sim card is written from 0 to 3. In alllocations in the "gwconfig" software values from 1 to 4 are used for SIM cards

(on GSM holders values 1,2,3 and 4 are shown).Note: if the same time periods and the same active SIM card is used ondifferent days (for the same SIM index) then instead of two records in the filewill be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an ORoperation between those days. For example "1f" is used to identify Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

Note: the records starting with 'h' character are used for holidays definition.

3.12. Defining the holidaysIn order to define the non-working days with special GSM tariffs, click on theappropriate icon (" ") to show the window named "Holidays Changing". Thiswindow shows a default list with the national holidays and you can edit thelist, add or remove non-working dates.

To add a holiday in the list click the "Add" button. Once a record has beenadded you have to double click on it in order to be available for editing, asshown in the window below.

To delete a holiday from the list, select the date from the list and click the"Del" button.

3.13. Callback TableIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "Callback table" window will appear:

Callback services assure lower costs for the mobile subscribers: from a mobilephone you just call the Topex gateway and hang up. The software checksidentity on incoming calls and if the telephone numbers are in its databasecalls them back. You don't have to pay anything for the connection! This isvery useful for mobile users in the field that have prepaid cards, which featurean expensive tariff. They can ring the Topex gateway located at headquarters,

and the equipment will call them back, put them into connection with othermobile subscriber or allow them to send e-mail messages via SMS.

Callback table is containing the following fields: "Identity", "Action","Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo".

Callback has several implementations (depending on the "Action" field whichcan take the values "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA"):- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACK" then the caller party will becalled back. The back call is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback"field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" fieldor a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number, then thecaller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACKONSMS" then the caller partywill be called back. The callback is sent to the phone number specified in"Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the"Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phonenumber then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phonenumber;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "SMSTOMAIL" then the text content of theSMS will be sent to the IP address which is specified in the field "MailTo";

- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "DISA" then a "DISA" tone will be providedto the caller part; The subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is calledback and receives DISA tone (if the field "CallTo" does not contain anotherphone number). "Direct Inward Services Access' allows the mobile subscriberto get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

To edit the "Action" field the button "..." must be pressed. The followingoptions are available "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA".

Note: Callback calls are recorded in the SMS files.

3.14. MTP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "MTP Configuration" window willappear:

In this window the signaling point (SP) definitions are performed:- "SP definition (own codes)" - this is the zone where the own (gateway)signaling points are defined. Each "SP" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each SP the "Code" and "Flag" must be set. For"Flag" a value of "1" is indicating that this node is an STP (signaling transferpoint). - "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)"- this is the zone where the adjacentsignaling points are defined. Each "Linkset" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each linkset the associated "SP" and the "Code"must be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition(own codes)" zone.- "Destinations" - this is the zone where the destinations are defined. Each"Destination (Connection ID)" is defined by enabling the appropriate checkbox"Dest" field. The first four destinations are filled based on "Linkset" definitions- "SP" and "Code" fields are completed directly if the correspondance "Linkset"is defined. User can define indirect routes using the "Priority" fields. For eachpriority, the linkset is set as follows: there are three priorities - represented as

three columns: "Priority 1", "Priority 2" and "Priority 3". Priority 0 is reservedfor the direct route between the own SP and the destination. For each priorityand for each destination, user can select one of the enabled linksets (thelinkset list is filled with the linkset values enabled in "Adjacent SP definition(LinkSet)" zone). For each destination (with a number greater than 3) theassociate "SP","Code", "Priority" and "Linkset" can be set. The SP list is filledwith the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone.

Note: the own SP code, the adjacent SP code and the nonadjacent SP codemust have the same "NI" field.

Note: the ">>" button is used for destinations from 16 to 31.

Note: the zone "Code value" is used to automatically convert a hex code usedto define a signaling point to the other known formats: "Code 2-3-8-3" and"Code NI-SP". The user must point with the mouse inside a "Code" edit field.The fields from the "Code value" zone will be filled with values . The option"Apply" is used to fill back the original "Code" edit field (an <ENTER" action onone of the fields from the "Code value" zone will cause a recalculation to beperformed).

Examples:1) to declare an own SP0 code "8b38", non-STP - check "SP0" in the "SPdefinition (own codes)" zone and then click the mouse on the edit field locatedin the right side of the "SP0" checkbox - you can directly complete the pointcode or you can edit the code value in the "Code value" computing zone. Hereyou can input the code in different formats. When you finish you press<ENTER> key and "Apply" button. You select "0" in the "Flags" field. 2) to declare an adjacent destination code (code "8103") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0- check "Linkset 0", select '0' in "SP" list and fill the point code valuewith "8103".3) to declare a non-adjacent destination code (code "8547") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0 on Connection ID 4. Select "Dest 4" checkbox, select "0" from "SP"list, complete code field and select linkset on the highest priority available box.4) to declare an indirect route (linkset 1) to an adjacent destination code"8103" (linkset 0) - select linkset 1 in the highest priority available - on therow starting with "Dest 0".

3.15. ISUP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "ISUP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "ISUP Configuration" window allows the allocation of the circuit groups (inrange from 0 to 7). - each circuit group is enabled by the option "Group x", where "x" is from 0 to6. - "Connection ID" can take values from 0 to 31. The " Connection ID" fields arecompleted in "MTP Configuration" window displayed after the user selects " "icon. - "First Port" contains the first port from a SS7 card. - "First CIC" (Circuit Identification Codes (CIC)) and "Range" are used to defineall CIC values.

The SS7 trunks can be placed on card 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6)and 33 (trunk 7). Ports for card 16 are in range 128-159, for card 17 in range160-191, for card 32 in range 256-287 and for card 33 in range 288-319. Forexample the field "First Port" must be filled with the value 256 for an SS7 cardinstalled on card 32. The range is establishing the total number of channelsfrom the field "First Port". For a single SS7 card the range field will be 32. Iftwo consecutive SS7 cards are used (for example 32 and 33) the range cantake the value "64".

3.16. VoIP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" "), the "VOIP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "VOIP Configuration" window contains two zones: "VOIP" and "H323". Thetype of protocol (H323 or SIP) is choosed from the "Protocol Type" field. Whenthe "OK" option is clicked - the OAM application will load the settings fromVoIP zone and depending upon "Protocol Type" selection - the settings fromH323 or SIP zone will be saved.

For the VoIP zone you can change the following settings:- Version: with or without RTP transcoding. Transcoding means that ourequipment performs conversion of codecs, that is the codecs used on theoutput are different from the ones used on the incoming call. For an incomingcall from VoIP that goes out also through VoIP, the RTP channel is processedby the multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES equipment and transcoding may beperformed. No transcoding means that the equipment performs VoIP signaling,but does not process the RTP channel, it goes directly from source IP todestination without going through the Topex equipment. In this casetranscoding cannot be performed.The conversion of codecs may be required if the caller uses codec g711, butthe destination supports only g728, so the Topex equipment must perfomtranscodig. But if the called party also supports g711, no transcondig is

required, and the RTP channel from the caller may be connected directly todestination.

- "PG Card IP Address" - the IP address of the processor card (PG card).Thisfield is supposed to be filled with the same value as the ones you havespecified in the "Network settings - IPADDR" (icon "Gateway Parameters").

- "VoIP Card IP Address" - the IP address of the VoIP card. There are two situations concerning the PG Card IP address and respectivelythe VoIP card IP address.1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in a LAN, then both addresses must bein the range IP addresses of that LAN. In this case the following ports must beopened if a firewall is used: the ports declared for RTP when the VoIP card wasinstalled (for example 3000-3063; to see the range of ports assigned for RTP,go to window "H323 Settings" - window which is described on the bottom ofthe window in the area called "IP Card Settings"). RTP ports are UDP and mustbe forwarded to the IP address of the VoIP card.The ports 1718, 1719 and1720 are TCP and they must be forwarded to the IP address of the processorcard (PG).2) when the PG card is using a public IP address then the VoIP card must alsouse a public IP address.

- "VoIP Card MAC" - this value represent the MAC address assigned to theVoIP card. This value is preset or is given by TOPEX.

- "Public IP Address" - when the TOPEX gateway is used inside a LAN andwhen the H323 signaling is performed with a machine from the internet, thenin this field you enter the external IP address of the LAN gateway. When H323signaling is performed with a machine located inside the same LAN, then inthis field you enter the same value as in the "VoIP Card IP Address" field.

- "IP GATEWAY MAC" - this field is filled in case of making RTP connectionsto a machine which is NOT in the same address range. This field will disappearin future developments (the MAC address will be obtained automatically in allcases, so you no longer need to fill in the value for the remote MAC).1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in the same LAN, then a program(MSPD) running on the Topex equipment automatically detects and fills theMAC of the target gateway. You will enter in the field “MSPD Parameters” thecommand “--no-gw”. This means no outside access is required. 2) when the remote VoIP gateway is on the the public IP address, then youmust first use an utility (MSPD executable) to search and find out the MAC ofthe target gateway, then you must type this MAC address in the field “IPGateway MAC”.

- “Audio Codecs”: a list of pairs <codec no><packetization time>, which areNOT delimited by commas. This is the list of codecs to be used by the RTPprotocol. VoIP uses several different codecs, having different parameters (bitrate and complexity).The codecs used by Topex EONES are coded with one ortwo digit numbers, such as 0 for g711u, 4 for g723.1, 8 for g711 or g711a, 15for g728 and 18 for g729. The packetization time is usually 20 (milliseconds), but it may be as long as 30msec or as short as 10 msec. For a specified codec, like g729, the number ofchannels supported depends of the packetization time. Increasing thepacketization time reduces the packetization overhead, so when going form 20msec to 10 msec the number of voice channels goes down form 60 to only 40.

- "Enable VAD" - this checkbox option allows the "Voice Activity Detection"facility to be used. Typical voice conversations can contain up to 35 to 50 percent silence. OnVoIP networks, both conversation and silence is packetized. VAD sends out RTPpackets only when voice is detected, thus decreasing bandwidth by 30-50 %.This way the Topex EONES will send voice packets only when it has voiceinput. When it detects silence on RTP, it will send to the other side a “silencepacket” that use less bandwidth and allows to be interpreted for generatingcomfort noise.- “LOG on MSPD” – enables logging on MSPD. The name of the log file will be“day-month-year_mspd.log”,such as 08-03-06_mspd.log

- "Port MSPD" - MSPD is a program that controls the VoIP, in this field youcan enter the number of the port to be used by MSPD, such as 9677 that is thedefault. - “RTCP” – RTP Control Protocol - This checkbox establishes if the equipmentuses or not the control protocol for RTP.The control protocol for RTP, RTCP is used for control and diagnostic on RTPsessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in theIETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintainQuality of Service . RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodicallysend each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

DTMFThis configuration area establishes the means of sending out DTMF in the RTPpackets. There are two methods, transmission of DTMF out of band in RTPpackets, or sending out INFO messages (as telephone-events). In SIP protocol,the INFO method would be used for the carrying of mid-call signalinginformation along the session signaling path (for example to send the DTMF

digits generated during a SIP session)SIP INFO method can be used by SIP network elements to transmit DTMFtones out-of-band in a reliable manner independent of the media stream. Ithas advantages of reliabilty (the tones are not affected by low-rate codecs), ofProvides DTMF tone generation for SIP requests and for Enables transport ofDTMF digits along the signaling path.The options available are:- “DTMF-RTP”: if you chek this options, you must also complete the Parametersfield to the right

- “DTMF INFO”: you select to send out DTMF tones as INFO messages- “None” : the sending of dual-tone multifrequency signals is not treated bythe Topex equipment.

Example for DTMF-RTP option: dtmfRTP 101 100 1

The syntax is : - payload type for DTMF in RTP (according to RFC 2833)- payload type for DTMF in RTP redundancy- redundancy scheme: 0 or 1, where 0=IETF and 1=AAL2

For the H323 zone the user can change:- enable "Gatekeeper" - enabling this option will allow using a gatekeeper.Type the IP address of the gatekeeper in the "Gatekeeper" field. The H323negociation will be performed by connecting at the specified gatekeeper IPaddress. If you check the "Gatekeeper" option, the fields "User", "Password"and "ID" must also be filled in. They will be used in the login procedure.

- "Prefixes" - is used to inform the gatekeeper about the digits routed by thegateway on that link. This value is the same with the "prefix" establshed in"Routing Table" to route the call on the VoIP card.

- "Trace H323" - allows the generating of an H323 log file, which will besaved on the HDD of the Topex gateway The name of the file is given bycurrent day.

- enabling "Fast Start" - this option determines the method used for codecsand voice activity detection negotiations. If the options is enabled, then bothcodecs and VAD will be negociated on call setup or on response by usingadditional parameters. When this option is disabled, then the negociation isperformed after response by using the standar H245 protocol. This negociation

will delay the start of the media session. If you enable "Fast Start”, thestarting of the session will be faster.

Examples:1) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from the same LAN.

Input data: the address of the PG card is “192.168.244.70”, the address of theVoIP card is “192.168.244.123” (MAC address “00:52:C2:40:3A:12”).Outgoing calls beginning with the prefix “0” will be routed through the “VOIP”direction to address “192.168.244.76” as shown in the next image.

PG Card IP Address – 192.168.244.70

VoIP Card IP Address –192.168.244.123

Public IP Address – 192.168.244.123(because H323 signaling is performedwith an IP address from the samerange, here is filled the same addresslike in the “Voip CARD IP address”

MSPD Parameters – “- -v –-no-gw –mem 16”. The log option is fixed andlog file is “/mnt/app/out/mspd.log”.Because the other machine is in thesame LAN the option "--no-gw" used.

Port use for communication betweenH323 and gateway main application –9010.

Codecs – “g729b,g729”

VAD – disabled

Fast Start – enabled

Gatekeeper - not used

Trace H323 – log on H323 enabled

Routing table: the gateway will route calls starting with "5" and "6" to the“VOIP” direction and H323 signaling will be started by connecting to“192.168.244.76” (remote machine).

2) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from internet.

The difference regards the “Public IP Address” which will be set with the LANgateway external address. The firewall of the LAN gateway must allow portforwarding for the ports which were already presented in this document.

3) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be filledwith the same value - meaning the external IP address of the VoIP card.

4) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case a gatekeeper is used (optiongatekeeper enabled and an IP address specified).

In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be thesame. The H323 signaling will be initiated for a call with the gatekeeper(instead of the IP address taken from the routing table). For login (identifing)to the gatekeeper field “Users”, “Password” or “ID” are used. If in routing tablethe prefix for routing calls on VoIP is “0” the in “Prefixes” field you must setalso “0”.

3.17. AlertsThis option (" ") establishes sending out the alerts, recording of ASR valuesand enables several debug and testing functions. Alerts are used in case ofalarms or if ASR values fall below a selectable level.

In case of occurrence of different pre-programmed events, the TOPEX systemcan issue warnings (alerts) and also send out a description of the events. Thealarms may be sent to the administrator of the equipment in three ways:- by e-mail (a warning message that has attached the alarm files)- by SMS- as a call on the mobile phone of the operator (several beeps)

The "Alerts" command shows the window for setting up the parameters for the

alerts:

The zone called "Alert zone" which is used to activate (enable) thetransmission of the alerts. For activate the alerts the option ("Alert activated")must be checked.

The field "ASR alert limit" is used to set a level for activating ASR alerttransmission when ASR value falls below the specified value. The ASR value isread at time interval specified in "Time period for checking". To validate theASR alert a minimum number of calls must be set. Of course, if during the

specified time period you have only one call, and it is not connected, this won'tbe relevant for ASR, so it is not taken into account.

There is the possibility to validate the type of alarms for which alerts aretransmitted: "CCS-ISDN", "ASR" and "ALL".

For testing alerts purposes you can use the field "Timer for testing alerts". Fora "0" value in this field the alerts will be sent only in real situations. Fortesting purposes a non-zero value (specyfing the number of minutes) must beused.

"DIAL alert" is used if you want the alerts to be sent via phone calls. You mustenter the phone number to be called upon alert. You may also set the numberof beeps (1,2,3 etc) to be sent out in case of alert. By means of this variablenumber of beeps an operator can determine from which TOPEX system thealert is coming from: gateway A sends one beep, gateway B send two beepsand so on.

"SMS alert" is used in case of alerts by sending a SMS message to a mobilephone. You must enter the phone number to be alerted by SMS. You can alsochange the content text of the SMS alert message. This SMS alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by pressing "File..." option to the right ofthe "SMS alert" area.

"MAIL alert" is used in case of sending e-mail alert messages to an emailaddress. In case of activation of this kind of alert the following e-mail relatedparameters must be set: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject","Server" and "Port". You also have the facility to send the alert message with the current alarm filefor the TOPEX gateway as an attachment. The text of the e-mail alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by clicking "File..." option to the right ofthe "MAIL alert" area. The following fields must not contain spaces inside thevalue: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject" and "Server";

"SMS2MAIL" - this option is used to forward all incoming SMS to an emailaddress. This option is placed here because it is working together with thesettings estabished in "MAIL alert" zone. The SMS content is sent to theaddress specified in "MailTo" field.

The "ASR Reading Parameters" zone is for establishing the ASR readingprocedure. First, to activate the ASR reading process the option "Validate ASRreading" must be checked. Then the interval (in minutes) for reading andsaving ASR values is set in "ASR read period" field. Please note that this valuemust be the same with the value entered above in the field "Time period for

checking" used for ASR alerts.

The "Debug Parameters" zone is used for the debugging process. This facility isintended to help debugging the TOPEX system: log files for the equipment arecreated and respectively displayed. If the "Validate Debug" box is checked thenall activities on ports specified in range "From" and "To" is displayed. If"Validate Saving" is also checked, this information will be saved in log files ontarget.

The "GSM" zone is used for:1)- "CELL, LEVEL and Channel" interrogation. The GSM scanning is launchedby checking the option "Validate Cell Interrogation". The "GSMScan" value isthe value in seconds at which each GSM module is searched upon cell, leveland channel. If a call is passing through a GSM module and if the "GSMScan"value is reached, the interrogation upon the mentioned values will be doneafter the call ending.2)- the reset of the "Load Sim" values - the user can enable the option"Validate Reset of Load Sim values" and specify the "Day and Time" at whichthose time of SIM using values are resetting. User will fill the time moment in"hour minut day" format. These values are separated by space character. The"Load Sim" values can be reset in each day at the specified time "hour minut"if the "day" is filled with "0". The "Load Sim" values can be reset on eachmonth at the specified time "hour minut" if the "day" is filled with the desiredday. If one of the values "hour" and "minut" are wrong then the reset will notoccur.

There are the following text limits at the fields: "ASR alert limit", "ASR readperiod", first port and last port - 3, "Time period for checking" - 4, "Minimumcalls number" - 4, "Timer for testing alerts" - 3,"Beep Number Identifier" - 2,"Gateway address","Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject" and "Server" - 40.

"Simserver zone" - is used in case of a multiACCESS/QUTEX equipment whichis working with GSM cards simserver ready. The "simserver" zone contains anactivation checkbox "Activate", the IP of the simserver and the port to connectto (default value is 13001). Finally the "Name" is the gateway identificationname, name which is also set in simserver to recognize the gateway client.

3.18. Test callsFor enabling test calls you can use the icon"Test calls" (icon " "):

In "TESTING calls" window is enabled to define call tests which can beperformed by the gateway. Test calls must be first enabled with the option"run 1" (to disable test calls a line with option "run 0" must be used). For eachtest call two parameters will be used: "pause xx" and "con yy" which representthe time period between two attempts (xx) and the time to keep the call (yy).After the record preceded by "#nr" the test calls definition follows: each linewill contains the number to be dialed, the identity of the call, the caller portand a value of 0 or 1. With value '0' in a record the number will be firstanalyzed with the definition of the direction (the direction that contains thespecified port) and after that will be analyzed according to the routing table.With a value of '1' in a record, the number will be sent out directly from theport.

For example a test record can be "12345 101 257 1". It means an outgoingcall with number '12345" and identity "101' is sent on port 257.

Note1) a good method for testing calls and to analyse the routing process is toadd a subscriber card and to add a record in the "TESTING calls" window withan installed port from the subscriber card (that port must have also the optionof making calls). For example if the card 15 is a subscriber card then a recordfor port "120" will be:"0700000000 120 120 0"Note2) for making test calls on E1 trunks or GSM cards an example was givingbefore:

"12345 101 257 1",For sending the number digit by digit a value "0000" must be used to fill the"Signaling" field for the direction that contains the test port.Note3) test calls are very useful in finding the available number of GSMchannels. Test calls are simultaneously generated towards the vocalmessaging. After the test calls sequence is started, the number of connectedcalls can be observed by using "Live monitoring" facility.

Moreover a new method can be use to generate non-simultaneously calls - thetime delay between attempts and the time for keeping the calls connected wasthe same for all test calls from the list. This new method allows the user tocreate a list of test calls in order to have variable time delays between them.Also, not all calls from the list are launched at the same time.

This new method includes the following parameters: (the lines beginning with"#" are comments, used just to show you the structure of commands for testcalls):#traffic_run 1/0 nr_simultaneous_calls(max 4 calls) call_typetraffic_run 0 1 test#traffic_idle t_idle(seconds of idle time betwen calls) rand_add(random addedseconds)traffic_idle 10 5#traffic_sel t_sel(seconds of selection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_sel 5 3#traffic_con t_con(seconds of connection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_con 1 2#traffic_call nr id#traffic_call 5113 100traffic_call 5112 100traffic_call 5777 100

You must notice that each line contains the prefix "traffic_" concatenated with"run", "idle", "sel" ,"con’ and "call". In order for this new method to work, theuser must create a direction with the name "SENDCALL" (icon "DirectionsNames"). The "Type" field must be completed with "DIR" in "Calls directions".All those test calls are generated from this fictive direction "SENDCALL".

- "traffic_run 0 1 test" – to disable this second method for launching calls: youcan type "0" after "traffic_run". To enable the method – you must type "1".

The second number specified in this line is the number of test calls that can begenerated at the same time (in the example above it is "1"). The list with the

test calls is described by the lines beginning with "trafic_call".

The "test" word is used to specify the tonality heard by the called part (in thiscase a flashing tone).

- "traffic_idle 10 5" – specifies the time to wait before to launch a new testcall. The first digit (in this case 10) means the number of seconds to wait. Tothis value you may add the next value (it can be present or not ) which meansa range for a random value. The random number can be between zero andthat value. In the above example, the random range of five means that therandom value is between 0 and 5. Consequently, the waiting time will getrandom values between 10 (10+0) and 15 (10+5).

- "traffic_sel 5 3 " – specifies the value used to simulate the selection time fortest calls. Here also the first digit (in this case 5) means the starting numberof seconds to simulate the selection time. To this start value may be added thenext digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,three means a random value between 0 and 3. Thus the number used tosimulate the selection time for test calls will have get random values between5 (5+0) and 8 (5+3).

- "traffic_con 1 2" – specifies the value used to simulate the conversation timefor test calls. The first digit (in this case 1) means the starting number ofseconds to simulate the conversation time. To this start value may be addedthe next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,two means a random value between 0 and 2. Hence, the value used tosimulate the duration of the test calls will take random values between 1(1+0) and 3 (1+2)

- "traffic_call nr id" – specifies the number("nr") to be dialed and the identify("id")

3.19. Transferring filesYou can transfer files from and into the TOPEX gateway.By choosing the associated icon (" ") , a window for file exchange will bedisplayed.

The left panel ("Gateway Files - current") shows up the structure of files andfolders from the system associated directory.You will see directories named "Alarms","Billing","Activity","Log" and "Viewer".

You can change between those directories and the root directory of theconnected system.

The right panel of the window ("Gateway files") shows the files and foldersstructure located on the TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateway that isconnected to the PC. Directory content ("bin" directory) of gateway files isautomatic downloaded. On the gateway you can consult three directories "bin"(where is located the telephony application), "cfg" (where the configurationfiles are stored) and "out" (where system makes files for alarms, billing andmonitoring (activity)). You may navigate through these directories of the rightpanel by double clicking.

When you want to download a file from gateway you enter in the directoryfrom which you want to make download. You choose a file. The file isdownloaded (you have a progress indication) on to the OAM computer.

It is mandatory to download files to appropriate destination: alarms (*.alrformat) and asr (*.asr format) in "Alarms", billing (*.tax format) in "Billing"and activity (*.mon format) in "Activity". If you want to view a text file youcan download it to "Viewer" folder. Options from tree commands "Alarms","Billing" and "Activity" are working with files with the previous extensions.

Automatic file transfer is allowed in connection state. You click on the "AutoDownloading Files" icon button (" ") to show the window called "DownloadFiles From Gateway".

The purpose of the automatc file transfer is to generate automatically requestsfor billing, alarms, activity, ASR and SMS files on the selected time interval.The finalization mode for each downloaded file will be either "ERROR" or "OK".The files are automatically saved in directories according to their type. Thedefault value for the time interval is the current day.

The option "Download Billing Records (for today) starting with hour: " is usedto download the records which are started with the specified hour from thebilling current day file. The specified hour may be changed. The option "Download Billing Records (for today) last: 100 (records)" is used todownload last 100 records from the billing current day file. The number of lastrecords to be downloaded may be changed. For one of these last two options (which cannot be set in the same time) theresulted billing records will be automatically displayed.

3.20. Clean HDD SpaceThis option (" ") allows you to delete files from the TOPEX system. This can beneeded if the equipment has been in use for a long time and has stored manylarge files on the hard disk. You may want to delete the older or not importantfiles to make room for new files. You must choose the associated icon ("Clean HDD Space").The window "Deleting Files From Gateway" allows you to choose a time period

and the type of files to be deleted. The type of files can be:- billing files (extension "*.tax")- alarms files (extension "*.alr") - activity files (extension "*.mon")- ASR files (extension "*.asr") - SMS files (extension "*.sms")- log files (extension "*.log"); these files are created by the gatewayapplication when "Validate Debug" and "Validate Saving to File" are checked in"Parameters for ALERTING" window (icon option " "). Informations that aresaved in this kind of files is about the port activity for all ports in range "From"until "To", values which are specified in the same window for defining alerts.- status files (extension "*.sta"); these files are used to store the state for allports (by state of a port we are meaning uninstalled, free, busy or alarm).These files are used by the web application.

By pressing "OK" option the requests for deleting files are sent to the gateway.The process of deleting the files can be observed in a listbox which is displayedin the "Deleting Files From Gateway". At the end of deleting process a requestfor reading HDD occupied space is sent to the gateway. The indicator of theHDD space from the status bar will be changed if the occupied HDD space waschanged on the gateway.

3.21. File EditorThis option (" ") allows you to edit the configuration (.txt) files that can beloaded later into the TOPEX system. You must choose the associated icon ("FileEditor").

The first window "File Editor Selection" allows you to navigate through thesubdirectories structure in the system root folder.

From this window you choose the text file to edit, then a new dialog windowwill show up, with the content of the file. The selection is done by doubleclicking on the name of the file, so there is no need for an "OK" button - thiswindow has only a "Cancel" button at the bottom.

There is a limit for the size of files to be edited, they should not be over65,535 bytes in length.

File content is saved by "Save" option.

3.22. Loading hourYou can upload the time into the TOPEX system. When you click on the icon ("

") for loading hour a dialog box will appear in which you can change also thecomputer time. Loading hour is very important because you modify thegateway clock: time and date. So this action is protected by password. Thispassword is always "topex".

The default value shown is the date and time that are set on the computerwhere the OAM program is running. Before sending the time to the system,the program performs a validity check, so if you enter for the time and datevalues that are not valid you will receive an error message: 'Error in changinghour'.

3.23. Automatic download of alarms and ASRAllows auto-download of alarms and ASR info from all of the TOPEX systemsthat are connected (with IP communication). The icon command (" ") is"Automatic Requests". When you click it, the OAM program will automaticallylaunch (at pre-established time intervals) interrogation requests for theinstalled TOPEX systems. The requests may be about alarmed modules andabout ASR value (both general and instantaneous). This is very useful whenyou have several TOPEX gateways, because you no longer need to manuallyconnect to each one and ask it for the alarms and ASR information.

You must set a "Period" (in seconds) for the interrogation cycle of all TOPEXsystems that are connected. The values must be greater or at least equal to 60seconds.Then you select a threshold for the ASR value: when the general orinstantaneous value is under the established level, the value is shown in awindow (called "ASR"). By double-clicking with left mouse button a statistic isshown with the last 24 values for general and instantaneous ASR (for thesystem which is currently in process of automatic interrogation).

The "ALARMS Alert " panel of the Automatic Requests window allows you toselect different kind of alarms. When these alarms occur in the TOPEX system,they will be shown and stored.

When the interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown inthe dialog window title, as you see in the first image. After you have selectedthe types of alarms, you may press either "Start" or "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed at any moment byselecting "Change" value.

When interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown in thedialog window title. Valid options are "Start" and "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed whenever bychoosing "Change" value. When automatic interrogation process is started onthe status bar in the first box (leftmost) the following text will appear: "AUTOREQUEST ACTIVATED in xxx !!!" where "xxx" is the number of seconds untilthe interrogation request will be made.

When interrogation process is started the text "STARTED" is shown in thedialog box title. Valid options are "Stop" for canceling the interrogationprocedure, "Change" for changing parameters and "Cancel". There is also"View" option for displaying a statistics with the last 24 values forinstantaneous ASR (for the TOPEX systems which are in process of automaticinterrogation).

When the specified period expires the request for system interrogation will belaunched. On status bar will be displayed the text "AUTO REQUEST INPROGRESS !!!". In the next box to the right side all messages will be enclosedby the system name (connection name).(For example "cfg_GSM")

During the automatic interrogation procedure it is allowed to connect to asystem only if the OAM software is in a pause between two interrogations. Inthe contrary case it is allowed to stop the automatic procedure which is inprocess (when in the status bar is written "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS !!!")by selecting the "Disconnect" command from any of the systems. Then theOAM program will again wait for the established time period before issuingautomatic requests for interrogation.

Notes:

- normally if you have connected to a TOPEX system you can perform"Disconnect" only from that system. But when in automatic request mode, the"Disconnect" command may be sent from any system!- If the connection is broken with "Disconnect" command, only the ASR andalarms that have already been scanned will be downloaded.

3.24. GSM Reprogramming

This reset command (" ") is useful in situations when there is need to refreshthe settings for all the GSM modules. This GSM refresh must be issued to allow the proper setting of the receiving orsending of the identity through GSM modules and also the setting of the audiolevel.

There is a confirmation message which is requested to the user, before to startthe reprogramming procedure.

3.25. Halt and Reboot commandsThose two commands are similar to the LINUX commands. First commandHALTS (" ")(stops) the machine and the second REBOOT (" ") the machine.After HALT command, the TOPEX system may be safely disconnect from thepower supply. Incorrect shut down of the equipment may cause damage of thefile system and other problems such as a large delay in startup due to the filesystem check.

3.26. Visualization ListThe icon " " display a visualization window with the settings of all ports(rights, number, target, direction, SIM index regarding type of port).

The list is build in physical order of ports starting with 000.

In the picture above it can be seen GSM positions for which are given thefollowing settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT',direction, SIM index, target, Pin1,Pin2, Pin3 and Pin4 values. Also it can be seen ISDN channels settings:'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT' and direction.

By using the 'FIND' and 'NEXT' buttons you may search for a text string in thiswindow.

4. Print options

In all situations involving a print command a dialog box will appear. It willcontains two options:

- print to printer (a printer must be installed into system)

- print to file (in this situation a file name will be given for saving data)

5. NOTE

There are two types of windows used. There is a window for viewing filescontent and another window for viewing or modifying system configuration.When we are working with files content we can operate on the tree commandsfor the chosen system and when we are finishing we press the right button and

hide the window. If we are working viewing a configuration we can hide it bypressing right button. If you are connected and the configuration window isabove by pressing right button you are questioning if you want to disconnect.

At the right side of the status bar there is an indicator for connection: it is bluewhen we are connected to a system and it is red when we are not connected toany system.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - DISCONNECT...

Disconnect, breaks the connection to a connected system. We cannotdisconnect a different system other that the connected system.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - Modify parameters

- If you select "Parameters" the following window pops up:

Is permitted to modify System name, IP address and IP port number, serialport (in range COM1-COM12) and the link type "Serial communication/IPcommunication". Also the "DialUp" parameters can be changed: "Use PPPaddress", "DialUp connection name", "DialUp Number", user name andpassword used for authentication and "Connection Timeout".

There is a text limit of 19 characters for the "Name" field and 2 characters forthe "Serial Port num".A value check is performed for the serial port value. If the value is not in therange 1 - 12, an error message will be displayed and the incorrect field will becolored in red.Also, value check is performed for the "Name" field. If this values is not filledor is the same as an already existent "Name" (used for another system), anerror message will be displayed and the incorrect field will be colored in red, asshown in the following image:

Is permitted to activate automatic requests for reading ASR and alarms.

Note: in case of reduncancy when two processor card are used the "Modifingsystem parameters" window will be different:

In this last window - you can notice one IP address, one port number and oneserial port number for each processor card.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - LAST CONFIGURATION

With this option we can see last downloaded and eventually modifiedconfiguration for chosen system. If you select this option the "Viewconfiguration" window will be displayed. You will be able to view offline lastconfiguration: ports setting, route table, calls directions, sim table, holydayssettings ("Ok" button in all windows will be hidden).

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ALARMS

The alarm files are named <current date>.alr and they include the followingfields:

Field InterpretationCurrent date dd-mm-yy

Current time xx:xx:xx

Alarm statusSET - blocked (appearance of alarm)

RES - unblocked (disappearance of an alarm)

Type of alarm

PROCUP - the processor is started. This is an event, itworks only with SET, not set/reset

PROCDN - the processor is stopped. This is an event, itworks only with SET, not set/reset.

ALIM val - Supply indicator

JONBLOCK - junction alarm

APFALS - local subscriber alarm

CARDERR - board alarm

LIS - Loss of Incoming Signal (is an alarm that indicates thatthere is no signal on the E1 trunk input)

LFA - Loss of Frame Alignment (is an alarm that indicatesthat the frame alignment is not detected)

LMA - Loss of Multiframe Alignment (is an alarm thatindicates that the multiframe alignment is not detected)

AIS - Alarm Indication Signal (the alarm is send by atransmission equipment to indicate the lost of the inputsignal on the E1 trunk )

RSA - Remote Signaling Alarm (is an alarm which istransmitted by the gateway when one of the followingalarms is detected: LIS, LFA or AIS)

RJA - Remote Junction Alarm (is an alarm which istransmitted by the gateway when LMA alarm is detected)

CCS - Common Channel Signaling Alarm. Warns about thedata link for the ISDN E1 trunk.

SLIP - This alarm event is caused by non-synchronousoperation of the two equipment (TOPEX system and PBX orVoIP gateway).

BER val - Bit Error Rate; val is a number from zero to threethat shows the error rate as follows: 0 = 10-6, 1 = 10-5, 2= 10-4, 3 = 10-3.

ASR - alarm of ASR - value calculated on gateway - alarmwhich is generated if the ASR is below a threshold. The ASRvalue is calculated if "Validate ASR reading" is enabled in"Alerts" window. The ASR value is recomputed at each "ASRread period" seconds.The ASR alert is generated if the ASR value is below "ASRalert limit" and if "Alert activated" checkbox is enabled (see"Alert Zone" - "Parameters"); also the "ASR" checkbox mustbe enabled in "ALARMS for alerting" area.

Port Number of the alarmed port

Card Number of the alarmed card

All these fields are separated in file by "," character (comma character).

By choosing "Alarms" - tree command for a system, all alarm files from thefolder "Alarms" of the system directory we'll be shown.

It is possible to select the alarm file you want. Double click with the left mousebutton, then a dialog box for making an alarm filter we'll be seen. The alarmfilter indicates how to check options and values for searching inside the"Alarms" directory.

The field "Period" indicates by default the time period corresponding to thename of the alarm file that was selected. This period can be changed in orderto extend the time interval that is analyzed. The software will look for recordsin the alarm files name whose name falls inside the selected time period.

There is an option to view only certain types of alarms and to specify the cardand the port number for them.

You can select only alarms appearances / disappearances or both.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods and 3 for the fields that arespecifying a card or a position number.The correctness of the period definition is checked before the filter validation.

By pressing "OK" button all alarms corresponding to the filtering criteria willbe displayed in the "Local Viewer" window.

Each record contains the moment of the appearance (with "SET") or thedisappearance (with "RES") of the alarm and a description (text) of the alarm.Regarding the error type the next two fields are important (sense): positionand card.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - BILLING FILES (CDR)

The billing files are named <current date>.tax and include the informationrequired for detailed billing (taxation) of the calls.

During the development period, the information which is saved in thebilling file was increased by adding columns. In the followingexplanations is described the basic billing file structure; at the end ofthis short description, the table which contains the billing fields willpresent also the new added columns.

The following example - for a multiACCESS - GSM equipment (with ananswered call) contains a test call from port "120" with the phone numberdialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120".

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222,10,abcd,GSM

Note 1): an incoming call can be made either from a subscriber or from anincoming direction (containing E1 trunks or GSM modules);Note 2): the number and the identity can be subject to modifications by themultiACCESS/QUTEX gateway. Changes are caused by applying the rulesabout the ignore and insert operations and the maximum expected digits fromthe "Define Calls directions". Also, if a route exist for the dialed number,changes can be made by the ignore and insert operations from "Routing table".But in the billing files the phone number and the identity will always be theoriginal ones;Note 3): the total number of digits that can be treated correctly by "gwconfig"software is 20, both for identity field and for the number field;Note 4): the number, the identity and the IMSI values used here are forexample purposes only;

The next example (with an answered call) contains a test call made from E1-SS7 or VoIP ports on an EONES equipment.Example1: the fist example with an answered call contains a test call receivedon port 32 (E1 port). The received number was “5235”. The output port was aVoIP port (258) located on “SS71” direction. The call was released from thecalled party side (see “BOK”). The duration of the call was two seconds, andselection duration was 11 seconds. The IP fields are filled with space and the port fields with 00000, because the

incoming port was not a VoIP port.

TLI,00032,100 ,5235 ,10-03-06,11:11:03,000002,00001,00,00258,BOK , 16,, 11,0000, MYVOIP , ,00000, ,00000, ,00000, ,00000

Example2: another example, also with an answered call, in which the call iscoming from VoIP port 258 with number “5235” and identity “258”. The callwas coming from “192.168.1.152” – signaling port “37380” and RTP port“49172”. The destination IP was “192.168.104.20” (EONES processor addressin this case) with signaling port 5060 and VoIP IP address “192.168.104.21”(voip ip address of the EONES) with RTP port 10516. The output port was 259located on “MYVOIP” direction.

TJI,00258,258 ,5235 ,10-03-06,11:21:29,000003,00001,00,00259,BOK , 16,, 2,0000, MYVOIP ,192.168.1.152 ,37380,192.168.1.152,49172,192.168.104.20,05060,192.168.104.21 ,10516

Note 1: an incoming call can be made from a an incoming direction (containingeither E1 trunks or VoIP channels);Note 2: the IP fields together with signaling and RTP ports are written intobilling files when “Add IP fields” is established in “Gateway Parameters”. Billing records can be aslo send to an external MYSQL database for storage andfurther processing.Note 3: the number and the identity can be subject to modifications by theEONES. The changes are caused by applying the rules about the ignore andinsert operations and the maximum expected digits from the "Define Callsdirections". Also, in addition, if a route exist for the dialed number, thenchanges can be made by the Ignore and Insert operations from "Routingtable". But in the billing files the phone number and the identity will always bethe original (initial) ones;Note 4: the total number of digits that can be processed by the "gwconfig"software is twenty (20), both for the field “identity” and for the field “number”;

A billing file has the following fields:

Field Description

Call type TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Portxxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This values indicates the physical port position.

This value can be 65535 in case of a multiswitch.

Sourceidentity

subscriber number or caller identity (20 digits)

CallDigits(CallNumber)

call number (20 digits)

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the following shape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss (ending time)

ConnectedDuration

xxxxxx - speaking duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

Billing Unitsfor the call

xxxxx - billing Units for the call (5 digits)

This field is usually filled with 0 for non-answered calls and with 1 However if tax pulses calculation is set on incoming direction (see "Direction") then this value will be filled according with the number of pulses charged at response and on bases (see "Tax" field in "Routing Table").

DestinationSIM Number

When the destination port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specifies a value for SIM (1,2,3,4 or ff)

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is unfinished a value of 65535 will be foundin this field (5 digits)In case of a TOPEX multiswitch - calls terminated with success will have also 65535 in this field.

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY,ATOUT,BTOUT,AERRAUTH,ANOCRED,AFINCRED,AVMAIL,BVMAIL,NOVOIPCH,CODECERR,NOLICENCE,ACLREJECT.

It indicates the mode of ending the call:- first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party - next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK - ANSWER (response in the destination part)RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy)INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route)CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no available resources)SERR - SERR (Signaling error)NERR - NERR (Network error)

Finalizationcall mode

NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone)BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation)TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)AERRAUTH - when the ANI or prepaid user is not authenticated on RADIUSANOCRED - when the ANI or prepaid user has no credit availableAFINCRED - for ANI or prepaid user when the credit expires during the AVMAIL - BVMAIL - when a call is finished on vocal message box - cause of non answer NOVOIPCH - when no VoIP channel is availableCODECERR - when the source codec is not in the list of supported codec NOLICENCE - indicates two situations: 1) that the LICENCE had expired for the requested protocol - for example VoIP or SS7. The LICENCE of a gateway can be seen in ACLREJECT - indicates for an incoming VoIP call that the IP is not in different then the expected value or the number of incoming calls is greater that the threshold value. This are set in DIRIPIN section.

Finalizationcall mode onISDN calls

Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values corresponding to ISDN standard for callrelease codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (multiACCESS or QUTEX - when the destination port is a GSM port)

SelectionDuration

xxx- three digits - total time (in seconds), cumulated value of both dial time and selection time

CELL For a call routed through a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it represents the CELL of the mobile networkwhere the SIM was registered.

Direction

The direction to which the destination port is belonging (it is the output direction)

In case of TOPEX software versions released after 2006 - this field has the interpretation of incoming direction.This direction can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for example FXO,FXS,GSM a direction used for incoming VoIP calls - which is the generic "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (withoutports) used just to allow inserting/ignoring digits from number or identity

IP addressand RTP port

The IP source and destination address and the RTP source and destination port in case of a VoIP call.

This info includes the Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the source, the followed by Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the destination, and lastly the RTP IP and RTP port for thedestination.For the VoIP incoming calls, the destination signaling IP is the one of destination RTP is the IP of the VoIP card. In case of VoIP outgoing calls, the source RTP IP is the one VoIP card of the Topex (multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES) equipment, while

remote VoIP card that made the call.

Session_idThis is an unique identifier of a call inside the equipment software. It is useful for a call debugging inside equipment log files.

Jitter Jitter is a variation in packet transit delay caused by queuing, contention and serialization effects on the paththrough the network.

Packet Loss VoIP packet loss occurs when a large amount of traffic on the network causes dropped packets. This results dropped conversations, a delay in receiving the voice communication,

Client_id

Direction -outputdirection

This direction is the output direction and can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for exampleFXO,FXS,GSM or E1 - ISDN/SS7) or a direction used for outgoing VoIP calls - which can "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (without ports) used just to specify the VoIP protocol and the signalingdestination IP (see DIRIPOUT section).

Proto in protocol used on incoming side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (FXS,FXO,GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7)

Proto out protocol used on outgoing side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (FXS,FXO,GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7)

Payload Type

the value of codec:G729 - 18G723 - 4G711, G711a - 8G711u - 0

PacketizationTime

The Packetization Time is the length of the digital voice segment that each packet holds. The default is 20millisecond packets. Selecting 10 millisecond packets enhances the voice quality, as to packet loss, but doubles the load on the network traffic.

If you select "Billing" - tree command for a system, then all billing files fromthe folder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be seen.

You go to the billing file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mousebutton a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective

display of the billing information. This filter for billing (taxation) files permitsthe setting of options and values for searching records inside the subdirectoryfor billing.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period corresponding by default tothe name of the billing that you have selected. You may change this defaultperiod to extend the time interval that is analyzed. For each of the "From"and "Until" limits, subfields are "Day" and "Hour". The program will look forrecords in the billing files whose name falls inside the selected time period.

From the source point of view you may specify these options: - physical position of the source port- port number (for an exchange subscriber call) or caller identity- a direction - a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names"- the source port type: local or junction (trunk)

From the call destination (called part) point of view you may specify theseoptions:- digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, equal or greater than the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a direction- a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names"- a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is a GSMport)- a value for IMSI code - a value for CELL code

The section "IP and Port Filter" contains several options to select from theincoming call side:- signaling IP- signaling port- RTP IP- RTP portFrom the ougoing call side:- signaling IP- signaling port- RTP IP- RTP port

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also thebilling records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1trunk the source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will berouted over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will berepresented by 'A' and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Dependingby the side which ends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and thefinalization mode will contain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS- RELEASE, INEX - INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS -NO ANSWER, BUSY - BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT. "Call Type" lets you to specifythe mode of ending of the call.

Note: physical port position on a E1 trunk is computed in the followingprocedure: for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 +channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) theport will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk and for E1trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number onE1 trunk.

You may set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represents call release codefor ISDN calls. Other types of calls will display a value of ' 31' in the billingrecords.

You may also set the option to select the records with the conversationduration and the selection duration (in seconds) less, equal or greater thanthe value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the source port position, sim index and ISDN EndType,5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 3 for selection duration, 16 forspecifying IMSI code and 20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the billing filter are checked before validation (by pressingthe button "OK"). The program checks correctness of the following:- period definition (day and hour - day less or equal to 31, month less or equalto 12, year less or equal to 36, hour less or equal to 23, minute less or equalto 59 and second less or equal to 59);- port position of the call source (in range 0 to 319);- sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255);- destination port position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319);- duration and selection duration (a value greater or equal to zero);- number of digits (a value greater or equal to zero); - ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal to zero);

If something is wrong, an error message will be shown to the user and thefield that has caused the error will be colored in red (while the text colorbecomes white). When the user goes back to the incorrect field in order tocorrect the wrong data, then the red color will disappear. In the followingexample an error message "Wrong port value" is displayed because of an errorfield on port position (a value "342" which is greater than the maximumnumber of 319).

Finally, you can set the option for viewing only the totals of the recording(option "Display only the total without the records") that corresponds tothe selected criteria or you can choose to display the values without totals(option "Display only the records without a total").

The option "Display only the records without a total" is useful for filtering outthe records in a certain time interval for the purpose of post-processing of thestored billing information (post-processing is done for cost analysis). For theseapplications, you need a text file with values only (that may be imported into aspreadsheet like Excel) but without totals interspread in it.

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "Billing Report". These columns will be explained later in this chapter.The information regarding the billing columns to be displayed is stored in thefile "tax_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same directory from where "gwconfig"software is running. In this file it is also saved the information about the size

of the columns presented in the billing report.

By pressing "OK" button all Billing records corresponding to the filter criteriawill be seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from theselected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts(field "Attempts"), total number of connected calls (field "Connected"),ASR (field "ASR"), total duration of calls (conversation part-field"Duration"), associated billing units (field "TaxUnits"), and at the end a totalfor all of the intervals - total number of attempts, total number of connectedcalls, ASR, total duration and billing units. Note1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer"subdirectory for the chosen system in a file with the "tot" extension and thename corresponding to the selected time interval. This way you may get boththe total of calls for several days and also a general total.Note2: Once you have defined a filter for the billing files, some of its settingswill be saved, so you can apply the same filter to several billing files. Thesettings established in the billing filter are saved in the file "tax_fl.dat" on theharddisk in the directory where "gwconfig" software is running. These settingsare:"Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriber part and junction part,"Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER", "RELEASE","INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and "TIMEOUT") andthe options regarding the viewing of totals and billing records ("Display only the

total without the records" and "Display only the records without a total"). Thesesettings are loaded before the showing of the billing filter in order to be pre-established.Note3: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Ident" is provided for both ascending anddescending sort.Depending of the number of records the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ACTIVITY

The monitoring (activity) files are very detailed activity files, that recordeverything about the calls. They are generated to detail the mode of call setupand follow up the calls from and towards the ports that have checked the field"Monitoring".

Activity files are named <current date>.mon and they include for eachrouted call four activity recordings. For a call not routed the file contains onlytwo recordings representing just the calling part.

The first following example (with an answered call) contains a test call fromport "120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is"120". Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". First line whichis starting with "TLI,00120" contains the original number and the originalidentity. The rules (regarding the ignore and insert operations and themaximum expecting digits) which are defined in the section "Define Callsdirections" are first applied to the number and to the identity. The linepreceded by "IN,00120" contains the modified number and the modifiedidentity according to the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from"Define Calls directions" table. The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits)and "Insert = '0'" (insert the digit '0') for the number, so the number waschanged from "81712345678" to "0712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id =1" (ignore one digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for theidentity so the identity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rulesestablished in "Define Calls directions" table are applied for the incoming part,the call is routed by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a recordwith "Prefix = 0" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore","Ignore_id","Insert"and "Insert_id" are not specified.The third and fourth line represent theoutgoing part of the call routed through a GSM port "00008". Caller id sentthrough this port is "3320" and number is "0712345678".

Note 1): an incoming call can be made from a subscriber or from a incomingdirection (containing E1 trunks or GSM modules);Note 2): the fields that are specifying the modified number and the modifiedidentity are the same in the second and in the third line ("0712345678" forthe number and "3320" for the identity). Identity will appear modified or notby fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Define Calls direction" windowand by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Routing table" window.Number will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Define Calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Routing table" window;

Note 3): the fourth line does not contain any information about the numberand the identity;Note 4): the number and the identity can be also affected by the field"Max_d", and respectively by "Max_id" from the "Define Calls direction"window;Note 5): the total number of digits that are well treated by "gwconfig" softwareis 20 for identity field and number field;Note 6): in the billing files the number and the identity will not appearchanged.Note 7): the number, the identity and the IMSI values used above are fortesting purposes only;

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,00,00008,BOK ,16,222222222222222,17,abcd,GSMIN ,00120,3320 ,0712345678 ,TD008,TSEL009,MODfe,0001,ffTJO,00008,3320 ,0712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,ff,00120,BOK , 16, , 17,0000,OUT,00008, , ,TD008,TSEL009,MOD01,0001,00

The second example (also with an answered call) contains a test call from port"120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120".Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". First line which isstarting with "TLI,00120" contains the original number and the originalidentity. The rules (regarding the ignore and insert operations and themaximum expecting digits) defined in the section "Define Calls directions" arefirst applied to the number and to the identity. The line preceded by"IN,00120" contains the modified number and the modified identity accordingto the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from "Define Calls directions"table. The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits) and "Insert = '51'"(insert the digits '51') for the number, so the number was changed from"81712345678" to "51712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id = 1" (ignoreone digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for the identity so theidentity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rules established in"Define Calls directions" table are applied for the incoming call, the call isrouted by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a record with"Prefix = 5" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore=2" (ignore two digits)and "Insert='0'" (insert the digit '0') (the fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" arenot specified).The number "51712345678" will become "0712345678". Thethird and fourth line represent the outgoing part of the call routed through aGSM port "00008". Caller id sent through this port is "3320" and number is"0712345678".

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,15:08:44,000004,00001,00,00008,AOK ,16,222222222222222,19,abcd,GSMIN ,00120,3320 ,0712345678 ,TD007,TSEL012,MODfe,0000,ffTJO,00008,3320 ,0712345678 ,10-03-04,15:08:44,000005,00001,ff,00120,AOK , 16, ,19,0000OUT,00008, , ,TD007,TSEL012,MOD01,0000,00

Note that there are two kind of records: first record like in lines 1 and 3 fromthe previous example and the second record like in lines 2 and 4 (containing"IN" and "OUT").

The first recording includes the fields:

RECORD1

Field Significance

Call Type

Unfinished Incoming call: - MJI or MLI(the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished (answered)incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call sourceis a junction respectively a subscriber)

Unfinished Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO(the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished (answered)outgoing call- TJO or TLO (the call sourceis a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port(5 digits);

Sourceidentity

subscriber number or source identity (20digits). For outgoing records identity("Ident") will appear modified or not byfields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fromthe "Define calls direction" window andby fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id"from the "Routing table" window;

call number (20 digits).For outgoingrecords this field will appear modified or

CallDigits(CallNumber)

not by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" fromthe "Define calls direction" window andby fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Routing table" window;

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the followingformat dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss ;

ConnectedDuration

xxxxxx - duration of the conversation inseconds (6 digits);

Billing Unitsfor the call

xxxxx - billing Units for the call (5 digits);

DestinationSIMNumber

When the destination port is a GSM port(multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specifies avalue for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or ff);

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port(5 digits) (when the call is unfinished avalue of 65535 will be found in this field (5digits);

Finalizationcall mode

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS,BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG,ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT andBTOUT;

Finalizationcall modeon ISDNcalls

Possible values are ' 31' (normal call) fornon ISDN calls or values corresponding toISDN standard for call release codes;

IMSIInternational Mobile Subscriber Identity (isfilled for incoming records routed through aGSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX))

SelectionDuration

xxx- three digits - cumulated selectiontime in seconds. It cumulates both "Dialtime" (time in seconds for dialing thenumber) and "Selection time" (time inseconds while the response is waited for).

CELL

The GSM CELL (four digits - alphanumericcode) where the SIM used for the call isregistered ("Destination SIM Number" onthe "Destination Port") (multiACCESS orQUTEX). The cell info is useful to search

which cells from the network havegenerated better ASR values.

Direction The direction to which the destination portis belonging (it is the output direction)

The second record contains:

RECORD2

Field Significance

Call typeIN (incoming call)

OUT (outgoing call)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This is thedestination port from the preceding record;

SourceIdentity

Represents the source identity. For incoming records (precededby "IN") the identity may be modified by fields "Ignore_id" and"Insert_id" established in direction definition and by fields"Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window; forrecords preceded by "OUT" this field is empty;

CallDigits(CallNumber)

Number dialed (20 digits). For incoming records (preceded by"IN") the number may be modified by fields "Ignore" and"Insert" established in direction definition window and by fields"Ignore" and"Insert" from "Routing table" window; for recordspreceded by "OUT" this field is empty;

Dial time TDxxx-time in seconds for dial;

Selectiontime

TSELxxx-time in seconds when the response is waiting;

Call Type MODxx -specified call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). Thisfield is used for further developments;

Finalizationmode

Possible value are 0000-AOK, 0001-BOK, 0002-ARELS, 0003-BRELS, 0004-AINEX, 0005-BINEX, 0006-ACONG, 0007-BCONG,0008-ASERR, 0009-BSERR, 000a-ANERR, 000b-BNERR, 000c-ANANS, 000d-BNANS, 000e-ABUSY, 000f-BBUSY, 0010-ATOUT,0011-BTOUT(4 digits);

SIMinformation

For calls routed to destination through a GSM module itrepresents the active SIM card. Possible values are 1,2,3,4 or ff(xx- 2 digits);

NOTE: The activity records are processed before viewing into a more simpleformat by grouping two records (record 1 and 2) into a single one (chapter"ACTIVITY").

By choosing "Activity" - tree command for a system, all activity (monitoring)files from the subdirectory "Activity" of the selected system directory we'll bedisplayed.

By double clicking with left mouse button on a file, a dialog window for activityfilter will be displayed. This filter allows setting several options for searchingthe data from the "Activity" filter.

The "Period" area indicates (by default) the period which corresponds to theselected Activity file name. This period can be changed in order to increase the

time interval to be analyzed. This software searches for "Activity" files havingassigned a name corresponding to this period. A time period can be also set (in"Hour" area).

To specify filtering from the point of view of the source of calls you have thefollowing options: - physical position of the source port- port number (for an exchange subscriber call) or caller identity- a direction (all source port on that direction will be searched) - the source port type: local subscriber or junction

The following options for the call destination (called part) are available: - digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, greater or equal that the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a direction (all destination port on that direction will be searched) - the value of the SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is aGSM port)- a value for IMSI code- a value for CELL code

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also theactivity records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1trunk the source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will berouted over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will berepresented by 'A' and called party by 'B'. Depending by the side which endsthe call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode will containone of the following strings:

OK - ANSWER (call answered, response in the destination part)RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy)INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route)CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no availableresources)SERR - SERR (Signaling error)NERR - NERR (Network error)NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone)BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation)TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)

Note: physical port position on a E1 trunk is computed in the followingprocedure: for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 +channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) the

port will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk and for E1trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number onE1 trunk.

You can set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represent call release code forISDN calls. For other calls in billing records a value of ' 31' will be displayed.

You may set also the option to select the records with the conversationduration (in seconds) less, greater or equal than the value typed.You may set also the option to select the records with the selection duration(in seconds) less, greater or equal than the value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the source port position, sim index and ISDN EndType,5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 3 for selection duration, 16 forspecifying IMSI code 16 and 20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the monitoring filter are checked before the validation (bypressing the button "OK"). The correctness of the period definition ( - (day andhour - day less or equal then 31, month less or equal then 12, year less orequal then 36, hour less or equal then 23, minute less or equal then 59 andsecond less or equal then 59)), port position of the call source (in range 0 to319), sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destination port position (65535 or avalue in the range from 0 to 319), duration and selection duration (a valuegreater or equal than zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal thanzero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal than zero); A message errorwill be shown to the user and the field that was causing the error will becolored in red (and the text color will become white). When the user givesback the focus to the error field in order to correct the wrong data, then thered color will disappear. In the following example an error message "Wrongport value" is displayed because of an error field on port position (a value"342" which is greater than the maximum number of 319).

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "Activity Report". Those columns will be presented later in this chapter.The information regarding the activity columns to be displayed is stored in thefile "mon_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same directory from where"gwconfig" software is running. In this file it is saved also the informationregarding the size of the columns presented in the activity report.

By pressing "OK" button (in the "Activity Filter" window) all activity recordscomplying with the filter criteria will be shown.

All these records will be saved in "Viewer" folder for the chosen system in afile named "moni.tmp".

An activity record will contain (when all fields are selected to be presented inthe "Activity Record Definition" window) the following fields:

Field Significance

Type (Call type)

Unfinished Incoming call: - MJI or MLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)or Finished incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Unfinished Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO (the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished outgoing call- TJO or TLO (the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber)

PortS (SourcePort)

xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits);

Ident (SourceIdentity)

subscriber number or caller identity (20 digits) (this field may be modified for outgoingrecords by "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fields from "Define calls direction" and by fields"Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window);

Ident Changed(Source Identity

This field is filled only for incoming records and contains the changed source identity whichcan be modified by "Ignore_id" and 'Insert_id" fields from directions definition windowand by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window; In the previous

Changed) picture it can be seen on the first record (an incoming call) in the field "Ident" the value"120" modified in the field "Ident changed" to "3320" (like in the examples);

CallDigits (CallNumber)

call number (20 digits)(this field may be modified for outgoing records by "Ignore"and"Insert" fields from "Define calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore"and "Insert"from "Routing table" window);

CallDigitsChanged(CallNumber Modified)

This field is filled only for incoming calls and contains the changed call number which can bemodified by "Ignore" and "Insert" fields from directions definition window and by"Ignore" and "Insert" by "Routing table" window; In the previous picture it can be seenon the first record (an incoming call) in the field "CallDigits" the value "81712345678"modified in the field "CallDigits changed" to "0712345678" (like in the examples);

Day and Time(Day and Time ofthe call)

Day and Time of the call in the following shape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss

Selection(Duration of theselection and dialphases)

xxx - selection duration of the call in seconds (3 digits); this time is calculated by adding thevalues "Dial time" and "Selection time"

ConnectedDuration(Duration of thecall)

xxxxxx - connected duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

TUnits (BillingUnits for the call)

xxxxx - Billing Units for the call (5 digits)

SIM1 (DestinationSIM Number)

When the destination port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specify a value for SIMcard (1,2,3,4 or ff)

PortD (DestinationPort)

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is unfinished a value of65535 will be found in this field (5 digits)

End (Finalizationcall mode)

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR,BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT

End 2(Finalizationcall mode onISDN calls)

Possible values are ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard forrelease code

Dial (Dial time) xxx-dial time in seconds

Sel (Selectiontime)

xxx-selection time in seconds

Call (Call type) xx-specify call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). This field will be used for furtherpurposes.

SIM2 (Source SIMNumber)

When the source port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specify a value for SIM card(1,2,3,4 or ff)

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (is filled for incoming calls routed through a GSMport (multiACCESS or QUTEX))

CELL The GSM CELL where the SIM used for the call ("Destination SIM Number" on the"Destination Port") is registered.(multiACCESS or QUTEX)

Direction The direction to which the destination port is belonging (it is the output direction)

Note1: several settings established in the monitoring filter are saved in the file"moni_fl.dat" on the harddisk in the directory where "gwconfig" software isrunning. These settings are:"Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriberpart and junction part, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side") and "Call Type"("ANSWER", "RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER",

"BUSY" and "TIMEOUT"). These settings are loaded before the showing of themonitoring filter in order to be pre-established.Note2: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Day and Time" is provided for bothascending and descending sort.Depending of the number of records the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - VIEWER FILES

In this section we can view all files from "Viewer" directory in the selectedsystem directory.We make left double click with mouse on a file and view content of the file.Files are viewed in text mode. There are several extensions which are directly interpreted and viewed in anon-text mode. Those extensions are "tot" for billing records, "mes" for smsrecords and "moni.tmp" for activity records. For those extensions the displaymode is the same like for billing files, sms files and activity files.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ASR

Answer seizure ratio (ASR) is an important parameter because it gives a verygood indication of how well the equipment (in this case multiACCESS/QUTEX)performs. ASR shows the relationship between the number of seizures thatresult in an answer signal and the total number of seizures. Thus, ASR is adirect measure of the effectiveness (how many of the attempted calls werecompleted) of the service performed. ASR is defined as the ratio between thenumber of "seizures" that result in an answer signal and the total number ofseizures, in a specified period of time.

In order to calculate the several ASR instant and average values, the ASR filesstore parameters such as number of answered calls, total number of calls, totalconnected time and total seized time.

The asr files are named <current date>.asr.

The saving of the ASR values in files is determined by the parameter "ValidateASR reading". This parameter together with the time delay between savingscan be edit by choosing icon option "Alerts" (" ").

The lines of the file are grouping two by two, one line contains general data(average and totals) and the next line instantaneous data. The general valuesare the cumulated values from the beginning of the ASR saving and theinstantaneous values are the values stored at specified delay periods. Note: For a line all the values are calculated for the specified period.

The fields of the asr files are shown below:

FieldASR value

Average time (inseconds)

Total number of calls

Total number ofanswered calls

Total number of callsfrom 'A' part (callingparty)

Total number of calls

from 'B' part (calledparty)

Total Seized Time (inseconds)

Total Connected Time(in seconds)

By choosing "ASR" - tree command for a system, all ASR (statistics) files fromthe folder "Alarms" of the selected system directory we'll be seen.

Double click with the left mouse button, then a dialog box for making an ASRfilter we'll be seen. ASR filter indicates how to check options and values forsearching inside the alarms directory.

By default the "Period" area indicates the time interval which correspond tothe name of the selected ASR file. This period can be changed in order toincrease the time frame. This software is searching for ASR files havingassigned a name corresponding to this period. The maximum size of the fieldsis 8 for the periods (date). The correctness of the period definition is checkedbefore the validation of the "Asr Filter" (day less or equal then 31, month lessor equal then 12 and year less or equal then 36). An error message is shown ifperiod is not correct chosen.

There is an option for viewing ASR results (records) in graphical mode or textmode. For the text representation it is allowed to set also the option 'OnlyTotal" for displaying only the total, not all the ASR records.

Graphical representation allows the following statistics:Note: instantaneous values from the "ASR" files are used in the statisticsrepresentation. The statistics are done on hour periods. For a single day for"ASR" statistics and "Average Time" statistics, an additional averagecalculation is performed on an hour period if the number of recordings on thathour is greater than one. For calls and time statistics a SUM calculation isperformed on an hour period if the number of recordings on that hour isgreater than one. This method of calculation is extended in case of selectingmore then one day.

1. ASR Statistics

When the number of calls on a hour period is zero, the ASR value is undefinedso the graphic will be represented by a dotted line. On the right side there aredisplayed ASR values for each time period.

2. Average Time Statistics

The image shows the evolution of average time value. On the right side aredisplayed average time values for each period (in seconds).

3. Calls Statistics

You may see the evolution of number of total calls ("Total Calls"), total callsending with response ("Connected"), total calls released from the calling party("ARELS") and total calls released from the called party ("BRELS"). The valuesfor total calls released from "A" or "B" part are containing all possiblesituations for ending a call. On the right side are displayed those values foreach hour period and colors used for each type of values (blue, red, grey andwhite).

4. Total seized time and connected time statistics

In the image above it can be observed the evolution of total seized time("TIME") and connected time ("TIMECON"). In the right side the values inseconds for each hour period are shown.

To switch from one statistic to another you must use the buttons located onthe upper side of the dialog box.

All these graphics can be printed by choosing option "Print" (if a printer isinstalled);

Text representation - when selected, it displays all records from the ASRfiles as text only. As shown below, the records are grouped two by two, withgeneral and instantaneous ASR values.

- Lines beginning with character 'G' or 'I' show if the record is general orinstantaneous. ASR value is following, "MT" characters, the average time ofspeaking (in seconds), record time, total number of calls ("CALLS"), totalnumber of connected calls ("CONN"), total number of calling part release calls("ARELS"), total number of called part release calls ("BRELS"). Next is totalseized time ("TIME") and connected time ("TCON") both of them in seconds.

- If you have several files to be shown, they will be displayed one afteranother. Then, at the end, a general (overall) total will be shown forinstantaneous records. The general total is computed like this:- for ASR and average times, a mean is computed over the number of recordsin the selected period of time;- for other values, a SUM is performed (values are added);

- At the end, there is a general total for instantaneous records and on time

periods: ASR and average time, number of calls and time values.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - SMS FILES

These files are used to keep information regarding the sending of short textmessages (SMS) and about the calls made from an internet browser. SMS'scan be sent and CALLS can be made from any internet browser by accessingthe TOPEX gateway. The "SMS" files are named <current date>.sms. The SMSfiles are also containing the CALLBACK actions.

1) To send a SMS just connect to the gateway to the "txsms.html" page (toreach this page, you must first type into the browser's address bar the IPaddress of the TOPEX gateway).

For accessing the TOPEX gateway, you must add its IP address to the section"Trusted sites" for your browser. The format of the record to be added is"http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of theTOPEX gateway. The authentication of clients is performed using "DigestAuthentication" algorithm.Accessing TOPEX gateway from an Internet browser is password protected. Youmust logon with your name and password.

The default password is "topex".

After going over the password protection, a new page will appear asking theuser to enter the SMS destination phone number (field "Phone Number") andthe SMS message (field "SMS text"). The SMS will be sent by clicking the"SendSms" option. The SMS can't be sent if direction named "SENDSMS" doesnot exist on the target.The SMS number will be parsed with all the rules whichare included in the definition of the "SENDSMS" direction and the routingtable.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has beensent ("OK Your SMS was sent OK! Thank you!").

Example of SMS records in a SMS file: SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:24:50,000005,00004,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:26:12,000000,00000,ff,65535,ASERR, 16, SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:27:02,000000,00000,ff,65535,AINEX, 16,

- first record is containing a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The SMS was sent successfully ("BOK");- second record contains a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152" tothe number "0700000000". The SMS was not sent successfully because thedirection called "SENDSMS" was not existent on the target ("ASERR");- the third record is containing a SMS message from the address"192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The SMS was not sentsuccessfully because no route to destination was found ("AINEX");

Note 1): the total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig"software is 20;Note 2): the number, the identity and the IMSI values which are used are onlyfor testing purposes;Note 3): the code "WWW" is used only to indicate the origin of the SMS("WWW");

There is also another page called "txsmsgrp.html" which is used to send a SMS

to a group of mobile phones. These groups can be defined on the gateway inthe file "/mnt/app/cfg/sms_groups". The structure of this file is as following:grup test0740000001 0740000002

The "Group Name" in the previous picture will be filled in with the groupname: in the displayed example the group name is "test" (the word whichfollows the key word "grup". The SMS will be sent to the phone numbers thatfollow the line with "grup" keyword. The numbers are searched until an emptyline is found or until another line starting with "grup" is found.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has beensent ("Your SMS has been sent OK! Sent to 2 numbers"). The number ofmobile phone destinations is also displayed.

2) A call can be sent in the same way by accessing the page "txcall.html". Toallow sending a CALL from an Internet browser the direction called"SENDCALL" must exist on the target. The call will pass all the rules which areincluded in the definition of the "SENDCALL" direction and the routing table.The user must enter the CALL destination phone number (field "PhoneNumber") and further options (field "Call Options" - not yet implemented).

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the CALL will be made

Example of records regarding making CALLS from a SMS file:CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:45:49,000000,00000,ff,65535,AINEX, 16, CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:47:10,000000,00000,ff,65535,ASERR, 16, CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:48:10,000040,00004,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222

- first record is containing a CALL test made from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The CALL wasn't made ("AINEX") because noroute to destination was found;- second record is containing a CALL test from the address "192.168.1.152" tothe number "0700000000". The CALL was not made because the directioncalled "SENDCALL" was not existent on the target ("ASERR");- the third record is containing a CALL test from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The CALL was made successfully ("BOK"); thecalled part was answered;

Note 1): The total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig"software is 20;Note 2): the number, the identity and the IMSI values which are used are onlyfor testing purposes;Note 3): the code "WWW" is used only to indicate the origin of the CALL("WWW");

3) SMS ALERT indication. When a SMS alert is sent, the current SMS filecontains the number and the moment of sending and the following fields:"Type" -> "SMS", "Source" -> "ALARM" and "IP" -> 127.0.0.1.

SMS ,ALARM,127.0.0.1 0700000000 ,08-10-04,16:44:11,000599,00010,00,00033,BOK , 16,226019451004927

4) CALLBACK records

CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-

04,11:25:33,000001,00000,00,00008,AOK , 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:32:32,000013,00000,ff,00008,BBUSY, 17,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:33:14,000007,00000,00,00008,BRELS, 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:36:07,000001,00000,00,00008,AOK , 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:40:22,000012,00000,00,00008,BBUSY, 17,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000001 ,13-04-04,12:03:40,000001,00000,00,00009,AOK , 16,226019451004922

A record is generated into a SMS file for each back call. Callback table containsthe following fields: "Identity", "Action", "Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo". ACALLBACK record contains the identity (in the example it is the field"0700000000" - the identity is one of the "Identity" from the Callback table)and the number dialed in the callback action. The number dialed can be thesame number like the identity number or can be another one (if the field"Callback" is filled with another number then the identity number).

In the billing file, the number dialed by the called party of the back call actionwill be saved. If the "CallTo" field is filled in the callback table then thatnumber will be saved in the billing file.

A SMS file has the following fields:

Field Description

Recordtype

SMS or CALL (the record is a SMSrespectively a CALL test)

SourcePort

WWW (for SMS and CALLS made from theinternet),CBACK and ALARM

IP oridentity

the IP address of the client from where theSMS was sent or the CALL was launched(20 digits) or the identity of the call in caseof a CALLBACK record

CallDigits(Call

SMS destination number or CALL testnumber (20 digits) or the number called in

Number) a CALLBACK record

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the followingshape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss (ending time)

CallDuration

xxxxxx - duration of the call in seconds (6digits). Is different from a zero value incase of a successful sending of a SMS ormaking a CALL test and indicates theamount of time from the moment ofaccepting the request and the moment ofthe successful ending;

Lengthxxxxx - the length of SMS message and thelength of the option of CALL message (5digits) or 00000 for a CALLBACK record

DestinationSIMNumber

When the destination port is a GSM port itspecify a value for SIM (1,2,3,4 or ff)

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port(5 digits) (when the call is unfinished avalue of 65535 will be found in this field (5digits)

Finalizationcall mode

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS,BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG,ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT

Finalizationcall modeon ISDNcalls

Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call)for non ISDN calls or values correspondingto ISDN standard for call release codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

By choosing "SMS" - tree command for a system, all SMS files from the folder"Billing" of the selected system directory we'll be seen.

You choose the SMS file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mousebutton a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selectivedisplay of the SMS information. This filter for SMS files permits setting theoptions and values for searching the records inside the SMS files.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period corresponding by default to

the SMS file that you have selected. Sub-fields are Day and Hour each ofthem with "From" and "Until" limits. You may change the default period toextend the time interval that is analyzed. The program will look for records inthe SMS files whose name fall inside the selected time period.

From the source point of view you may specify the following options: - IP source;- you may specify the source value: (this value can be used in furtherdevelopments);- the record type: SMS or CALL;- the record source: WWW or CBACK or ALARM;

From the call destination (called party) point of view you may specify thefollowing options:- digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, equal or greater then the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is a GSMport)- a value for IMSI code

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also theSMS records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1 trunkthe source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will be routed overa GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will be represented by 'A'and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Depending by the side whichends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode willcontain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS - RELEASE, INEX -INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS - NO ANSWER, BUSY- BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT. "Call Type" lets you to specify the mode of endingof the call.

You may set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represent call release codefor ISDN calls. Other types of calls will display a value of ' 31' in the SMSrecords.

You may set also the option to select the records with the duration (inseconds) less, equal or greater then the value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the sim index and ISDN EndType, 5 for destination portposition, 6 for duration, 15 for the IP field, and 16 for specifying IMSI code and20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the SMS filter are checked before the validation (bypressing the button "OK"). The correctness of the period definition (day andhour - day less or equal then 31, month less or equal then 12, year less orequal then 36, hour less or equal then 23, minute less or equal then 59 andsecond less or equal then 59), sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destinationport position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319), duration (a valuegreater or equal than zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal thanzero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal than zero); A message errorwill be shown to the user and the field that was causing the error will becolored in red (and the text color will become white). When the user givesback the focus to the error field in order to correct the wrong data, the redcolor disappears. In the following example an error message "Wrong simindex" is displayed because of an error on SIM field (a value "5" which isgreater than the maximum number of a SIM card (4).

Finally, you can set the option for viewing only the totals of the recording(option "Display only the total without the records") that correspond tothe selected criteria or you can choose to display the values without totals(option "Display only the records without a total").

The option "Display only the records without a total" is useful for filtering outthe records in a certain time interval for the purpose of post-processing (costanalysis) of the stored SMS information. For these applications, you need atext file with values only (that may be imported into a spreadsheet like Excel)but without totals interspread in it.

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "SMS Report". These columns will be presented later in this chapter. Theinformation regarding the SMS columns to be displayed is stored in the file"sms_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same home directory from where"gwconfig" software is running. In this file is also saved the informationregarding the size of the columns presented in the SMS report.

By pressing "OK" button all SMS records corresponding to the filter criteria willbe seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from theselected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts(field "Attempts"), total number of SMS successfully sent (field"Connected") and the percentage of successfully SMS sent- (field "Period")and in the end a total for all of the intervals - total number of attempts, totalnumber of connected and the percentage of successfully connections.Note1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer"subdirectory for the chosen system in a file with the "sms" extension and thename corresponding to the selected time interval. This way you may get boththe total of records for several days and also a general total.Note2: several settings which are established in the SMS filter are saved in thefile "sms_fl.dat" on the harddisk in the home directory where "gwconfig"software is running. These settings are:"Record Type" (section "Call Source") -SMS or CALL,"Record Source" (section "Call Source") - WWW or CBACK orALARM, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER","RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and"TIMEOUT") and the options regarding the viewing of totals of SMS records("Display only the total without the records" and "Display only the recordswithout a total"). These settings are loaded before the showing of the SMSfilter in order to be pre-established.Note3: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Day and Time" is provided for bothascending and descending sort.If the number of records is large, the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - LOG FILES

The log files are named <current date>.log and contain information aboutthe events that took place: date and time for the making and respectivelybreaking of connections concerning the selected TOPEX system, file transferand so on.

Field DescriptionDate dd-mm-yy

Hour xx:xx:xx

Event Description of the event that was performed

The lch files are named <current date>.lch and include information about thechanges (modifications) made to the TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system.

Field DescriptionDate of change dd-mm-yy

Time of change xx:xx:xx

Modification Description of the change that was performed

StatusOK - the change was successfully

ERROR - the change was not successfully

By choosing "Log" (tree command for a system), then all connections log(extension is *.log) files and changes log (extension is *.lch) files from thefolder "Log" of the system directory we'll be seen.

All these files are located inside folder "Log" of the root system directory.

The "log" files contain information indicating time and date of connection anddisconnection related to the chosen system.

Here are saved all the operations regarding downloading and loading of files.There are specified directories ("bin", "cfg" or "out" from the remote gateway)and the file name involved into the transfer operation. Also here are saved theASR values and alarms gathered during automatic interrogation process.

In "lch" files there is information related to the time of modifications operatedon the remote gateway.

- In the image above there are some examples: Rights modified for ports,Adding card, Deleting card, SIM index modification.- In this type of files also the results of the changes: OK or ERROR are shown.For all possible changes there are verification made by OAM software and alsoby remote gateway. Remote gateway may respond with an ERROR message.You will get an error, for instance, when you try to allocate the same numberto two different ports.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - LOADING COMMAND

The "Loading" command provide statistics about billing files, allowing theuser to have data about each SIM, GSM module and directions.

By selecting "Loading" - tree command for a system, all billing files from thefolder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be displayed.

You go to the billing file you want to analyze, and by double clicking with leftmouse button a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter forselective display of the statistic information. This "Display Statistics" filter forbilling statistics permits the setting of options and values for highlightingrecords.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period (by default the periodcorresponds to the name of the billing file that you have selected). Theprogram will look for records in the billing files whose name falls inside theselected time period.

For highlighting you may specify the following options: - "ASR" (you may define a threshold: the default is an initial value of 70%);

- "Average duration" (a threshold can be defined: the default is 120 seconds);- "Duration < x seconds" (a threshold can be defined: by default you have aninitial value of 20%); For 'x' a value of 20 seconds is used by default.

There is a text limit of 8 for period files and 3 for the other three fields.The correctness of the those value is checked: periods (day,month,year),percentage for "ASR" and "Duration < x seconds" (a value between 0 and 100)and "Average Duration" (greater than 0). A bad filled value will cause a redcolor to fill that field and an error message to appear. The red color willdisappear when the user will give back the focus to the error filled field.

After you select "OK" button, the statistics shown below will appear:

In the above image two panels can be seen: the first one contains "Input" dataand the second "Output" data. Statistics are provided for each port and include the following columns:- "Port"- "Dir" (direction)- "Type" (GSM, SUBSCRIBER, BC, BL, EM, PABX, E1R2, ISDN, SS7 and R1)

- "SIM" (is filled only for GSM ports and on outgoing calls and it can be 1,2,3or 4)- "Attempts" (number of call attempts)- "Connected" (number of connected calls)- "ASR"- "Minutes" (number of spoken minutes)- "Duration" (average duration of the conversations)- "Duration<" (percentage of calls with a duration below 20 seconds).

Highlighting is done with red color and can appear on the columns: "ASR","Duration" and "Duration<".

The lists in the two panels are filled only with ports that have been active, thatis from which or to which calls where made or routed.

Each list contains at the bottom a total statistic and statistics over directions.

For the "Output" area there is also presented a statistic for each different GSMCell.

By pressing a record from the one in the lists an additional image will beprovided, showing graphically details about calls: normal completion, release,errors.

The image contains three columns: first column from the left contains astatistic over calls (on that port, on a direction or on total): TOTAL number,"Completed", "Release", "Inex", "Cong", "Serr", "Nerr", "Nans", "Busy" and

"Tout". The second column contains a statistic over calls ended from the "A"part and the last column a statistic over calls ended from "B" part.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ASR

Answer seizure ratio (ASR) is an important parameter because it gives a verygood indication of how well the equipment (in this case multiACCESS/QUTEX)performs. ASR shows the relationship between the number of seizures thatresult in an answer signal and the total number of seizures. Thus, ASR is adirect measure of the effectiveness (how many of the attempted calls werecompleted) of the service performed. ASR is defined as the ratio between thenumber of "seizures" that result in an answer signal and the total number ofseizures, in a specified period of time.

In order to calculate the several ASR instant and average values, the ASR filesstore parameters such as number of answered calls, total number of calls, totalconnected time and total seized time.

The asr files are named <current date>.asr.

The saving of the ASR values in files is determined by the parameter "ValidateASR reading". This parameter together with the time delay between savingscan be edit by choosing icon option "Alerts" (" ").

The lines of the file are grouping two by two, one line contains general data(average and totals) and the next line instantaneous data. The general valuesare the cumulated values from the beginning of the ASR saving and theinstantaneous values are the values stored at specified delay periods. Note: For a line all the values are calculated for the specified period.

The fields of the asr files are shown below:

FieldASR value

Average time (inseconds)

Total number of calls

Total number ofanswered calls

Total number of callsfrom 'A' part (callingparty)

Total number of calls

from 'B' part (calledparty)

Total Seized Time (inseconds)

Total Connected Time(in seconds)

By choosing "ASR" - tree command for a system, all ASR (statistics) files fromthe folder "Alarms" of the selected system directory we'll be seen.

Double click with the left mouse button, then a dialog box for making an ASRfilter we'll be seen. ASR filter indicates how to check options and values forsearching inside the alarms directory.

By default the "Period" area indicates the time interval which correspond tothe name of the selected ASR file. This period can be changed in order toincrease the time frame. This software is searching for ASR files havingassigned a name corresponding to this period. The maximum size of the fieldsis 8 for the periods (date). The correctness of the period definition is checkedbefore the validation of the "Asr Filter" (day less or equal then 31, month lessor equal then 12 and year less or equal then 36). An error message is shown ifperiod is not correct chosen.

There is an option for viewing ASR results (records) in graphical mode or textmode. For the text representation it is allowed to set also the option 'OnlyTotal" for displaying only the total, not all the ASR records.

Graphical representation allows the following statistics:Note: instantaneous values from the "ASR" files are used in the statisticsrepresentation. The statistics are done on hour periods. For a single day for"ASR" statistics and "Average Time" statistics, an additional averagecalculation is performed on an hour period if the number of recordings on thathour is greater than one. For calls and time statistics a SUM calculation isperformed on an hour period if the number of recordings on that hour isgreater than one. This method of calculation is extended in case of selectingmore then one day.

1. ASR Statistics

When the number of calls on a hour period is zero, the ASR value is undefinedso the graphic will be represented by a dotted line. On the right side there aredisplayed ASR values for each time period.

2. Average Time Statistics

The image shows the evolution of average time value. On the right side aredisplayed average time values for each period (in seconds).

3. Calls Statistics

You may see the evolution of number of total calls ("Total Calls"), total callsending with response ("Connected"), total calls released from the calling party("ARELS") and total calls released from the called party ("BRELS"). The valuesfor total calls released from "A" or "B" part are containing all possiblesituations for ending a call. On the right side are displayed those values foreach hour period and colors used for each type of values (blue, red, grey andwhite).

4. Total seized time and connected time statistics

In the image above it can be observed the evolution of total seized time("TIME") and connected time ("TIMECON"). In the right side the values inseconds for each hour period are shown.

To switch from one statistic to another you must use the buttons located onthe upper side of the dialog box.

All these graphics can be printed by choosing option "Print" (if a printer isinstalled);

Text representation - when selected, it displays all records from the ASRfiles as text only. As shown below, the records are grouped two by two, withgeneral and instantaneous ASR values.

- Lines beginning with character 'G' or 'I' show if the record is general orinstantaneous. ASR value is following, "MT" characters, the average time ofspeaking (in seconds), record time, total number of calls ("CALLS"), totalnumber of connected calls ("CONN"), total number of calling part release calls("ARELS"), total number of called part release calls ("BRELS"). Next is totalseized time ("TIME") and connected time ("TCON") both of them in seconds.

- If you have several files to be shown, they will be displayed one afteranother. Then, at the end, a general (overall) total will be shown forinstantaneous records. The general total is computed like this:- for ASR and average times, a mean is computed over the number of recordsin the selected period of time;- for other values, a SUM is performed (values are added);

- At the end, there is a general total for instantaneous records and on time

periods: ASR and average time, number of calls and time values.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - SYSTEMS

1. Add- If you select "System > Add" the following window will appear, asking you toadd another TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system to the arborescent structure.

Directory - enter a name for the folder in where the files downloaded fromthe TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system will be stored.On HDD it will be madea directory in the following shape "cfg_xxxxxxx" where directory is the nametyped in the "Directory" field. The folder will be created on HDD in thedirectory where the executable 'gwconfig.exe' is located.

Name - enter a name for the connection to the system. This names isconcatenated at "cfg_" and this it will be the text used in tree structure foridentifying the system.

Serial communication / IP communication - is specified link type betweenOAM computer and E1/30 GSM equipment. This are the two exclusive optionsfor the communication with a TOPEX gateway equipment.

IP Parameters:

IP address - enter the IP address of the system. It can be a numeric IPaddress or a text address (in that case a dns request will be made bysoftware).

IP Port num - enter the number of the port through which thecommunication with the system is achieved. The default value is 9009. Thisvalue is established also into the gateway system and should not be modified.

DialUp Connection - in case of IP communication this setting allows if ischecked, a dialup connection to be established. The Dialup Connection must becreate from Windows (from "Dial-Up Networking") and the connection namemust not contained character space inside the text.

Option "Use PPP address" is used to indicate the "gwconfig" software toconnect to the dialup server address after a successfully connection. If thisoption is not validated, then the "gwconfig" software will try to connect to theaddress specified in the "IP address" field.

If this parameter is checked you may choose a dialup connection from "DialUpconnection name". You must enter a "DialUp Number" which override thenumber used at the creation of the Dialup Connection. Also by pressing "Edit"button you can override the "User" and "Password" used in process ofauthentication.

You must note that if changes are made to "User" or "Password", thosechanges are made also in the Windows registry.

The field "Connection Timeout" is the time in seconds wait from the moment ofstarting the DialUp connection and the obtaining the connection state.

Serial Communication:

Serial Port num - enter the serial port used in case of serial communicationwith the gateway. The default value is COM1. This value must be in rangeCOM1-COM12.

There is a text limit of 19 characters for the "Directory" and "Name" fields and

2 characters for the "Serial Port num".A value check is performed for the serial port value. If the value is not in therange 1 - 12, an error message will be displayed and the incorrect field will becolored in red.Also, value check is performed for the "Directory" and "Name" fields. If one ofthis values is not filled or is the same as an already existent "Directory" or"Name" (are used for another system), an error message will be displayed andthe incorrect field will be colored in red, as shown in the following image:

Save - saves the setting and adds in the tree structure a system with themodified settingsCancel - closes the window without saving the settings.

Note: in case of reduncancy when two processor card are used the "Addsystem on position..." window will be different:

In this last window - you can notice one IP address, one port number and oneserial port number for each processor card.

2. Remove- If you select "System > Remove" then you will see the next window:

- To remove a TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX system from the structure, select itand then click on 'Save' button: the selected system will be deleted from thetree structure; the folder (directory) on your hard disk drive won't be deleted,you must erase it manually. If you select Cancel the window will be closed.

Note: There is also a tree command for changing systems parameters: Name,communication type, IP Address, IP port number, DialUp parameters and serialport number.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - FACILITIES

1. Font

If you select "Facilities > Font" the following window will appear:

In this window you can select according to your preferences the font, the styleand size of characters. The changes will only affect the windows called: "ViewConfiguration" and "Modify Configuration".

2. Colors signification

The significance of the colors used in the "View Configuration" and "ModifyConfiguration" windows is here described, as explained below:- Dark blue - that position is available (free)- Red - that position is in alarm- White - that position is already used (busy)- Light blue - that position is not installed (the checkbox "Installed" from thewindow for configuring the settings of the port has not been installed).The colors which are here presented are the default settings.

There are also shown the colors used for "TextColor", "BackColor" and"TreeColor".All these colors can be modified according to users preferences by clicking onit.

You can select the color you want, either from the predefined "Basic" colors,either from the detailed zone of custom colors.

- The "Default" button is used to restore color settings to the original color set.

- The text column at the right of "Color signification" window explains themeaning of values shown for a GSM port in alarm. When a user selects theicon "Status monitoring" in a connected state, additional information will beprovided for GSM ports. If the GSM module is displayed in red color (thereforeno SIM registered) then after the port position and a line character a value isshown, describing the cause of the error.

- example of a GSM module in alarm displayed in red color. Here thecause of error "2" - "no physical SIM".

Possible error causes are:0 - GSM module in initialisation phase (programming)1 - no GSM network available ("at+creg?" phase)2 - no physical SIM3 - no logical SIM. This value may be obtained in the following situations: - when the "SIM index" rule is used for changing the SIM cards for the GSMmodule but for the current time moment no SIM value is specified in the "SIMindex".- If "LOAD BALANCING" algorithm is selected to change the SIM on the GSMmodule and the "Load Sim" value (the usage time of the SIM) is over the SIMmaximum time to use ("Max").4 - GSM module error - the module is not responding at "AT" commands5 - the GSM module is requesting PUK code

3. View print files

- This command is a facility for viewing text files located in "FORMAT" folder.These files can be made by printing data into files from different locations fromprogram. To see a file, select its name from the list and click the 'View' button.A window for viewing/editing the file will appear. - You can also perform searches by using the buttons marked 'FIND' and'NEXT' or you can send to the printer a listing of the file.

4.Commands

Use this option for entering direct commands for the system. This part of theOAM program is "expert level only". You may resize or move the window"Configuration manager” on the screen as you wish. The window’s position anddimensions will be saved in a file on HDD in order to be preserved for futureuse.

"Log Section" - if the option "LogFile" is checked, then a log file will begenerated. This file allows the user to analyse later the commands sent to thegateway and the responses from the gateway. The logfile is always named"command.txt". The option "Reset" is used to clear the file used for saving thelog.

The commands to be issued to the TOPEX gateway are filled in "OAM" editfield, at the top of the window. A command is sent to the gateway afterpressing the <ENTER> key.

The command window is useful for several purposes. For instance it allows adirect conversation with a GSM module (by using AT commands). The user canalso set PIN codes, start debugging, display the number of calls, etc.

"AT commands": if you want a GSM module to accept AT commands youmust put the associated port into a monitoring state (that port must belong toan installed GSM board).

Therefore the first command sent for putting the GSM module into ATcommands accepting mode is "set moni xxx", where "xxx" is the GSM portnumber (as it appears on the "gwconfig" panel). The gateway must send backthe confirmation message "moni xxx", where 'xxx' is the GSM port position. Ifthe GSM port can't be placed into the monitoring state the following warningmessage is received: "res moni" (in the "Exchange response zone" section).This message is received if the GSM port is busy or initialisations areperformed on that module. If that is the case the user must type first "resmoni' and then "set moni xxx". When the confirmation from the gateway is received, several AT commandscan be sent to the gateway:

AT Command Purpose Response

AT

Allows the user tocheck thefunctionallity of theGSM module

Should be "OK" incase of success

AT+CPIN?

The GSM module isinterrogating aboutpin code. This is auseful method tocheck if a SIM card isplugged in a GSMmodule.

-ERROR - there is noSIM installed or thereis another error-READY - if no PINcode is required-SIM PIN - the SIM iswaiting for PIN code-SIM PUK - the SIM iswaiting for PUK code

This AT command isused to check if themodule is registered

The response is:+CREG:<n>,<stat>,"xxxx","xxxx"where <stat> can be:- stat = 0 - themodule is notregistered and doesnot try to register toa GSM operator- stat = 1- themodule is registeredwithin a GSM network

AT+CREG? within the GSMnetwork.

- stat = 2- themodule is notregistered but istrying to register to aGSM operator - stat = 3- theregistration is notallowed- stat = 4- unknown- stat = 5- themodule is registeredand he has roaming

AT+CLIR=<n>where n=0 fordefault,where n=1 fornot sending theidentity andn=2 to allowthe sending theidentity

This command isused to enable ordisable the sendingof the identity (callerID)

The module isresponding with "OK"with a delay thatdepends upon theloading of the GSMnetwork. Until theresponse is waiting anadditional ATcommand must not besent to the module

AT+CLIR? To check the settingof identity

+CLIR:1,4 - theidentity is not send+CLIR:2,4 - theidentity is send +CLIR:0,4 - defaultvalue

AT+CLIP=<n>where n=0 fornot displayingthe identity ofthe calling partand n=1 toallow displayingof the callingpart identity

To display or to notdisplay the identityof the calling part incase of a call throughthe monitored GSMport

The module isresponding with "OK"

The response can be:OK - the destination

ATD<number>;Where<number> isthe number tobe dialed

This is an usefulmethod to make acall test directly fromthe GSM module

part has answeredNO CARRIER - thedestination part doesnot respond or it isnot in the coveredareaBUSY - thedestination part isbusy

ATA

Is used forresponding to anincoming call. Whenincoming call isrouted through aGSM module which isin monitoring state,the "RING" word willappear at each 5seconds. If CLIP isactivated then amessage with thecalling number willbe displayed:+CLIP:"callingnumber",xxx

The GSM module isresponding with "OK"

ATH The command is usedto end a call

The GSM module isresponding with "OK"

AT+COPS=?

This command willdetect and display allactive GSM operatorsin the gateway area

AT+COPS?

This command willdisplay the operator'sname to which theGSM module hasregistered

First Command:- AT+CMGF=<n>where <n> is 1 for

Sending a SMS

text format and 0 forPDU format. Thevalue to be used is 1.The module willrespond with "OK".

-AT+CMGS="number"This command isused to complete thedestination phonenumber. The module willrespond with ">".

- @send <textmessage>This command willsend the SMS

- the response forconfirmation is:+CMGS: <messagereference> OK- the response forerror is:+CMS ERROR:<error>

AT+SIM=<n>,n=0,1,2,3

(Note: here thevalues foridentifying theSIM card arefrom 0 to 3(instead of 1 to4))

This is an usefulmethod to check ifthe GSM module isworking properly:the command is usedto set a new activeSIM (this is not a ATcommand: it is acommand interpretedby the controller ofthe GSM card)These settings aremade directly withthe GSM module.

The confirmationresponse is "OKSIMn"where "n" is 0,1,2 or3 if that SIM wasselected

To release a GSM module from the monitoring state the command "res moni"must be typed.

There are also additional commands that are interpreted by the gatewayapplication. The command "help" must be sent to see the list of availablecommands:

set pin sim sss pppp used to set the pin codes for GSM modules atmodule "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set pin range sss sss pppp used to set the pin codes for GSM modules inrange "sss" to "sss". The pin code is "pppp";

set/res moni ppp used to put / extract a GSM port frommonitoring state

send gsm at....... (used to dial a number)

set debug ppp ppp

used to start debugging on a port. The portfor debugging purposes is completed in "ppp"section: for example to activate debug forport 1 the command is "set debug 1 2"

set view pppmust be sent to port "ppp" after thecommand "start debug ppp ppp" in order toactivate the debugging facility

res debug ppp ppp

used to stop debugging on port "ppp". Theport is completed in "ppp" section: to stopthe debugging for port "1" the command is"res debug 1 2"

res view pppmust be sent to port "ppp" after thecommand "res debug ppp ppp" in order todeactivate the debugging facility

set tmax sss sss ttt

allows you to define a time interval ('ttt') afterwhich a SIM will be blocked. “sss” is the simcoresponding value. You may specify a rangeof SIM cards values. Value of 'sss' may becomputed as follows: number of card (shownin "Port status) * 8 + number of sim (0,1,2 or3) for the first GSM module or number of card(shown in "Port status) * 8 + 4 + number ofsim (0,1,2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

set tsim sss tttallows setting the time counter (loading time):'sss' is the sim coresponding value and 'ttt' isthe value in seconds.

set calls

it is used for displaying the total number ofcall attempts ("TCalls"), answered calls ("Tspech"), total duration of calls ("Dcalls"), totalduration of speaking ("Dspech) and thenumber of calls released from "A" side("Arelease") and from "B" side ("Brelease")

set calls offthis command is used to reset the previousvalues

set block ppp ppp command used to send block message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res block ppp ppp command used to send unblock message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

set loop ppp ppp command used to send loop message on SS7signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

res loop ppp ppp command used to send unloop message onSS7 signaling to channels in range ppp ppp

set tchange 1800/3600 speaking time period in seconds followingwhich the active SIM is changed

kill call portthis command disconnect an active call on aGSM module. The position of the GSM moduleis specified by the "port" parameter

test callbqack idthis command is used for making tests overthe quality of voice. In this chapter thiscommand is detailed presented

The following commands are used for settings concerning the second SIMselection algorithm, called LOAD BALANCING. If you select the "equal load"mode of work for the algorithm, each SIM on a GSM module will be used for acertain period of speaking time, then the system will go to select the next SIMcard with the lowest load. The commands are:"set tchange 1800/3600" - speaking time period in seconds following whichthe active SIM is changed (the gateway looks for the SIM card with the lowestload for the same GSM module). Usual values are 1800 or 3600 seconds. Thisparameter is the same for all GSM modules and can be viewed and changed inany GSM settings window."set tsim sss ttt" - allows setting the time counter (loading time): 'sss' is thesim coresponding value and 'ttt' is the value in seconds. Value of 'sss' may becomputed as follows: number of card (shown in "Port status) * 8 + number ofsim (0,1,2 or 3) for the first GSM module or number of card (shown in "Portstatus) * 8 + 4 + number of sim (0,1,2 or 3) for the second GSM module.

Execute AT commands

In "Configuration manager" window the user is also able to execute ATcommands on all GSM modules.

The execution of these commands is based on a script file which is given ascommand parameter. This file must be placed in the same folder with"gwconfig" application. In this file the user can enter a batch of AT commandsto be executed over the GSM modules. The file must include the AT commands

you want to be to be executed over the GSM modules, the expected response,the time delay to wait the appropriate response and the the option to save theresponses into a file. The command to start this process is "execute -f xxxxx.txt" for all GSMmodules (where "xxxxx.txt" is the script file), or "execute -f xxxxx.txt -d GSM"to start the process just for the modules belonging to the "GSM" direction. ATcommands are read from the "xxxxx.txt" file.A window called "AT Commands Confirmation" is displayed for monitoringthe process.

In order to clarify this facility, here is shown a commented example of a scriptfile:at+gsnOK101at+cimiOK101

Each command is grouped as four lines:1. AT command to be sent to GSM modules; (in the example above thesecommands are "at+gsn" for IMEI code and "at+cimi" for IMSI code).2. response wanted for the AT command; (in both cases the expected responseis OK; the expected value is included in responses before the "OK" text).3. time to wait for the expected response; the next field is a value (0,1 or 2)that has two meanings: the first significance (for a value of 0 or 1) is the timedelay to wait for the response at an AT command. If the response comes in thespecified interval then the process continues immediately. The secondsignificance, if the value read from the file is 2, is this: the application waits allthe specified delay and the last message received from the GSM module issaved into a file. 4. an option about the saving of the response into a file; a 0 value means nosavings are done into a file, while a value 1 means responses will be saved in"atresp.txt" file. If the value for the option is 2 then the last message receivedduring the waiting time will be saved in "atresp.txt". The option value of 2 canbe used to verify the credit for prepaid SIMs.

Notes: - before sending any AT commands the application starts the monitoringprocess (the same as selecting "Status monitoring"). This is done because theapplication needs to know which cards are in alarm, which ports are in alarm

or in a call.- this interrogation is performed just for the SIM cards currently registered.Because AT commands can't pe sent to GSM modules which are in alarm, thosemodules will be skipped in the process. For GSM modules where a conversationis running, the commands are sent after the call is dropped. When the currentinterrogation for a module has reached the last port, then the process will berestarted for the skipped modules. The total number of restart cycles is 2.- after a new interrogation process is started (after an "execute" command isperformed) the file "atresp.txt" will be deleted.

The first column representing the portposition. The second column displaysthe current "Status" of executing ATcommands over that port. Possiblevalues are:- WAITING - AT commands are notyet sent to the port; (light blue colourbackground)- FINISHED - AT commands have beensuccesfully sent to the port; (darkblue background)- CONNECTED – the port was found ina call at the time when it wassupposed to be placed under theprocess of executing AT commands;(red background). Call is dropped. ATcommands are sent.- PORT ERROR- the port was found inalarm at the time when it wassupposed to be placed under theprocess of executing AT commands;(red background). The port will beinterrogated in the next cycle.- TIMEOUT- there was a timeout forreceiving responses for an ATcommand; (red background). The portwill be interrogated in the next cycle - CARD ERROR- the card to which theport belongs was in alarm when theapplication was tried to execute ATcommands for that port; (redbackground). This port will NOT not beinterrogated in the next cycle. - UNINSTALLED- the port is notplaced on any direction or the INSTcategory is not given; (greybackground). The uninstallled port willNOT not be interrogated in the nextcycle.

- The third (rightmost) column showsthe number of interrogation cycles.The maximum number of restartcycles is 2.

Voice Quality Tests - In the same "Configuration manager" window the usercan to perform tests over the quality of voice on two GSM modules. In order tomake those tests, the user must first define the ports on which he wants tomake the tests.

This selection is done in the "Callback Table":<identity (number) to test quality of voice> 1 <code 1> <code 2>The first field of the line is an arbitrary number used to start the test of thequality of voice. The second field must be "1" (callback functionality). The lasttwo fields are containing the prefix used in routing table, the GSM portnumber and the number to call.<code1>=<prefix>+032+0744000001 (GSM port position - 032, number tocall -0744000001 )<code2>=<prefix>+033+0744000002 (GSM port position - 033, number tocall -0744000002 )

The Topex gateway will call the GSM module on first port, and following itsanswer, it will connect the two, allowing you to check the quality of voice forthe respective connection.

For example:9999 1 720320720000000 720330740000000 - the identity used for test is"9999". The prefix used in routing table for the test service is "72". First GSMport is 32 and the second is 33. First number to be called is "0720000000" andthe second one is "0740000000".

In routing table must exist a record to route "72" (the test prefix) to SERV("Action" = SERV) and destination "11".

The command to start the voice test is performed from "Configurationmanager": test callbqack 9999When the last command is executed, the gateway calls the first number0720000000 from port 32. When the calls is answered at destination, thesecond part of the test is done. The phone number 0740000000 is dialed andthe two are connected.

This way you can connect two by two all of the GSM ports of the gateway andtest the quality of the voice on the respective connections.

Linux commandsAlso you can type in the "Configuration manager" LINUX-like commands that

will be sent to the connected gateway. The syntax must always begin with"system" characters. After a separation character (space character) a LINUXcommand may follow. By pressing ">" character after a command the softwareautomatically adds the destination file for the command output. Thisdestination is by default "/mnt/app/out/out". After such a command the usermay analyse the output file by selecting the "Output File" icon command (" ")from the toolbar.

5. Licence

This last option of “Facilities” menu is used to send a license message to theTopex gateway.

The purpose of the "license" feature is to implement control over the time-limited application running on the gateway. This limited application will serveincoming calls only for a specific number of days. After the expiration of thisperiod, the application will no longer process the calls. A license message issent by Topex company, message that is unique for each gateway (it can't beused with another gateway).

Licenses can enable the control over some of the gateway's features. Theavailable features are:- Basic- SS7- VoIP- Callback- Portability- Tax - Pulses calculation

The license-enabling message consists of several lines. This message can bereceived by the customer as an e-mail message. The user copies the messageinto the "License" window and it send to the gateway.The gateway should answer with the confirmation message: "LICENCEACCEPTED". If the license message is not valid, the answer will be "LICENCEREJECTED". If the license is accepted then the number of working day isdisplayed in the status bar.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - CONNECT...

1. Connecting steps

First click on the Connect… property and wait until the connection with theremote TOPEX system is established.

A dialog window will appear after the connection was successfully established.The login procedure on the remote equipment will follow.

A dialog box will appear and in case of connection successfully established theOAM program tries to download the configuration information, as follows:· File with information about the installed cards ("card.cfg");· File with information about the port settings ("port.cfg");. File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.cfg");· File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg");· File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin");· File with information about pin codes on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("pin.cfg");· File with information about loading on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("loadsim.bin");· File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces("tmaxsim.bin");· File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation toLeast Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg");· Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting andprogramming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg");

· File with information concerning the parameters used for communicationbetween a Topex gateway and the "gwconfig" application, and the parametersused for debug purposes ("exec.cfg");· File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg");· Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC(circuit identification codes) allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files usedin case of SS7 card presence;- Files used for VOIP-H323/SIP configuration: "voip.cfg" and "h323.cfg" and"sip_pbx.cfg".

There are progress indicators for all of these files. All these files create agateway configuration. The "gwconfig" application allows the user to save agateway configuration into a separate location (directory). Then you can edit(modify) this configuration and later upload it to one or more TOPEX gateways.

There are a few situations that can occurr while attempting to connect:

1.The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to a system. If it can'tconnect at the fourth retry it displays the following error message: "PassingConnection Retry Error".

2. In the case of passing fourth attempts for login the following error messagewill appear: "Passing Authentication Retry Error". User will not be able toview or modify system configuration.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of theconfiguration files, it displays the following error message:"Downloading Configuration Failed". User will not be able to view or modify

system configuration.

4. If the dialog process between system and OAM computer falls (up to anumber of consecutive errors) a "Passing LAPD Retry Error" messageoccurs.

5. If connection breaks down (because of IP) during the configurationdownloading process or during the connected state, a "Connection Lost"message appears.

You can only connect to one TOPEX system at a time. So if you want toconnect to another system, you must first disconnect from the previous one.

Please note that there are two types of windows used by the program. There isone window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewingand changing the configuration (settings) of the Topex systems. When youwork with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands fromthe tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mousebutton you will be able to hide the window. If you work (change or view) witha certain configuration, this can be hidden using the right mouse button. If theOAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clickingwith the right mouse button over the status bar, you will make pop up awindow with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

Note: - In order to allow additional facilities, the application may also be launchedtogether with the following parameters:1) The OAM software includes a protection against starting more then oneinstance. If it is necessary to start the software more then one time, youshould use the following command to start the software: "gwconfig.exe -d"or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several Topexgateways.2) Parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administrationprogram to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a spacedelimiter and the three following fields: identification name for the remotesystem, user name and password (to allow automated log-in).For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>".In case of redundancy when the password is not explicity requested - thisparameter ("-c") must be used to provide the username/password to connectto each processor card.3) Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of date. Theinformation saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, livemonitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and

signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S"4) There are situations in which the configuration contains files with largedimensions and the process of downloading is taking too much time. In such asituation the "z" parameter must be used in order to compress and transferfrom and to proccesor card the compressed files.

All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

Note: if another user is connected at the same time with the "gwconfig"software from another PC, when you try to access the Topex gateway you getthe following error message:

This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to thatgateway has already been accepted.

5) in case of TOPEX equipment with redundancy (multiswitch or EONES) - theapplication is connecting to each processor card but the configuration is notautomatically downloaded like in a normal case. During the system setup - theuser connects to each processor card and downloads the current systemconfiguration - - Downloading Configuration. Every change made from OAMwill be done on both processors in the same time. If one processor card ischanged - then the current configuration can be send through the upload icon:

- Upload Configuration

2. Configuration modifier

Once the configuration files are downloaded, in the right side a "ModifyConfiguration" window will be displayed. In this window you can view andchange the current configuration (settings) of the equipment.

In the previous image (valid for multiACCESS/QUTEX equipments) you willnotice:- a menu bar with names such as "Systems", "Facilities", "About", "Help" and"Exit";- underneath, a toolbar with different buttons marked with icons;- to the left, the tree-like structure of installed gateways;- the right panel, blue, which is the main window;- in the upper corner, the flags for selecting the language;

The previous image is different for an EONES equipment. The EONES systemcan contains up to 11 digital boards. On the OAM pane the EONES structure isdivided on succesive screens, with three slots each. Every slot may hold a 2E1

trunk or a VoIP card. The main difference between multiACCESS/QUTEX OAMpanel and the EONES panel are the navigation arrows that allows you to gofrom one configuration screen to another - arrows which are located on thebottom right zone of the OAM pane.

Note: there is also a situation when an TOPEX EONES is slave of another

TOPEX - case in which there will be 22 E1 or VoIP slots. For example you canhave a multiswitch master with an EONES slave.

At the bottom of the screen (bottom left corner) thereare left and right navigation arrows. These arrows allowsyou to go from one group of three slots to the nextone or to go back

.

Types of boards:

S

AnalogueSubscriber board8 ports (FXScard)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

GGSM/UMTS/CDMAmodules board 2ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

PPBX junctionsboard 8 ports(FXO card)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

E E&M junctionsboard 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

B BL phones board8 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

RG Radio board 4ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

NT/TE ISDN-BRI boardwith 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

D E1R2 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

IE1ISDN-PRIboard (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

T E1SS7 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

R E1R1 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

V

VOIP card - withH323 or SIPprotocol (8,16,32or 64 channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

For multiACCESS/QUTEX systems, the configuration window is divided intothree distinct areas:

- Port status: the analog boards ports (subscriber (FXS), GSM, PBX (FXO),E&M and BL) are viewed;- Trunk status: the E1 trunks or VOIP channels are viewed;- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

For EONES/multiswitch systems, the configuration window is divided into twodistinct areas:- the area with SLOTs - on each succesive screen - the OAM pane displayshree slots. Every slot may hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card; The middle of thescreen shows groups of three slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on,up to “9,10,11”. You may install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP)in an EONES system, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. For the case of an EONES slave - the total number of slots will be 22.For the multiswitch system - if RTP proxy is needed - for example in case ofSIP users behind NAT - then a VoIP card will be declared (but not physicallypresent). Otherwise - the configuration can be empty. If transcoding is neededthen a TOPEX multiaccess or QUTEX equipped with a VoIP card will be declaredas slave to the softswitch configuration.- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

If a SS7 card is present into the gateway configuration then another zone willshow up on the panel: "Remote SP accessibility".

2.1. PORT STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)- In the Port Status area each column represents an analog board physicallyinstalled in the rack of the equipment. You can have maximum 16 boards formultiACCESS equipment (128 ports) or 5 boards for QUTEX equipment (40ports). Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter(character) followed by a three digit number. The letter is an identifier for thetype of board (Ex. the GSM modules boards feature the letter „G"). Thenumber that follows the letter is the port position. Each rectangle also includesunder the port value a text which corresponds to the direction name to whichthe port is allocated (this text is limited to 6 characters).

- Port representation is from right to left and on a card from up to down(position on a card from 0 to 7).

- For a GSM/UMTS/CDMA board the number which follows the "G" character iscalculated by multiplying the card number (the number which is written underthe rectangle with the card representation) with 8 and adding the position onthe board. For example GSM module "G040" is located on card 5 at firstposition (5*8+0=40). Module "G041" is located on card 5 at second position(5*8+1=41). The rule applied is number of card * 8 + position on the board.

- The port representation is changing when the user selects the icon "Statusmonitoring" in a connecting state. Then the color used to display each port ischanging according to the port status: used port- white color, port in alarm -red color, invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" fieldnot set or card error) and available port - dark blue. A detailed explanationwill be presented later in this chapter ("Monitoring"). For a GSM module it willbe presented in case of a registered SIM, the active SIM card (in the nextexample is the first SIM).

- example of a GSM module displayed in dark blue color which is placedon direction "GSM". The active SIM card on the "032" module is "1".If the GSM module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) thenafter the port position and a line character it is presented a value from 0 to 5which describes the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position.

- example of a GSM module displayed in red color with the cause of error"2" meaning "no physical SIM".

- Each port from each card can be individually configured by clicking with leftmouse button on corresponding port.

- Depending on port type different parameters may be set:

Port type Category Direction Number Restriction HuntingGroup

PickupGroup Target SIM

IndexS(Subscriber)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (for "BC"settled)

NO

G (GSM) YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES

P (JPABX) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

E (E&M) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

B (BL) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO

2.2. TRUNK STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)

- By default, only one digital card (2E1 or VOIP) can be used in a TOPEXmultiACCESS or QUTEX gateway. For a multiACCESS system: it must be inserted on position to the right of thePG (Processor Card); According, in the "Trunk Status" window only two Trunkrectangles can be filled with channels (if they were declared), the other twowill be empty (like in the next image); Upon customer's request, the backplaneof the multiACCESS gateway can be modified to accomodate two digital cards(2E1 or VOIP); for example you can have two 2E1 cards ore one 2E1 card andone VOIP card. They will be inserted on positions to the left and to the right ofPG. In this case, on the screen in the "Trunk Status" area all four rectanglescan be filled with channels. Older versions of the multiACCESS used 1E1 cards,

that is the E1 board had a single E1 interface. Consequently, on older TOPEXgateways you may use by default only one E1 trunk - placed on position to theright of PG. If you replace the old 1E1 card with a 2E1 card, you may have twoE1 interfaces. The maximum number of E1 interfaces which can be installed ina TOPEX multiACCESS is four and this is the reason why in "Trunk Status"zone the representation contains four E1 trunks.

For a QUTEX system: QUTEX allows you to use up to 3 cards of 2E1. thenumber of 2E1 cards that can be used in the front side of the equipment isconfigured only by the manufacturer.- if you use 3 cards of 2E1 is important to know that the equipment cannot beequipped with VoIP cards or other subscriber cards. In this case the maximumnumber of E1 interfaces which can be installed in a TOPEX QUTEX is sixth andthis is the reason why in "Trunk Status" zone the representation contains sixthE1 trunks.- If you use only a single 2E1 card - you can install it on the back side ofQUTEX equipment (near the processor card). The other 5 cards positions canbe filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use two 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side and the otheron the front side on the first slot from the base. The other 4 cards positionscan be filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use three 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side, and theothers on the front side on the first slot and on the last slot- If you are using a VoIP card - the VoIP card will be always fixed between thepower supply card and the processor card. Additional 2E1 card can be installedon the front side of the QUTEX equipment.- for a QUTEX system - the user must be aware about the number of availablecard positions (for FXS, FXO, GSM and ISDN-BRI)- positions from 0 to 4 can beavailable in case when just a 2E1 card or a VoIP card is installed. If another2E1 card is used then just positions from 0 to 3 are available.

2.3. SLOT STATUS (EONES/multiswitch)

You can have maximum 11 digital boards on an EONES equipment. Every slotmay hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card. The middle of the screen shows groups ofthree slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on, up to “9,10,11”. Youmay install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP) in an EONESsystem, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. The alarms for the respective E1 boards are also shown as rectangles withcorresponding names: LIS, AIS, LFA, RJA, BER, etc. The color of theserectangles turns to red in case of emergence of an alarm.

2.4.1. E1 card

- The E1 representation of an E1 trunk features on the first two rows thechannels. For each channel, the type of the E1 interface is shown as a smallrectangle marked with a letter, followed by a two-figure number - the numberof the channel. The third row includes representation of the alarm buttons.Each alarm button is marked with an abbreviation for the type of alarm itrepresents, as described in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal

AIS Alarm of Indication Signal

LFA Loss of Frame Alignment

RJA Remote of Junction Alarm

LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment (not foran IDSN or SS7 interface)

RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm (not for anIDSN or SS7 interface)

BER Bit error rate

- Code representation used on drawing the E1 channels:

D E1R2 trunk channel (32positions on a E1 trunk)

I E1ISDN trunk channel ISDN(32 positions)

T E1SS7 (32 positions)

R E1R1 (32 positions)

- Each channel from each E1 interface can be individually configured byclicking with left mouse button on the corresponding channel. For eachchannel the "Category" and the "Direction" parameters can be settled.

-Up to four E1 trunks can be represented. -In the following picture an E1 - SS7 interface (letter "T") and an E1 - ISDNinterface (letter "I") are displayed.

- The indication "SC" is used to highlight the signaling channel.

- In the previous representation with the E1 trunks, the card number isdisplayed in the right side of each trunk. The trunks can be placed on card 16(trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7). - In case of a 2E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is32 (this means that the first E1 interface is located on position 32 and thenext interface is located on position 33). The position on the left side of theprocessor card is 16 (this means that the first E1 interface is located onposition 16 and the next interface is located on position 17).- In case of a E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is 32and the position on the left side of the processor card is 33.

2.4.2. VOIP card

- The VOIP card representation features four rows, each with 16 channels.The total number of channels is 64 (compressed voice channels). For eachchannel, the type of the VOIP card is shown as a small rectangle marked witha letter, followed by a two-figure number - the number of the channel.Depending on customer needs, the VoIP card can be delivered with 8,16,32 or64 channels.

- letter 'V' is used for code representation for drawing the VOIP channels:

- A VOIP card is used instead of a 2E1 board; it can be inserted in the rack ofthe gateway on card positions 16 or 32. The protocols supported are H232 andSIP. The codecs used are G711, G723, G728, G729. Please note that the firsttwo channels on the VoIP card ("V00" and "V01") can't be used as valid voicechannels.

2.5. CARD STATUS

In the area "Card status" of the window, the first row is a representation of thestatus of the boards installed in the cabinet of the equipment. Each board isshown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the 19"rack.(from right to left). The current status of the board is shown by its color.The second row shows the status of the E1 trunk board: cards 16,17, 32 and33.

2.6. LinkStatus & REMOTE SP ACCESSIBILITY

This zone is displayed only if a SS7 card is present into the gatewaymultiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES configuration. This zone is a representation ofthe accessibility of the remote (adjacent or non-adjacent) signaling points.The TOPEX gateway can handle connections to maximum 32 signaling points(SP) which are represented by boxes with values from 00 to 31. Values from 0to 11 are used for adjacent signaling points and values from 4 to 31 for non-

adjacent signaling points.

The used colors in displaying the "Remote SP accessibility" bar are:- connection to a SP not installed - light blue - connection to a SP installed - dark blue. The information regarding theinstalled SP connections is reading from the "MTP Configuration" file (" ") -the enabled routes (option "Route x" where x is from 0 to 31).- connection error (alarm) to a SP installed - red. This information is reread ateach 60 seconds.

On the EONES system - the "LinkStatus & Remote SP Accessibility" zone isdisplayed on the last OAM pane screen - the screen which contains the lastthree EONES slots (9,10 and 11)

2.7. EONES - structure of slots

For EONES equipment - the type of each slot is declared in the bottom side ofthe screen using the " " icon. As you can notice in the next picture, there isa list with all slots (named "PG"), slots starting from 0 to 11. The "Type" ofeach slot is 'E1' for E1 cards, 'VoIP' for VoIP card and 'Not Used' for slotunused.

For softswitch and for configuration with EONES slave - the ">>" button willbe used to navigate to slots 12-23.

The "IP Remote" and "Port Remote" are not used in EONES configuration - areused in master-slave configuration. The "Rez1" and "Rez2" fields are keepedfor further developments.

The "IP Private VoIP" and "IP Public VoIP" fields are used for EONES andrepresent the VoIP private IP - the VoIP IP card and VoIP public IP. For VoIPslots a new line must be filled - the corresponding "VoIPx" line. For examplethe next line corresponds to slot 0 and contents the processor card address -192.168.161.3, the MSPD port - 9677 (for the next VoIP card it will be used9675, 9673, 9671 and so on). It follows the gateway MAC behind which theEONES is located (it is the same for all EONES VoIP card) and the VoIP MACcard.voip 0 2 192.168.161.3 9677 fork /mnt/app/bin/mspd -p 9677 --trace-cmd -v--mem 16 --gw-mac 00:48:54:1A:D2:8D -m 00:52:C2:40:3E:40192.168.244.150 --log /mnt/app/out/%d-%m-%y_mspd.log -

Please notice that in case of EONES - the VoIP configuration is performed hereon "PG configuration" - slot configuration. On "VOIP Configuration" window -the "PG Card IP Address", "VoIP Card IP Address", "Public IP Address", "VoIPCard MAC" and "IP GATEWAY MAC" will be empty.

The "RTP_IP" button is used to fill the IP used in RTP packets. This value canbe different if the TOPOX equipment has more then one ethernet interfaces.

3. Changes available by icons

3.1. Downloading Configuration

This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor card fromwhich the configuration is downloading:

The configuration is downloaded from the selected processor card.

When the configuration is downloaded - the next window appears asking fortaking over the new configuration. If the answer is yes - then the

configuration will be displayed in the OAM panel.

I

3.2. Uploading ConfigurationThis option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor/processorcars to which the configuration will be uploaded:

Once the processor card is selected the uploading process is started.

The confirmation message for succesfully uploaded is "The new configurationhas been uploaded!". If an error occurs the message will be "Uploadingconfiguration Failed".

3.3. Save Current Configuration

A configuration is the collection of files which are downloaded from a gatewayduring the connection progress. These files describe the mode of working for aTOPEX gateway. The "Save Current Configuration" (icon " ") may be use onlyin a state of connection between the "gwconfig" application and a gateway.

The next image is displayed allowing the user to type the "ConfigurationName":

After the validation of button "Save" a new item will appear in the tree windowlocated in the left side of the application panel. The name which was typed inthe "Enter Configuration Name" will be presented together with characters"viz". Note:the gateways to which the user is able to make connections will havecharacters "cfg" before the gateway identification name.

There are two possible options for a saved configuration:- "Edit" - this option will display the saved configuration in the same manneras for a connected gateway. The user is able to make changes. All settings arepreserved when the user choose the "Close" option.- "Close" - this is the option to close the "Edit" configuration mode. Click "OK"to hide the configuration window.

3.4. Upload Edited ConfigurationThis option is used in a state of connection between "gwconfig" application anda gateway. The icon " " is used to launch the uploading process. First step is

to select in "Uploading CONFIGURATIONS" the desired configuration to beupload. All available configurations are displayed in a list. The user must selecta configuration then press the button "Loading".

The uploading process is started. The progress of gateway uploading may befollowed in the "Uploading configuration" window.

A confirmation message is displayed when the uploading process has ended.

The "gwconfig" software will display on the screen the new configuration. Theconfiguration is used also by the gateway main application.

3.5. Gateway ParametersBy clicking the "Gateway Parameters" icon (" ") a window for editing severalgateway parameters is shown. These parameters are regarding IP address,firewall, serial connectivity and IP connectivity with "gwconfig" software,debug, syslog and SNMP messages to be generated by Topex gateway.

Network settings - this zone allows the user to change the IP address of thegateway (in the image the record started by "IPADDR"). Also the user maychange the netmask (line started by "NETMASK") and the gateway address(line started by "GATEWAY"). A line which is started with "#" character will benot taken into account. The gateway must be restarted after one parameterfrom the "Network settings" was changed. The icon used for restarting thegateway is " ".

Connection zone: these settings are related to the serial connectivity and IPconnectivity of the TOPEX equipment with the "gwconfig" software. Thecommand "Parameters" located in the "gwconfig" software is related to the PCcommunication parameters. The parameters set for the gateway mustcorrespond to those established for the OAM program.

Serial Speed - the value is used for serial communication between OAMprogram and the software of the gateway. Allowed values are 0 (it meansunused port and must be set when you want to install a dialup server on thegateway), 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (default value);

Serial Port num - specifies the number of the serial port on the gateway to beused for serial connection with OAM software. Allowed values are 1 or 2 andthe default is 1 (COM1);

IP Port num - the port used for IP connectivity; the default value is 9009. Ifthis value is changed from OAM software, then the connection will beimmediately lost. You must have the same port number established both in theOAM program and in the software running on the TOPEX gateway. Afterperforming a reset, the OAM software will be able to connect to the gatewayusing the new value of IP Port.

Firewall - in this edit zone - user can add incoming firewall rules. Each linefrom the edit zone must contain three fields. - first field is the connection type ("tcp" or "udp");- next the IP address follows - it represents the IP address from which theconnection to the port specified in the third field is allowed. - third field represents the port on which the connection is accepted.

For example "tcp 192.168.1.6 22" means that a TCP connection is accepted onport 22 (SSH port) from "192.168.1.6" address.

To enable firewall protection you must uncomment some lines of theconfiguration file.For this, remove the "#" character from the beginning of these lines:"LAN=ppp0", "WAN=eth0" "USE_FIREWALL=yes"

After this operation is done, you must reboot the gateway for the newsettings to take effect.

Attention!Be careful when you use the embedded firewall. If the firewall protectionis started without the of presence of valid lines in the "Firewall settings", thenthe Topex gateway will be no longer reachable from IP. In that case, the onlysolution for accessing the gateway is to use the serial connection via the COM2port of the PG card. Use this serial connection to fix the firewall settings, thenyou will be able again to access the gateway via IP.

Debug

Activate 'log' file - when the option is checked the debug messages will begenerated in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. These debug files have

extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy).

db_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages will be shown inthe debug log of the TOPEX gateway.

db_cfg - when the option is checked any changes on gateway configuration willbe shown in the gateway debug log.

- the option sets the debug mask that establishes for which subjects will begenerated debug logs. The items that may be recorded in the logs are: "PortActivity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM". To edit the "DebugMask" field, the button "..." must be pressed. Then the "Computing DebugOptions" window will be displayed.

- "Port Activity" option is used to generate debug records for all ports of theTOPEX gateway;- "ComCCS" is used to generate debug records for communication with theISDN and SS7 applications;- "SOmes" is used to debug the main application which is running on theTOPEX gateway;- "comUNIX" is used to debug the commands which are received from the webserver;- "comOAM" is used to debug the communication with OAM software.

Here you just check the boxes for the options you need to generate debuginformation.

Samples of messages from a debug log of a TOPEX gateway:

If option "db_alarms" was set then messages preceeded by "RUN" will appearin the debug file:RUN Com Err cd f cat 43 (this is an alarm message on card 'f' which is cardnumber 15 from the gateway) RUN Com Err cd 10 cat 4003 (this is an alarm message on card '10' which iscard number 16 from the gateway)RUN NLIS 4 (LIS error on card 32)RUN NLFA 4 (LFA error on card 32)RUN NAIS 4 (AIS error on card 32)RUN NRJA 4 (RJA error on card 32)

If option "db_cfg" was set then messages preceeded by "CFG" will appear inthe debug file:CFG Open for read ../cfg/trafic.cfgCFG Alarm run 0 ASRalarm 80 timeasr 12(min) nr min calls 1 alarmmask 0timetest 0CFG Save ASR at 30 minCFG Debug 1 Pstart 0 Pstop 320 SaveFile 1 CFG Trafic run 0CFG Trafic idle time 5CFG Trafic seize time 30CFG GEN TRAFFIC CALL 0 1234567891108 120 port 257 mod 0. Thesemessages contains operations performed over the configuration files.

If option "Port Activity" is validated in the creation of debug file then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:00257 7235150 pid 1 E1CCSidle ACTIV channel 100257 7235150 Digits 1234567891108 Ident 12000257 7235200 Route N 123456 ... NT 123456 ... RxT 900000257 7235200 Dialdig M_CALL len 3000258 7235200 pid 2 E1CCSidle CALL mod 1 mycat 540f b_pid 1 prtb 101param 000258 7235200 Digits Ident 12000257 7235250 Dialdig ACK_CALL->Dialdest00257 7250250 Dialdest TimeOut00258 7250250 E1CCSackout TimeOut|CANCEL ->BUSY. In this casemessages were generated for ports 257 and 258.

If option "SOmes" was validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "GEN" will appear in the debug file: GEN COADA 6 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:19:10 SysDay 2

GEN Run60sec 6872131 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:20:11 SysDay 2GEN Run60sec 6465996 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN COADA 5 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0

If option "comOAM" is validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:OAM ADD CARD 16 CAT 4003 (this is a message which indicates that the card16 was added to the gateway. Value "4003" is a category which describes thetype of card.)

Syslog - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") the debugmessages can be sent to a selected IP address. This Syslog is an UNIX-like filefeature that allows logging of debug messages and sending them to a remotemachine. The destination IP address is written on target in the file"/etc/syslog.conf". All logged messages will contain the identification of thegateway (you enter the identification in the field "Equipment IP").

The type of syslog messages is chosen from the "Facility" list: "LOG_USER","LOG_LOCAL0", "LOG_LOCAL1", "LOG_LOCAL2", "LOG_LOCAL3","LOG_LOCAL4", "LOG_LOCAL5", "LOG_LOCAL6" and "LOG_LOCAL7".

syslog_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages are sent tothe syslog destination;

syslog_cfg - when the option is checked then any changes made upon gatewayconfiguration will be also sent to the syslog destination;

Syslog mask - is similar to debug mask. This option establishes for which item("Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM") the syslogmessage will be generated. Click on "..." button and the next window showsup, allowing you to select the items which will be included in the syslog.

SNMP - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") alarms canbe sent as traps to a selected IP address ("IP destination"). The user canchoose the type of the trap (default value is 6 - "Entreprise Specific"), thecommunity name (default value is "public"). For an alarm appearance - thevalue sent is 0, and for an alarm disappearance is 1. You can allow thattogether with the trap containing the 0 / 1 value, a second trap with the alarmtext specification to be sent. The OID of traps are derived from the specifiedOID ("1.3.6.1.4.1.x")

Name - this field is used as a prefix for the names of different files (alarm,billing, activity, log and ASR) created by the gateway's application. If youleave this field empty, then the name of these files is given by the current dayand an extension (for example "12-01-05.tax" is the billing file created on the12th January 2005). If the "Name" field is filled then the names of these fileswill be given by the name you have typed, concatenated with the current dayand the extension. For example if you type "Topex", the billing file created on12-01-05 will be named "Topex12-01-05.tax".

3.6. Direction - Editing directions namesBy clicking the "Directions names " icon (" ") a window for editing directionsname will be shown listing the directions name. Depending of the gatewaymain application there is a maximum of 20 OR 250 directions. The “Directions” are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have commonrouting characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you must assignone or more trunks to each direction.

To edit a direction name, you select the name of the direction you want to editand double click the name. The following window "Edit direction name" will beshown:

The direction name must be a unique identifier - an alphanumeric text(digits/letters) of maximum 19 characters long. The first character must not bea digit. The direction name must not contain inside the character space " ".Otherwise an error message will be shown:

3.7. Calls direction - Defining the directions table

Click on the icon button "Calls direction" (" ")to open up the window fordefining the table with call directions. There is a maximum of 20 or 250directions (trunk groups).

At the bottom of this window - there are two buttons named "DIR IP InSettings..." and "DIR IP Out Settings". The first one is used to control theincoming access into the TOPEX equipment. The second one is used toestablish the VoIP outgoing destinations.

To edit a direction parameters double click on it and the next window "Edit calldirections parameters" will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Insert" and "Insert_Id"fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "Signaling" 4 characters and for "Signaling2"8 characters.

Name - the name of the direction (cannot be edited here);Type - can be PORT or DIR and specifies how that direction is addressed. Theassociated list contains two strings "PORT" and "DIR". A value of "255"indicates that the direction is ignored; when the "255" value is assigned to adirection - then the entire line will be displayedin white color. The name of thedirection which has "255" assigned to "Type" field will be displayed in red colorin the list used to assign a direction for each kind of port and also in all placesin which the destination will be a direction name.Overflow -overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this overflow direction when the current direction is unavailable(completely busy or out of service); you choose a name of a defined directionfrom the corresponding list.Overflow 2 - second overflow direction for the current direction. The calls willbe re-routed to this second overflow direction when the first overflow directionbecomes unavailable; you choose a name of a defined direction from thecorresponding list. Restriction - the class of restriction applied to that direction; from the list anumber from 0 to 19 can be selected.Ignore - specifies how many digits are ignored from the numbers received onthat direction; the first x digits of the received number will be ignored. The listcontains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Insert - specifies the digits to be inserted in the number received on that

direction; The maximum allowed is 16 digits. If you don't want any digit to beinserted you must enter "---" for this field.Note: First the ignoring operation is performed and then the insertionoperation.Max_d - maximum number of digits that may be dialed on that direction.When the maximum number is reached the system will automatically send outthe call to routing analysis, without waiting to see if the caller part still sendsdigits. This option is especially useful when you define directions for which thenumber of figures to be dialed is well known (for example the numbers forcertain GSM networks). The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Ignore_id - Ignores from the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number ofdigits you have specified; The maximum allowed is 20 figures. The Ignorecommand is performed before the Insert command. The list contains a range ofvalues from 0 to 20 digits.Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID the specified figures; The maximum allowedis 16 digits.Max_id - The maximum number of digits from the Caller ID to be sent to thesubscriber who has been called. The list contains a range of values from 0 to20 digits.Signaling - contains 4 digits with shape 'xyzw' with the following significance:

Digits Purpose

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x1000)

DIRCHECKCALLBACK- when this bit is setthen for an incomingcall on this directionthe callback table willbe analysed with thereceived identity(caller identity)

bit 3 (mask 0x8000)

DIRMODULECDMA -when this bit is set allGSM ports placed onthe selected directionwill be treated asCDMA modules

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0100)

DIRTESTNET (used incase of a directionwhich contains GSMmodules) - when thisbit is 1 one then theoutgoing GSM modulewill be tested if it isregistered

DIRGOODASR - whenthis bit is set then a

y (digit 2)

bit 1 (mask 0x0200)

RELEASE message issent on ISDN with adelay of 5 secondswhen a congestionsituation isencountered on GSMpart. The call will waiton the specified timea free GSM resource.

bit 2 (mask 0x0400)

DIRCATCALL - whenthis bit is set then allcalls will be cut(stopped) on the GSMmodules for which areprogramming isnecessary (forexample when a SIMmust be changedbecause of an usedalgorithm)

bit 3 (mask 0x0800)

verify CLIR - whenthis bit is set then theCLIR setting is verifiedeach time after theCLIR setting is sentto a GSM module

z (digit 3)audio level (in range 0-7 dBm for the directions withGSM interfaces) where '0' is the biggest level valueand '7' the lowest value

w (digit 4)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0001)- when is set identityis received on selecteddirection

bit 1 (mask 0x0002)- when is set identityis sent on selecteddirection

bit 2 (mask 0x0004)

- establish thealgorithm forchanging SIM on GSMinterfaces (when notset, the algorithm forminimal cost is used(SIM selection by timeperiods). When thebit is set, the "loadbalancing algorithm" isused (equal usagetime for each SIM)

- by setting it, youallow coupling of ring-

bit 3 (mask 0x0008)back tone while dialingon the next link,before the called partyanswers

By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Signaling" field will appear:

Signaling2 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. One bit called "Transit Q.850" is used to transfer the Q.850 termination codefrom the GSM link back on the E1-ISDN link. These Q.850 codes are availableonly for the Siemens GSM modules. For Voxson modules and when the"Transit Q.850" option is not checked the main application is sending acongestion message for NO DIALTONE message and for a NO CARRIERreceived under 2 seconds. The BUSY message is also received from GSMnetwork and it is sent as it is. A NO CARRIER message received for a valuegreather than 2 seconds will be treated as a release from the GSM network.A second bit called "Load balancing algorithm on SIM index" is used to enablethe load-balancing algorithm ("equal load") on the SIMs that are alreadyselected by SIM index algorithm.

"Calculate Tax Pulses" - for each direction (group of trunks) for incoming calls,you can establish the calculating (and sending) of the tax pulses. The taxpulses will be generated according to rules you specify and will accumulate inthe billing files. In any case, the calculated tax pulses are saved in the files. Inthe case of an ISDN connection (E1-ISDN trunk) these pulses are also sentout, using ISDN - AOC messages. You must remember that the mask must beapplied to the direction to which E1-ISDN channels belong.Note: You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in“Routing Table”.

The "Search UP" and "Search Down" fields are used for establish a rule inwhich channels are selected - for example for a SS7 E1 trunk - the order inwhich channels are selected in very important - if the trunk is used in bothdirection then one side will choose channels from the first one - and the otherside from the last one.

The "Priority" field is useful in order to implement routes with the same prefixto have different priorities. For example - when a TOPEX softswitch is used toroute calls to several TOPEX gateways - then each outgoing direction will haveassigned a priority. The customer can assign higher priority to the machineswith higher traffic capabilities and performances. The lowest priority is 0 andthe higher is 9.

Signaling3,Signaling4,Signaling5 and Signaling6 - each one contain 8digits which will be fully used in further development.

Verifications are made for the fields that are involving insertion operation:"Insert" and "Insert_id". The allowed characters are digits from 0 to 9, "*","#", "f" and "F". Characters "\","/","-" and "." are ingored in saving process. Anerror message is displayed in case of an error.

By pressing "OK" you validate the settings for the "Signaling" field.

Note: If the field "Signaling" for a direction (for a record with type "DIR" ) ischanged by modifying "Receive identity","Send identity" or "Audio Level", thenall the GSM modules belonging to that direction will be re-programmed (reset)in order to properly activate the sending and the receiving of the identity. Alsothe audio level will be re-programmed. A confirmation message will bedisplayed as follows:

3.7.1. DIR IP Settingsa) DIRIPIN section - this section is used to perform direction settings for VoIPincoming calls.

By clicking the "DIR IP In Settings..." button in "Define calls direction" windowthe following configuration window will show up:

You can Add or remove (Del) records about incoming VoIP calls.

Here the user must allocate to each pair <protocol, IP range> a direction anda maximum number of incoming calls. The name of the direction can be one ofthe already defined directions, so it can be “MYVOIP” - the genericdirection used for group the VoIP channels or another direction if youwant to use ignore / insert features. If you use the generic MYVOIP name, allVoIp calls will be treated in the same way, but if you use speciffic directionnames, you can define different rules for different incoming IPs. This allowsyou to perform operations such ignoring / inserting digits on the incomingnumber or identity (see "Calls direction") like for ordinary calls.

Examples:SIP 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for SIP protocol calls areallowed from all IPs, and maximum 60 calls are allowedH323 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for H323 protocol also callsare allowed from all Ips, and maximum 60 calls are allowed

Note1: in the "IP field" you can complete either a single IP (such as192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just fromthat IP. It is the same as using range /32.For example if you use 192.168.1.0/24 then IPs allowed are 192.168.1.x;For example if you use 192.168.0.0/16 then IPs allowed are 192.168.x.x;For example if you use 192.0.0.0/8 then IPs allowed are 192.x.x.x;For example if you use 0.0.0.0/0 then IPs allowed are x.x.x.x (calls areallowed from all IPs!);

Note2: The maximum number of incoming calls controls the number ofsimultaneosly calls accepted from the specified IP. If you enter 0 (zero) in thefield “Max Calls”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number ofincoming calls. The equipment will accept any number of calls.The default value is 100.

Proxy - must be enabled if the source IP is behind a NAT.Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination havedifferent codecs. This feature works only on the equipments supplied with aVoIP card (or there is a TOPEX slave machine with VoIP card).Congrate - this is the congestion rate. It should not be 0. The default value is1000.Maxrate - this parameter represents the total number of setup calls on asecond. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000.Prefix - this parameter was added in case when calls are coming with differentprefixes from the same IP source. In case of two such prefixes - the user canassign two different directions for the same IP source.Maxcost - this parameter will be used in further developments.

Nrdig - with this parameter - you can control the number of expected digits foreach call coming from the specified IP.Endcause - this field is the release code used when the received number has adifferent number of digits then the expected ones - "NrDig" value. The defaultvalue is 34.

b) DIRIPOUT section - this section is used to perform settings for outgoingVoIP calls.

Here the software application feature a possibility to allow overflow over an IPdirection. The user defines for each direction name a protocol (SIP or H323), adestination IP, a port used for signaling for example 1720 for H323 and 5060for SIP), the maximum number of outgoing calls.

In order to route a call on VoIP to a destination IP address - there are twopossibilities of setting in "Routing Table".- if you use "DIRIP" in "action" field then you can provide a VoIP protocol(SIP/H323) but just one IP.- if you use "DIR" in "action" field then you can provide a direction name (youdon't have any VoIP channel assign to that direction - because all VoIPchannels are assigned to "MYVOIP" direction). Here in "DIR IP OUT" section

you'll make the relation to an IP address and a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323).

- RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT.- Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination hasdifferent codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance if the destinationIP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding;

- Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. Thisparameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition("Define calls direction");

3.8. Routing table Click on the icon button "Routing table" (" ") to open the window with therouting table. You can define a maximum of 128 routing rules (also there aresituations in which the TOPEX machine can handle more routing records suchas 1024 or 4000 records). The user can consult the current settings of theTOPEX machine regarding the number of directions and routing records in thelicence window);

To add a routing rule to the table click the "Add" button. A new record will beadded at the bottom of the list (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To insert a new record over the selected record from the table the "Insert"button can be used (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To delete a rule for routing select it from the list and then click the "Del"button (the deleted line will have an empty "Prefix" field).You can have the same prefix more then once - case in which you can use"Move" buttons to change the prefix order - for the same prefix - the upperline will have a greater priority than the lower one.To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Prefix","Insert" and"Insert_Id" fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "IP" 15 characters and 4 for"Signaling", "Tax" and "Port" fields.

Incoming direction - this parameter is used in case of using several routingrecords with the same prefix in order to make the difference between incomingsource. It have to be interpreted here as incoming source direction. A"DEFAULT" value means that there is not rule to be applied.Prefix - the routing digits (the first digits which are necessary to route a call)- if you leave empty the field the respective routing rule will Not be taken intoaccount at saving action; The maximum allowed is 16 digits;- inside a prefix string the value 'f' can be used to indicate any digit from '0' to

'9'. For example "1f2" means all prefixes from "102", "112" until "192". Thisfeature is very useful because it allows to reduce the number of records in therouting table.Action - the action to be taken: (there is a list with six strings: "PORT", "DIR","SERV","HUNT", "DIRIP" and "LCR".- PORT- the call will get out through the port specified in the 'Dest' list- DIR - the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Dest' list- SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the'Dest' list- HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that was specified inthe 'Dest' list;- DIRIP - in such a case the "Dest" field will be interpreted as VoIP protocol -SIP or H323. The user must provide destinations IP address and port (in casewhen the default values of 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP are not used).- LCR - the call will get out by analising the LCR table for the index specifyedin the "Dest" field. This field can take a value from 0 to 6. Each valuerepresents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specifiedmoment.Dest - the destination may be:- a port number (in range 0-127)- a direction name specified in "Define directions names" (from the list)- a service number (from 0 to 19)- a number of a group of hunting (from 0 to 19);- an index to the LCR tableIgnore - the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the digits(numbering) sent out through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert - Adds to the number sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits; Themaximum allowed is 16 digits;Ignore _Id - the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sentout through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits;The maximum allowed is 16 digitsIP - is used in the situation when "DIRIP" is used to fill the action field. It isthe remote IP address used to establish voice over IP connection.Port - is the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when"DIRIP" is specified in the action field.Signaling - contains 4 digits 'xyzw' with the following significance :

Digits

Bit (fromright to left) Interpretation

Alloc BSS - this option is used in thesituations when the ring-back tone

x (digit 1)

bit 3 (mask0x8000)

must be identified in order to declarethe call as answered. This option isuseful in cases when the gatewayapplication must make the differencebetween a call answered withoutring-back tone and a call answeredafter a ring-back tone. Additionalsoftware must be installed on thegateway.

bit 1 (mask2000)

Simulate Tax - is used in case of FXOjunction - in which the answer atdestination can't be recognized. Insuch a situation this option has to bevalidated. The call is considered asanswered as soon as the call is madeon output link.

bit 0 (mask0x1000)

Retry Attempt - when this bit is 1one retry attempt will be made incase of a first failure on thisdirection; when this bit is 0 no retryattempts will be made

y (digit 2)

Check Operator (mask 0x0800) - is used whenportability facility is desired. For each call, adatabase interrogation is performed. The portabilitydatabase can be located on the same gateway or onanother PC. Additional software must be installedon the gateway.

Restrict ID (mask 0x0400) - is used for SS7direction in order to indicate that the identity isrestricted. The identity can be hidden if in the routing record -the ignore identity field is put to maximum digitallowed - 20.

z (digit 3) enable to set the number of digits which are waitingto take the action specified in the field "Action"

w digit 4)enable to set the number of seconds in which digitsare waiting to take the action specified in the field"Action"

Value of 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). Whena bigger number of digits is required, the value of 'y' may be used. A group of'yz' with values '10' means 16 digits.

By pressing button "..." when action="DIR" or "DIRIP", a window for setting"Signaling" field will appear:

The field called "Number of Seconds" can be filled with values from 0 to 15 andthe field "Number of Digits" with values from 0 to 20. A message error isshown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Note: there are situations when the "Computing Signaling Field"window will look different. When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "FLASHING", the window willlook like in the next image:

When the two specified fields have these values ("SERV", respectively "4"), theincoming calls will be forwarded to a "FLASING" tone. With the "Signaling"field you can specify actions about the tones heard by the incoming user:- "Connect To Music" - the gateway flashing tonality is provided to the

incoming call;- "Connect To DSP" - the tonality will be obtained from a DSP (with possiblevalues from 0 to 63);- "Loop" - the "Tx" and "Rx" sense are looped together;- "Quiet" - no tonality will be provided to the incoming call; the user will nothear anything;

The "Timer" field is used as follows: if a "0" value is used then the tonality willbe heard continously; otherwise the value will specify the amount of time onwhich the tonality will be played to the incoming call.

When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "PLAY_RELEASE", the windowwill look like in the next image:

The release cause for the prefix specified in routing table with action = "SERV"and destination = "PLAY_RELEASE" will be released with the cause specified in"Release Cause". A message to be played on such a situation can be alsorecorded and stored on the TOPEX equipment.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=SELECT PORT" is used for testing thequality of voice through the two GSM modules from the gateway (as explainedin "Facilities-Commands" chapter).

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=DISA" is used for DISA operation onISDN channels. For example a record could be:"Prefix = 8""Action = SERV""Destination = DISA""Ignore =1""Signaling = 0000"The meaning of this record is: calls are coming from ISDN with the prefix (firstdigit) '8'. This digit is deleted (because the value in the field "Ignore" is 1).DISA tone is provided. All those new digits, which are collected in DTMF tone,will be analyzed according to the routing table. If you want to be sure that allthe digits from the original number are deleted you can use instead "Ignore =20". If you want to force the call to be outputted only on a GSM direction, you can

have in the list starting with '8' the "Insert" field filled with the first digit of amobile call. For example "Insert = 0". Then, in the record for prefix "0" in therouting table you must set "Ignore =1" so one digit is deleted.Note: for a GSM port, DISA tone is provided from the GSM port by selectingthe appropriate setting in the "Category" zone.

Tax - type of billing. You can establish the prefixes that will be charged withbilling pulses in “Routing Table”. To can handle charging issues you mustchange the field “Tax”.

Prefix Action Dest. IP Port Ign Ins Ign_id Ins_id Signaling Tax

0 DIR GSM 0 0 0 00a4 110a

There are three methods (rules) for configuring calculation of tax pulse. Thefirst digit (the leftmost of the four) of “Tax” field is used to differentiatebetween those methods. Allowed values for the method are: 0 – no method, 1– method 1, 2 – method 2 and 3 – method 3.

Method 1)“1xyy” – upon answering the call is charged with “x” pulses. During the stateof conversation the call is charged with one pulses every “yy” seconds. So ifyou select “1” you must specify the number of pulses at response (10 in theexample below) and the time period for pulse generation (20 seconds in theexample below).

Method 2)“200x” – the calls are charged according to several zones and tariffs. Thezones are geographical areas where the tariff is the same. This kind oftaxation is performed by several fixed telephony (PSTN) operators. If youselect Method 2 you may change only the “Tariff Index” value.

The list of all zones and tariffs is defined in the next window, “Pulse calculationbased on Zones” that is displayed by pressing “…” button.

You can easily handle zones and tariffs.A maximum number of ten zones and four tariffs can be defined. In the image above you can notice the tariff allocation on each day of theweek.First, you have the day-tariff assignment. “day=>1,0” means that the tariff 0is applied on each “Monday”. The days of the week are allocated beginningwith Monday – 1 up to Sunday – 7. There is also an 8th day of the week, theholidays the first value is 8. These special days that begin with 8 are defined in“Define Holidays”

After day – tariff allocation the tariff – zone correspondence follows:- each line starts with a triplet “tariff=x,yy,zz”, where “x” is the number of thetariff and “yy-zz” is the time interval when the settings that follow are applied.- After the characters “tariff=x,yy,zz” come the ten columns, the zonesshowing time period when a pulse is generated. The temporization values arein msec, so if a value is “60000” this means 60 seconds

Method 3)“ 3xxx” – the calls are charged according with a tariff. This is an extension(refinement) of Method1. Besides the number of pulses upon answering andthe period for generating pulses, now you can specify also a period without taxpulses and the number of pulses per taxing period. This kind of billing is usedby several mobile telephony carriers. If you select method 3, you may changeonly the “Tariff Index” value. There are maximum 10 tariffs, so values for “Tariff Index” can be value from 0to 9.

The list of all tariffs is defined in the window “Pulse Calculation based onTariffs”, which is displayed by pressing the button “…”.

In the picture above, “Tariff1” is defined as follows:- one pulse is sent upon answering- then follows a one minute pause, for 60 seconds no pulses are sent- after 60 seconds one pulse is sent every 10 seconds.

Note. In the “Tax” field, there is also a facility for limiting the maximumduration of a call limit. For this, you select “4” for the value of the field“Method”. This is NOT really a method for calculating the charge for a call!

With this, you may impose a time limit for the call. The value for “Time” is inminutes, so the example above means that no calls longer that one hour willbe allowed.

SecondSign - here the user can specify in case of a SS7 route some

translations parameters as follows:

The first zone is related to "Nature of Address" information. We offer theposibillity to override the "Called Party" nature of address and "Calling Party"nature of address.The "Called Party" nature of address is changed by enabling the first twooptions "Check Called Party NAI" and "Override Called Party NAI".The original "Called Party NAI" - Subscriber,Unknown,National,Internationaland UK Specific - can be changed to "Override Called Party NAI" whichcontains the same list as the first one.

Moreover the "Calling Party NAI" can be override by selecting a value from"Override Calling Party NAI" and enabling the "Override Calling Party NAI"option.

The second zone named "Type of Media Required" - the route will be availablejust for the specified type of media.Possible values are "speech", "64k_unrestr" and "3K1Hz_audio".

The "Translation Occured" is to indicate for SS7 that a translation of numberhas occured

Ctime - this parameter establish the maximum call duration (in minutes). It issimilar to "Tax" method 4. If this value is set here (not 0) the "Tax" method 4will be ignored.

Search Mode - this parameter is used for routing in case of using routes withthe same prefix. In such a case a method for overflowing and dividing the

traffic between several routes must be provided. Each routes from such agroup must have "Retry Atempt" option in "Signaling field" (0x1000).

Overflow is performed if one of the following situations occurs:- when the call is routed on VoIP - the main application is checking if thenumber of simultaneously calls is greater then the maximum number of outputcalls established in diripout settings (see DIRIPOUT section).- when the call is dropped from the remote side with a release cause which isset for rerouting in "trafic.cfg". For example to reroute on congestion messagethe line "rerouteoncause 34 1" must be added in "trafic.cfg".

We assume this premise in the following explanations. This parameter is usedin conjunction with "Search Param" parameters:

SearchMode

SearchParam

Significance

ASR notused

the route will be choosenbased on ASR value

ACD notused

the route will be choosenbased on ACD value

Priority notused

The call will be routedbased on direction priority(direction specified in"dest" field).Calls from the routinggroup (with the sameprefix) will go mostly onthe direction with thehighest priority. If themaximum number of callsis reached (for examplefor a direction specified in"DIR IP OUT" settingswhen "Max Calls Out"value is passed

the route will be choosenfrom the first to the last

Down notused

one. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe first route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Up notused

the route will be choosenfrom the last to the firstone. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe last route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Circular notused

the route will be choosencirculary.

Percentspecifiesthepercent

Calls will be routed basedon percentage. The"Search Parameters"represents in this casethe percentage value. Theapplication running onTOPEX machine knows thenumber of calls on eachmachine.

Sign1 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign2 - is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" canbe override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” isdisplayed by pressing the “…” button.

To override the incoming category - the "Check IN Category" and "Override INCategory" must be selected. In the "IN Catgory" list - you select the incomingcategory which will be replaced with "Override IN Category". The possiblevalues are: "unknown""op_french""op_english""op_german"

"op_russian""op_spain""op_rsrv1""op_rsrv2""op_rsrv3""notused""ord_subscr""prio_subscr""data_call""test_call""payphone""uk_oper_call""uk_admin_diverted"

Sign3 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. Sign4 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

3.9. LCR TableIf you click the appropriate icon the "LCR index table" (" ") window willappear, where the table with the 8 indexes of LCR rules is displayed. Eachindex includes information about the selected direction for specified timeintervals on each day of the week and even the days that were declarednational holidays (non-working days).

To edit a certain LCR index, double click on that index and the next windowwill be displayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears the informationis displayed by default for "Monday".

For each day of the week, a list shows up with the time periods (intervals) thatspecify the direction to be used. In the image above , for 00:00 until 24:00the direction "LOCAL" will be used. The periods are structured as hours andminutes separated by character ":". When the user modifies the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are filled with the line information: period "From" to"Until" and the current direction. Those values can be modify and validate byoption "Mod". If you select"the Add" option, a new line will be added in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of a declared name direction arenot saved in the "LCR" file. The format of the "LCR" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size. An example of LCR file content is as follows:

#---LCR INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_lcr day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min dir(%x)l 00 1 00:00 24:00 0l 00 1e 00:00 24:00 1l 00 20 00:00 00:01 fl 00 20 00:01 12:01 11l 00 20 12:01 14:01 13l 00 20 14:01 23:01 al 00 20 23:01 24:01 9l 07 13 00:00 24:00 1l 07 4 00:00 11:45 1l 07 4 11:45 12:23 8l 07 4 12:23 12:31 1l 07 4 12:31 18:50 8

Each line is containing a letter 'l', a LCR index number (for example 00 and07), a mask (each day of the week has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and finally an index to

specify the direction used. This is the index in the "Directions Names" table (avalue from 0 to 19).Note: if the same periods and the same direction are used on different days(but for the same LCR index) then instead of two records in the file will bewritten only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operationbetween those days. For example "1e" is used to identify Tuesday, Wednesday,Thursday and Friday.

3.10. Classes of restrictions If you select "Restriction Classes" from the icon (" ") then the window"Restriction Classes" will show, allowing you to define certain classes ofrestrictions for the calls.

The window "Restriction Classes" includes 20 classes with 20 restrictions each.To edit (change) the restrictions from a class, double click on that class. A newwindow will appear, called "Edit restriction classes", as shown below. Using thiswindow you can establish up to 20 restrictions for each class.

Rules for establishing restrictions:- each restriction has 8 charactersThe characters can be any figure or the letters 'a' or 'f' - 'a' represents the figure 0 (zero). For instance a subscriber with therestriction aa000000 won't be able to make calls started with digits "00"(international phone calls).- 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restrictionf0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to call any number - it will be ableonly to receive phone calls.- '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there areeight "0" figures this means that no restriction has been defined for that field.- a class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a classwe have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal valuecorresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all therestrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will beadded the restrictions defined in the current class.

3.11. Table with indexes for selection of active SIM cardsIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "SIM card index table" window willappear, where a table with the 4 indexes of SIM cards is displayed. Each indexincludes information about the SIM selected for each hour interval of each dayof the week and even the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days)

To edit a SIM index double click on that index and the next window will bedisplayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, by default theinformation is displayed for "Monday".

A list is displayed with the periods (intervals) when the SIM card (1,2,3 or 4)can be used. The periods are structured in hours and minutes separated by ":"character. When the user changes the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are automatically filled with the line information:period "From" to "Until" and the active SIM card. These values can be modified

and validated by option "Mod". If user selects "Add" option a new line will beadded in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of an active SIM card are not savedin the "simindex" file. The format of the "simindex" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size.

An example of simindex file content is as follows:

#---SIM INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_sim day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min sim(%x)#---HOLYDAYS---#h holydayday holydaymons 00 1f 00:00 06:00 2s 00 17 06:00 20:00 0s 00 1f 20:00 21:30 3s 00 1f 21:30 24:00 0s 00 8 06:00 20:00 1s 00 60 00:00 24:00 0s 00 80 00:00 12:00 0s 00 80 12:00 24:00 1s 01 ff 00:00 06:00 0s 01 ff 06:00 12:00 1s 01 ff 12:00 18:00 2s 01 ff 18:00 24:00 3s 02 ff 00:00 24:00 1s 03 ff 00:00 24:00 0h 01 01h 01 01h 25 12h 08 01

Each line that specifies a sim index begins with the letter 's', then follows aSIM index number (00, 01, 02 and 03), a mask (each week day has anidentifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and aSIM card value. In the file the active sim card is written from 0 to 3. In alllocations in the "gwconfig" software values from 1 to 4 are used for SIM cards

(on GSM holders values 1,2,3 and 4 are shown).Note: if the same time periods and the same active SIM card is used ondifferent days (for the same SIM index) then instead of two records in the filewill be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an ORoperation between those days. For example "1f" is used to identify Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

Note: the records starting with 'h' character are used for holidays definition.

3.12. Defining the holidaysIn order to define the non-working days with special GSM tariffs, click on theappropriate icon (" ") to show the window named "Holidays Changing". Thiswindow shows a default list with the national holidays and you can edit thelist, add or remove non-working dates.

To add a holiday in the list click the "Add" button. Once a record has beenadded you have to double click on it in order to be available for editing, asshown in the window below.

To delete a holiday from the list, select the date from the list and click the"Del" button.

3.13. Callback TableIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "Callback table" window will appear:

Callback services assure lower costs for the mobile subscribers: from a mobilephone you just call the Topex gateway and hang up. The software checksidentity on incoming calls and if the telephone numbers are in its databasecalls them back. You don't have to pay anything for the connection! This isvery useful for mobile users in the field that have prepaid cards, which featurean expensive tariff. They can ring the Topex gateway located at headquarters,

and the equipment will call them back, put them into connection with othermobile subscriber or allow them to send e-mail messages via SMS.

Callback table is containing the following fields: "Identity", "Action","Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo".

Callback has several implementations (depending on the "Action" field whichcan take the values "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA"):- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACK" then the caller party will becalled back. The back call is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback"field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" fieldor a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number, then thecaller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACKONSMS" then the caller partywill be called back. The callback is sent to the phone number specified in"Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the"Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phonenumber then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phonenumber;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "SMSTOMAIL" then the text content of theSMS will be sent to the IP address which is specified in the field "MailTo";

- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "DISA" then a "DISA" tone will be providedto the caller part; The subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is calledback and receives DISA tone (if the field "CallTo" does not contain anotherphone number). "Direct Inward Services Access' allows the mobile subscriberto get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

To edit the "Action" field the button "..." must be pressed. The followingoptions are available "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA".

Note: Callback calls are recorded in the SMS files.

3.14. MTP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "MTP Configuration" window willappear:

In this window the signaling point (SP) definitions are performed:- "SP definition (own codes)" - this is the zone where the own (gateway)signaling points are defined. Each "SP" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each SP the "Code" and "Flag" must be set. For"Flag" a value of "1" is indicating that this node is an STP (signaling transferpoint). - "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)"- this is the zone where the adjacentsignaling points are defined. Each "Linkset" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each linkset the associated "SP" and the "Code"must be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition(own codes)" zone.- "Destinations" - this is the zone where the destinations are defined. Each"Destination (Connection ID)" is defined by enabling the appropriate checkbox"Dest" field. The first four destinations are filled based on "Linkset" definitions- "SP" and "Code" fields are completed directly if the correspondance "Linkset"is defined. User can define indirect routes using the "Priority" fields. For eachpriority, the linkset is set as follows: there are three priorities - represented as

three columns: "Priority 1", "Priority 2" and "Priority 3". Priority 0 is reservedfor the direct route between the own SP and the destination. For each priorityand for each destination, user can select one of the enabled linksets (thelinkset list is filled with the linkset values enabled in "Adjacent SP definition(LinkSet)" zone). For each destination (with a number greater than 3) theassociate "SP","Code", "Priority" and "Linkset" can be set. The SP list is filledwith the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone.

Note: the own SP code, the adjacent SP code and the nonadjacent SP codemust have the same "NI" field.

Note: the ">>" button is used for destinations from 16 to 31.

Note: the zone "Code value" is used to automatically convert a hex code usedto define a signaling point to the other known formats: "Code 2-3-8-3" and"Code NI-SP". The user must point with the mouse inside a "Code" edit field.The fields from the "Code value" zone will be filled with values . The option"Apply" is used to fill back the original "Code" edit field (an <ENTER" action onone of the fields from the "Code value" zone will cause a recalculation to beperformed).

Examples:1) to declare an own SP0 code "8b38", non-STP - check "SP0" in the "SPdefinition (own codes)" zone and then click the mouse on the edit field locatedin the right side of the "SP0" checkbox - you can directly complete the pointcode or you can edit the code value in the "Code value" computing zone. Hereyou can input the code in different formats. When you finish you press<ENTER> key and "Apply" button. You select "0" in the "Flags" field. 2) to declare an adjacent destination code (code "8103") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0- check "Linkset 0", select '0' in "SP" list and fill the point code valuewith "8103".3) to declare a non-adjacent destination code (code "8547") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0 on Connection ID 4. Select "Dest 4" checkbox, select "0" from "SP"list, complete code field and select linkset on the highest priority available box.4) to declare an indirect route (linkset 1) to an adjacent destination code"8103" (linkset 0) - select linkset 1 in the highest priority available - on therow starting with "Dest 0".

3.15. ISUP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "ISUP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "ISUP Configuration" window allows the allocation of the circuit groups (inrange from 0 to 7). - each circuit group is enabled by the option "Group x", where "x" is from 0 to6. - "Connection ID" can take values from 0 to 31. The " Connection ID" fields arecompleted in "MTP Configuration" window displayed after the user selects " "icon. - "First Port" contains the first port from a SS7 card. - "First CIC" (Circuit Identification Codes (CIC)) and "Range" are used to defineall CIC values.

The SS7 trunks can be placed on card 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6)and 33 (trunk 7). Ports for card 16 are in range 128-159, for card 17 in range160-191, for card 32 in range 256-287 and for card 33 in range 288-319. Forexample the field "First Port" must be filled with the value 256 for an SS7 cardinstalled on card 32. The range is establishing the total number of channelsfrom the field "First Port". For a single SS7 card the range field will be 32. Iftwo consecutive SS7 cards are used (for example 32 and 33) the range cantake the value "64".

3.16. VoIP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" "), the "VOIP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "VOIP Configuration" window contains two zones: "VOIP" and "H323". Thetype of protocol (H323 or SIP) is choosed from the "Protocol Type" field. Whenthe "OK" option is clicked - the OAM application will load the settings fromVoIP zone and depending upon "Protocol Type" selection - the settings fromH323 or SIP zone will be saved.

For the VoIP zone you can change the following settings:- Version: with or without RTP transcoding. Transcoding means that ourequipment performs conversion of codecs, that is the codecs used on theoutput are different from the ones used on the incoming call. For an incomingcall from VoIP that goes out also through VoIP, the RTP channel is processedby the multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES equipment and transcoding may beperformed. No transcoding means that the equipment performs VoIP signaling,but does not process the RTP channel, it goes directly from source IP todestination without going through the Topex equipment. In this casetranscoding cannot be performed.The conversion of codecs may be required if the caller uses codec g711, butthe destination supports only g728, so the Topex equipment must perfomtranscodig. But if the called party also supports g711, no transcondig is

required, and the RTP channel from the caller may be connected directly todestination.

- "PG Card IP Address" - the IP address of the processor card (PG card).Thisfield is supposed to be filled with the same value as the ones you havespecified in the "Network settings - IPADDR" (icon "Gateway Parameters").

- "VoIP Card IP Address" - the IP address of the VoIP card. There are two situations concerning the PG Card IP address and respectivelythe VoIP card IP address.1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in a LAN, then both addresses must bein the range IP addresses of that LAN. In this case the following ports must beopened if a firewall is used: the ports declared for RTP when the VoIP card wasinstalled (for example 3000-3063; to see the range of ports assigned for RTP,go to window "H323 Settings" - window which is described on the bottom ofthe window in the area called "IP Card Settings"). RTP ports are UDP and mustbe forwarded to the IP address of the VoIP card.The ports 1718, 1719 and1720 are TCP and they must be forwarded to the IP address of the processorcard (PG).2) when the PG card is using a public IP address then the VoIP card must alsouse a public IP address.

- "VoIP Card MAC" - this value represent the MAC address assigned to theVoIP card. This value is preset or is given by TOPEX.

- "Public IP Address" - when the TOPEX gateway is used inside a LAN andwhen the H323 signaling is performed with a machine from the internet, thenin this field you enter the external IP address of the LAN gateway. When H323signaling is performed with a machine located inside the same LAN, then inthis field you enter the same value as in the "VoIP Card IP Address" field.

- "IP GATEWAY MAC" - this field is filled in case of making RTP connectionsto a machine which is NOT in the same address range. This field will disappearin future developments (the MAC address will be obtained automatically in allcases, so you no longer need to fill in the value for the remote MAC).1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in the same LAN, then a program(MSPD) running on the Topex equipment automatically detects and fills theMAC of the target gateway. You will enter in the field “MSPD Parameters” thecommand “--no-gw”. This means no outside access is required. 2) when the remote VoIP gateway is on the the public IP address, then youmust first use an utility (MSPD executable) to search and find out the MAC ofthe target gateway, then you must type this MAC address in the field “IPGateway MAC”.

- “Audio Codecs”: a list of pairs <codec no><packetization time>, which areNOT delimited by commas. This is the list of codecs to be used by the RTPprotocol. VoIP uses several different codecs, having different parameters (bitrate and complexity).The codecs used by Topex EONES are coded with one ortwo digit numbers, such as 0 for g711u, 4 for g723.1, 8 for g711 or g711a, 15for g728 and 18 for g729. The packetization time is usually 20 (milliseconds), but it may be as long as 30msec or as short as 10 msec. For a specified codec, like g729, the number ofchannels supported depends of the packetization time. Increasing thepacketization time reduces the packetization overhead, so when going form 20msec to 10 msec the number of voice channels goes down form 60 to only 40.

- "Enable VAD" - this checkbox option allows the "Voice Activity Detection"facility to be used. Typical voice conversations can contain up to 35 to 50 percent silence. OnVoIP networks, both conversation and silence is packetized. VAD sends out RTPpackets only when voice is detected, thus decreasing bandwidth by 30-50 %.This way the Topex EONES will send voice packets only when it has voiceinput. When it detects silence on RTP, it will send to the other side a “silencepacket” that use less bandwidth and allows to be interpreted for generatingcomfort noise.- “LOG on MSPD” – enables logging on MSPD. The name of the log file will be“day-month-year_mspd.log”,such as 08-03-06_mspd.log

- "Port MSPD" - MSPD is a program that controls the VoIP, in this field youcan enter the number of the port to be used by MSPD, such as 9677 that is thedefault. - “RTCP” – RTP Control Protocol - This checkbox establishes if the equipmentuses or not the control protocol for RTP.The control protocol for RTP, RTCP is used for control and diagnostic on RTPsessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in theIETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintainQuality of Service . RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodicallysend each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

DTMFThis configuration area establishes the means of sending out DTMF in the RTPpackets. There are two methods, transmission of DTMF out of band in RTPpackets, or sending out INFO messages (as telephone-events). In SIP protocol,the INFO method would be used for the carrying of mid-call signalinginformation along the session signaling path (for example to send the DTMF

digits generated during a SIP session)SIP INFO method can be used by SIP network elements to transmit DTMFtones out-of-band in a reliable manner independent of the media stream. Ithas advantages of reliabilty (the tones are not affected by low-rate codecs), ofProvides DTMF tone generation for SIP requests and for Enables transport ofDTMF digits along the signaling path.The options available are:- “DTMF-RTP”: if you chek this options, you must also complete the Parametersfield to the right

- “DTMF INFO”: you select to send out DTMF tones as INFO messages- “None” : the sending of dual-tone multifrequency signals is not treated bythe Topex equipment.

Example for DTMF-RTP option: dtmfRTP 101 100 1

The syntax is : - payload type for DTMF in RTP (according to RFC 2833)- payload type for DTMF in RTP redundancy- redundancy scheme: 0 or 1, where 0=IETF and 1=AAL2

For the H323 zone the user can change:- enable "Gatekeeper" - enabling this option will allow using a gatekeeper.Type the IP address of the gatekeeper in the "Gatekeeper" field. The H323negociation will be performed by connecting at the specified gatekeeper IPaddress. If you check the "Gatekeeper" option, the fields "User", "Password"and "ID" must also be filled in. They will be used in the login procedure.

- "Prefixes" - is used to inform the gatekeeper about the digits routed by thegateway on that link. This value is the same with the "prefix" establshed in"Routing Table" to route the call on the VoIP card.

- "Trace H323" - allows the generating of an H323 log file, which will besaved on the HDD of the Topex gateway The name of the file is given bycurrent day.

- enabling "Fast Start" - this option determines the method used for codecsand voice activity detection negotiations. If the options is enabled, then bothcodecs and VAD will be negociated on call setup or on response by usingadditional parameters. When this option is disabled, then the negociation isperformed after response by using the standar H245 protocol. This negociation

will delay the start of the media session. If you enable "Fast Start”, thestarting of the session will be faster.

Examples:1) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from the same LAN.

Input data: the address of the PG card is “192.168.244.70”, the address of theVoIP card is “192.168.244.123” (MAC address “00:52:C2:40:3A:12”).Outgoing calls beginning with the prefix “0” will be routed through the “VOIP”direction to address “192.168.244.76” as shown in the next image.

PG Card IP Address – 192.168.244.70

VoIP Card IP Address –192.168.244.123

Public IP Address – 192.168.244.123(because H323 signaling is performedwith an IP address from the samerange, here is filled the same addresslike in the “Voip CARD IP address”

MSPD Parameters – “- -v –-no-gw –mem 16”. The log option is fixed andlog file is “/mnt/app/out/mspd.log”.Because the other machine is in thesame LAN the option "--no-gw" used.

Port use for communication betweenH323 and gateway main application –9010.

Codecs – “g729b,g729”

VAD – disabled

Fast Start – enabled

Gatekeeper - not used

Trace H323 – log on H323 enabled

Routing table: the gateway will route calls starting with "5" and "6" to the“VOIP” direction and H323 signaling will be started by connecting to“192.168.244.76” (remote machine).

2) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from internet.

The difference regards the “Public IP Address” which will be set with the LANgateway external address. The firewall of the LAN gateway must allow portforwarding for the ports which were already presented in this document.

3) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be filledwith the same value - meaning the external IP address of the VoIP card.

4) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case a gatekeeper is used (optiongatekeeper enabled and an IP address specified).

In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be thesame. The H323 signaling will be initiated for a call with the gatekeeper(instead of the IP address taken from the routing table). For login (identifing)to the gatekeeper field “Users”, “Password” or “ID” are used. If in routing tablethe prefix for routing calls on VoIP is “0” the in “Prefixes” field you must setalso “0”.

3.17. AlertsThis option (" ") establishes sending out the alerts, recording of ASR valuesand enables several debug and testing functions. Alerts are used in case ofalarms or if ASR values fall below a selectable level.

In case of occurrence of different pre-programmed events, the TOPEX systemcan issue warnings (alerts) and also send out a description of the events. Thealarms may be sent to the administrator of the equipment in three ways:- by e-mail (a warning message that has attached the alarm files)- by SMS- as a call on the mobile phone of the operator (several beeps)

The "Alerts" command shows the window for setting up the parameters for the

alerts:

The zone called "Alert zone" which is used to activate (enable) thetransmission of the alerts. For activate the alerts the option ("Alert activated")must be checked.

The field "ASR alert limit" is used to set a level for activating ASR alerttransmission when ASR value falls below the specified value. The ASR value isread at time interval specified in "Time period for checking". To validate theASR alert a minimum number of calls must be set. Of course, if during the

specified time period you have only one call, and it is not connected, this won'tbe relevant for ASR, so it is not taken into account.

There is the possibility to validate the type of alarms for which alerts aretransmitted: "CCS-ISDN", "ASR" and "ALL".

For testing alerts purposes you can use the field "Timer for testing alerts". Fora "0" value in this field the alerts will be sent only in real situations. Fortesting purposes a non-zero value (specyfing the number of minutes) must beused.

"DIAL alert" is used if you want the alerts to be sent via phone calls. You mustenter the phone number to be called upon alert. You may also set the numberof beeps (1,2,3 etc) to be sent out in case of alert. By means of this variablenumber of beeps an operator can determine from which TOPEX system thealert is coming from: gateway A sends one beep, gateway B send two beepsand so on.

"SMS alert" is used in case of alerts by sending a SMS message to a mobilephone. You must enter the phone number to be alerted by SMS. You can alsochange the content text of the SMS alert message. This SMS alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by pressing "File..." option to the right ofthe "SMS alert" area.

"MAIL alert" is used in case of sending e-mail alert messages to an emailaddress. In case of activation of this kind of alert the following e-mail relatedparameters must be set: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject","Server" and "Port". You also have the facility to send the alert message with the current alarm filefor the TOPEX gateway as an attachment. The text of the e-mail alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by clicking "File..." option to the right ofthe "MAIL alert" area. The following fields must not contain spaces inside thevalue: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject" and "Server";

"SMS2MAIL" - this option is used to forward all incoming SMS to an emailaddress. This option is placed here because it is working together with thesettings estabished in "MAIL alert" zone. The SMS content is sent to theaddress specified in "MailTo" field.

The "ASR Reading Parameters" zone is for establishing the ASR readingprocedure. First, to activate the ASR reading process the option "Validate ASRreading" must be checked. Then the interval (in minutes) for reading andsaving ASR values is set in "ASR read period" field. Please note that this valuemust be the same with the value entered above in the field "Time period for

checking" used for ASR alerts.

The "Debug Parameters" zone is used for the debugging process. This facility isintended to help debugging the TOPEX system: log files for the equipment arecreated and respectively displayed. If the "Validate Debug" box is checked thenall activities on ports specified in range "From" and "To" is displayed. If"Validate Saving" is also checked, this information will be saved in log files ontarget.

The "GSM" zone is used for:1)- "CELL, LEVEL and Channel" interrogation. The GSM scanning is launchedby checking the option "Validate Cell Interrogation". The "GSMScan" value isthe value in seconds at which each GSM module is searched upon cell, leveland channel. If a call is passing through a GSM module and if the "GSMScan"value is reached, the interrogation upon the mentioned values will be doneafter the call ending.2)- the reset of the "Load Sim" values - the user can enable the option"Validate Reset of Load Sim values" and specify the "Day and Time" at whichthose time of SIM using values are resetting. User will fill the time moment in"hour minut day" format. These values are separated by space character. The"Load Sim" values can be reset in each day at the specified time "hour minut"if the "day" is filled with "0". The "Load Sim" values can be reset on eachmonth at the specified time "hour minut" if the "day" is filled with the desiredday. If one of the values "hour" and "minut" are wrong then the reset will notoccur.

There are the following text limits at the fields: "ASR alert limit", "ASR readperiod", first port and last port - 3, "Time period for checking" - 4, "Minimumcalls number" - 4, "Timer for testing alerts" - 3,"Beep Number Identifier" - 2,"Gateway address","Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject" and "Server" - 40.

"Simserver zone" - is used in case of a multiACCESS/QUTEX equipment whichis working with GSM cards simserver ready. The "simserver" zone contains anactivation checkbox "Activate", the IP of the simserver and the port to connectto (default value is 13001). Finally the "Name" is the gateway identificationname, name which is also set in simserver to recognize the gateway client.

3.18. Test callsFor enabling test calls you can use the icon"Test calls" (icon " "):

In "TESTING calls" window is enabled to define call tests which can beperformed by the gateway. Test calls must be first enabled with the option"run 1" (to disable test calls a line with option "run 0" must be used). For eachtest call two parameters will be used: "pause xx" and "con yy" which representthe time period between two attempts (xx) and the time to keep the call (yy).After the record preceded by "#nr" the test calls definition follows: each linewill contains the number to be dialed, the identity of the call, the caller portand a value of 0 or 1. With value '0' in a record the number will be firstanalyzed with the definition of the direction (the direction that contains thespecified port) and after that will be analyzed according to the routing table.With a value of '1' in a record, the number will be sent out directly from theport.

For example a test record can be "12345 101 257 1". It means an outgoingcall with number '12345" and identity "101' is sent on port 257.

Note1) a good method for testing calls and to analyse the routing process is toadd a subscriber card and to add a record in the "TESTING calls" window withan installed port from the subscriber card (that port must have also the optionof making calls). For example if the card 15 is a subscriber card then a recordfor port "120" will be:"0700000000 120 120 0"Note2) for making test calls on E1 trunks or GSM cards an example was givingbefore:

"12345 101 257 1",For sending the number digit by digit a value "0000" must be used to fill the"Signaling" field for the direction that contains the test port.Note3) test calls are very useful in finding the available number of GSMchannels. Test calls are simultaneously generated towards the vocalmessaging. After the test calls sequence is started, the number of connectedcalls can be observed by using "Live monitoring" facility.

Moreover a new method can be use to generate non-simultaneously calls - thetime delay between attempts and the time for keeping the calls connected wasthe same for all test calls from the list. This new method allows the user tocreate a list of test calls in order to have variable time delays between them.Also, not all calls from the list are launched at the same time.

This new method includes the following parameters: (the lines beginning with"#" are comments, used just to show you the structure of commands for testcalls):#traffic_run 1/0 nr_simultaneous_calls(max 4 calls) call_typetraffic_run 0 1 test#traffic_idle t_idle(seconds of idle time betwen calls) rand_add(random addedseconds)traffic_idle 10 5#traffic_sel t_sel(seconds of selection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_sel 5 3#traffic_con t_con(seconds of connection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_con 1 2#traffic_call nr id#traffic_call 5113 100traffic_call 5112 100traffic_call 5777 100

You must notice that each line contains the prefix "traffic_" concatenated with"run", "idle", "sel" ,"con’ and "call". In order for this new method to work, theuser must create a direction with the name "SENDCALL" (icon "DirectionsNames"). The "Type" field must be completed with "DIR" in "Calls directions".All those test calls are generated from this fictive direction "SENDCALL".

- "traffic_run 0 1 test" – to disable this second method for launching calls: youcan type "0" after "traffic_run". To enable the method – you must type "1".

The second number specified in this line is the number of test calls that can begenerated at the same time (in the example above it is "1"). The list with the

test calls is described by the lines beginning with "trafic_call".

The "test" word is used to specify the tonality heard by the called part (in thiscase a flashing tone).

- "traffic_idle 10 5" – specifies the time to wait before to launch a new testcall. The first digit (in this case 10) means the number of seconds to wait. Tothis value you may add the next value (it can be present or not ) which meansa range for a random value. The random number can be between zero andthat value. In the above example, the random range of five means that therandom value is between 0 and 5. Consequently, the waiting time will getrandom values between 10 (10+0) and 15 (10+5).

- "traffic_sel 5 3 " – specifies the value used to simulate the selection time fortest calls. Here also the first digit (in this case 5) means the starting numberof seconds to simulate the selection time. To this start value may be added thenext digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,three means a random value between 0 and 3. Thus the number used tosimulate the selection time for test calls will have get random values between5 (5+0) and 8 (5+3).

- "traffic_con 1 2" – specifies the value used to simulate the conversation timefor test calls. The first digit (in this case 1) means the starting number ofseconds to simulate the conversation time. To this start value may be addedthe next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,two means a random value between 0 and 2. Hence, the value used tosimulate the duration of the test calls will take random values between 1(1+0) and 3 (1+2)

- "traffic_call nr id" – specifies the number("nr") to be dialed and the identify("id")

3.19. Transferring filesYou can transfer files from and into the TOPEX gateway.By choosing the associated icon (" ") , a window for file exchange will bedisplayed.

The left panel ("Gateway Files - current") shows up the structure of files andfolders from the system associated directory.You will see directories named "Alarms","Billing","Activity","Log" and "Viewer".

You can change between those directories and the root directory of theconnected system.

The right panel of the window ("Gateway files") shows the files and foldersstructure located on the TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateway that isconnected to the PC. Directory content ("bin" directory) of gateway files isautomatic downloaded. On the gateway you can consult three directories "bin"(where is located the telephony application), "cfg" (where the configurationfiles are stored) and "out" (where system makes files for alarms, billing andmonitoring (activity)). You may navigate through these directories of the rightpanel by double clicking.

When you want to download a file from gateway you enter in the directoryfrom which you want to make download. You choose a file. The file isdownloaded (you have a progress indication) on to the OAM computer.

It is mandatory to download files to appropriate destination: alarms (*.alrformat) and asr (*.asr format) in "Alarms", billing (*.tax format) in "Billing"and activity (*.mon format) in "Activity". If you want to view a text file youcan download it to "Viewer" folder. Options from tree commands "Alarms","Billing" and "Activity" are working with files with the previous extensions.

Automatic file transfer is allowed in connection state. You click on the "AutoDownloading Files" icon button (" ") to show the window called "DownloadFiles From Gateway".

The purpose of the automatc file transfer is to generate automatically requestsfor billing, alarms, activity, ASR and SMS files on the selected time interval.The finalization mode for each downloaded file will be either "ERROR" or "OK".The files are automatically saved in directories according to their type. Thedefault value for the time interval is the current day.

The option "Download Billing Records (for today) starting with hour: " is usedto download the records which are started with the specified hour from thebilling current day file. The specified hour may be changed. The option "Download Billing Records (for today) last: 100 (records)" is used todownload last 100 records from the billing current day file. The number of lastrecords to be downloaded may be changed. For one of these last two options (which cannot be set in the same time) theresulted billing records will be automatically displayed.

3.20. Clean HDD SpaceThis option (" ") allows you to delete files from the TOPEX system. This can beneeded if the equipment has been in use for a long time and has stored manylarge files on the hard disk. You may want to delete the older or not importantfiles to make room for new files. You must choose the associated icon ("Clean HDD Space").The window "Deleting Files From Gateway" allows you to choose a time period

and the type of files to be deleted. The type of files can be:- billing files (extension "*.tax")- alarms files (extension "*.alr") - activity files (extension "*.mon")- ASR files (extension "*.asr") - SMS files (extension "*.sms")- log files (extension "*.log"); these files are created by the gatewayapplication when "Validate Debug" and "Validate Saving to File" are checked in"Parameters for ALERTING" window (icon option " "). Informations that aresaved in this kind of files is about the port activity for all ports in range "From"until "To", values which are specified in the same window for defining alerts.- status files (extension "*.sta"); these files are used to store the state for allports (by state of a port we are meaning uninstalled, free, busy or alarm).These files are used by the web application.

By pressing "OK" option the requests for deleting files are sent to the gateway.The process of deleting the files can be observed in a listbox which is displayedin the "Deleting Files From Gateway". At the end of deleting process a requestfor reading HDD occupied space is sent to the gateway. The indicator of theHDD space from the status bar will be changed if the occupied HDD space waschanged on the gateway.

3.21. File EditorThis option (" ") allows you to edit the configuration (.txt) files that can beloaded later into the TOPEX system. You must choose the associated icon ("FileEditor").

The first window "File Editor Selection" allows you to navigate through thesubdirectories structure in the system root folder.

From this window you choose the text file to edit, then a new dialog windowwill show up, with the content of the file. The selection is done by doubleclicking on the name of the file, so there is no need for an "OK" button - thiswindow has only a "Cancel" button at the bottom.

There is a limit for the size of files to be edited, they should not be over65,535 bytes in length.

File content is saved by "Save" option.

3.22. Loading hourYou can upload the time into the TOPEX system. When you click on the icon ("

") for loading hour a dialog box will appear in which you can change also thecomputer time. Loading hour is very important because you modify thegateway clock: time and date. So this action is protected by password. Thispassword is always "topex".

The default value shown is the date and time that are set on the computerwhere the OAM program is running. Before sending the time to the system,the program performs a validity check, so if you enter for the time and datevalues that are not valid you will receive an error message: 'Error in changinghour'.

3.23. Automatic download of alarms and ASRAllows auto-download of alarms and ASR info from all of the TOPEX systemsthat are connected (with IP communication). The icon command (" ") is"Automatic Requests". When you click it, the OAM program will automaticallylaunch (at pre-established time intervals) interrogation requests for theinstalled TOPEX systems. The requests may be about alarmed modules andabout ASR value (both general and instantaneous). This is very useful whenyou have several TOPEX gateways, because you no longer need to manuallyconnect to each one and ask it for the alarms and ASR information.

You must set a "Period" (in seconds) for the interrogation cycle of all TOPEXsystems that are connected. The values must be greater or at least equal to 60seconds.Then you select a threshold for the ASR value: when the general orinstantaneous value is under the established level, the value is shown in awindow (called "ASR"). By double-clicking with left mouse button a statistic isshown with the last 24 values for general and instantaneous ASR (for thesystem which is currently in process of automatic interrogation).

The "ALARMS Alert " panel of the Automatic Requests window allows you toselect different kind of alarms. When these alarms occur in the TOPEX system,they will be shown and stored.

When the interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown inthe dialog window title, as you see in the first image. After you have selectedthe types of alarms, you may press either "Start" or "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed at any moment byselecting "Change" value.

When interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown in thedialog window title. Valid options are "Start" and "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed whenever bychoosing "Change" value. When automatic interrogation process is started onthe status bar in the first box (leftmost) the following text will appear: "AUTOREQUEST ACTIVATED in xxx !!!" where "xxx" is the number of seconds untilthe interrogation request will be made.

When interrogation process is started the text "STARTED" is shown in thedialog box title. Valid options are "Stop" for canceling the interrogationprocedure, "Change" for changing parameters and "Cancel". There is also"View" option for displaying a statistics with the last 24 values forinstantaneous ASR (for the TOPEX systems which are in process of automaticinterrogation).

When the specified period expires the request for system interrogation will belaunched. On status bar will be displayed the text "AUTO REQUEST INPROGRESS !!!". In the next box to the right side all messages will be enclosedby the system name (connection name).(For example "cfg_GSM")

During the automatic interrogation procedure it is allowed to connect to asystem only if the OAM software is in a pause between two interrogations. Inthe contrary case it is allowed to stop the automatic procedure which is inprocess (when in the status bar is written "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS !!!")by selecting the "Disconnect" command from any of the systems. Then theOAM program will again wait for the established time period before issuingautomatic requests for interrogation.

Notes:

- normally if you have connected to a TOPEX system you can perform"Disconnect" only from that system. But when in automatic request mode, the"Disconnect" command may be sent from any system!- If the connection is broken with "Disconnect" command, only the ASR andalarms that have already been scanned will be downloaded.

3.24. GSM Reprogramming

This reset command (" ") is useful in situations when there is need to refreshthe settings for all the GSM modules. This GSM refresh must be issued to allow the proper setting of the receiving orsending of the identity through GSM modules and also the setting of the audiolevel.

There is a confirmation message which is requested to the user, before to startthe reprogramming procedure.

3.25. Halt and Reboot commandsThose two commands are similar to the LINUX commands. First commandHALTS (" ")(stops) the machine and the second REBOOT (" ") the machine.After HALT command, the TOPEX system may be safely disconnect from thepower supply. Incorrect shut down of the equipment may cause damage of thefile system and other problems such as a large delay in startup due to the filesystem check.

3.26. Visualization ListThe icon " " display a visualization window with the settings of all ports(rights, number, target, direction, SIM index regarding type of port).

The list is build in physical order of ports starting with 000.

In the picture above it can be seen GSM positions for which are given thefollowing settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT',direction, SIM index, target, Pin1,Pin2, Pin3 and Pin4 values. Also it can be seen ISDN channels settings:'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT' and direction.

By using the 'FIND' and 'NEXT' buttons you may search for a text string in thiswindow.

4. Print options

In all situations involving a print command a dialog box will appear. It willcontains two options:

- print to printer (a printer must be installed into system)

- print to file (in this situation a file name will be given for saving data)

5. NOTE

There are two types of windows used. There is a window for viewing filescontent and another window for viewing or modifying system configuration.When we are working with files content we can operate on the tree commandsfor the chosen system and when we are finishing we press the right button and

hide the window. If we are working viewing a configuration we can hide it bypressing right button. If you are connected and the configuration window isabove by pressing right button you are questioning if you want to disconnect.

At the right side of the status bar there is an indicator for connection: it is bluewhen we are connected to a system and it is red when we are not connected toany system.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - CONNECT...

1. Connecting steps

First click on the Connect… property and wait until the connection with theremote TOPEX system is established.

A dialog window will appear after the connection was successfully established.The login procedure on the remote equipment will follow.

A dialog box will appear and in case of connection successfully established theOAM program tries to download the configuration information, as follows:· File with information about the installed cards ("card.cfg");· File with information about the port settings ("port.cfg");. File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.cfg");· File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg");· File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin");· File with information about pin codes on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("pin.cfg");· File with information about loading on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("loadsim.bin");· File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces("tmaxsim.bin");· File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation toLeast Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg");· Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting andprogramming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg");

· File with information concerning the parameters used for communicationbetween a Topex gateway and the "gwconfig" application, and the parametersused for debug purposes ("exec.cfg");· File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg");· Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC(circuit identification codes) allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files usedin case of SS7 card presence;- Files used for VOIP-H323/SIP configuration: "voip.cfg" and "h323.cfg" and"sip_pbx.cfg".

There are progress indicators for all of these files. All these files create agateway configuration. The "gwconfig" application allows the user to save agateway configuration into a separate location (directory). Then you can edit(modify) this configuration and later upload it to one or more TOPEX gateways.

There are a few situations that can occurr while attempting to connect:

1.The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to a system. If it can'tconnect at the fourth retry it displays the following error message: "PassingConnection Retry Error".

2. In the case of passing fourth attempts for login the following error messagewill appear: "Passing Authentication Retry Error". User will not be able toview or modify system configuration.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of theconfiguration files, it displays the following error message:"Downloading Configuration Failed". User will not be able to view or modify

system configuration.

4. If the dialog process between system and OAM computer falls (up to anumber of consecutive errors) a "Passing LAPD Retry Error" messageoccurs.

5. If connection breaks down (because of IP) during the configurationdownloading process or during the connected state, a "Connection Lost"message appears.

You can only connect to one TOPEX system at a time. So if you want toconnect to another system, you must first disconnect from the previous one.

Please note that there are two types of windows used by the program. There isone window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewingand changing the configuration (settings) of the Topex systems. When youwork with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands fromthe tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mousebutton you will be able to hide the window. If you work (change or view) witha certain configuration, this can be hidden using the right mouse button. If theOAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clickingwith the right mouse button over the status bar, you will make pop up awindow with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

Note: - In order to allow additional facilities, the application may also be launchedtogether with the following parameters:1) The OAM software includes a protection against starting more then oneinstance. If it is necessary to start the software more then one time, youshould use the following command to start the software: "gwconfig.exe -d"or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several Topexgateways.2) Parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administrationprogram to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a spacedelimiter and the three following fields: identification name for the remotesystem, user name and password (to allow automated log-in).For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>".In case of redundancy when the password is not explicity requested - thisparameter ("-c") must be used to provide the username/password to connectto each processor card.3) Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of date. Theinformation saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, livemonitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and

signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S"4) There are situations in which the configuration contains files with largedimensions and the process of downloading is taking too much time. In such asituation the "z" parameter must be used in order to compress and transferfrom and to proccesor card the compressed files.

All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

Note: if another user is connected at the same time with the "gwconfig"software from another PC, when you try to access the Topex gateway you getthe following error message:

This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to thatgateway has already been accepted.

5) in case of TOPEX equipment with redundancy (multiswitch or EONES) - theapplication is connecting to each processor card but the configuration is notautomatically downloaded like in a normal case. During the system setup - theuser connects to each processor card and downloads the current systemconfiguration - - Downloading Configuration. Every change made from OAMwill be done on both processors in the same time. If one processor card ischanged - then the current configuration can be send through the upload icon:

- Upload Configuration

2. Configuration modifier

Once the configuration files are downloaded, in the right side a "ModifyConfiguration" window will be displayed. In this window you can view andchange the current configuration (settings) of the equipment.

In the previous image (valid for multiACCESS/QUTEX equipments) you willnotice:- a menu bar with names such as "Systems", "Facilities", "About", "Help" and"Exit";- underneath, a toolbar with different buttons marked with icons;- to the left, the tree-like structure of installed gateways;- the right panel, blue, which is the main window;- in the upper corner, the flags for selecting the language;

The previous image is different for an EONES equipment. The EONES systemcan contains up to 11 digital boards. On the OAM pane the EONES structure isdivided on succesive screens, with three slots each. Every slot may hold a 2E1

trunk or a VoIP card. The main difference between multiACCESS/QUTEX OAMpanel and the EONES panel are the navigation arrows that allows you to gofrom one configuration screen to another - arrows which are located on thebottom right zone of the OAM pane.

Note: there is also a situation when an TOPEX EONES is slave of another

TOPEX - case in which there will be 22 E1 or VoIP slots. For example you canhave a multiswitch master with an EONES slave.

At the bottom of the screen (bottom left corner) thereare left and right navigation arrows. These arrows allowsyou to go from one group of three slots to the nextone or to go back

.

Types of boards:

S

AnalogueSubscriber board8 ports (FXScard)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

GGSM/UMTS/CDMAmodules board 2ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

PPBX junctionsboard 8 ports(FXO card)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

E E&M junctionsboard 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

B BL phones board8 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

RG Radio board 4ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

NT/TE ISDN-BRI boardwith 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

D E1R2 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

IE1ISDN-PRIboard (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

T E1SS7 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

R E1R1 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

V

VOIP card - withH323 or SIPprotocol (8,16,32or 64 channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

For multiACCESS/QUTEX systems, the configuration window is divided intothree distinct areas:

- Port status: the analog boards ports (subscriber (FXS), GSM, PBX (FXO),E&M and BL) are viewed;- Trunk status: the E1 trunks or VOIP channels are viewed;- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

For EONES/multiswitch systems, the configuration window is divided into twodistinct areas:- the area with SLOTs - on each succesive screen - the OAM pane displayshree slots. Every slot may hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card; The middle of thescreen shows groups of three slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on,up to “9,10,11”. You may install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP)in an EONES system, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. For the case of an EONES slave - the total number of slots will be 22.For the multiswitch system - if RTP proxy is needed - for example in case ofSIP users behind NAT - then a VoIP card will be declared (but not physicallypresent). Otherwise - the configuration can be empty. If transcoding is neededthen a TOPEX multiaccess or QUTEX equipped with a VoIP card will be declaredas slave to the softswitch configuration.- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

If a SS7 card is present into the gateway configuration then another zone willshow up on the panel: "Remote SP accessibility".

2.1. PORT STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)- In the Port Status area each column represents an analog board physicallyinstalled in the rack of the equipment. You can have maximum 16 boards formultiACCESS equipment (128 ports) or 5 boards for QUTEX equipment (40ports). Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter(character) followed by a three digit number. The letter is an identifier for thetype of board (Ex. the GSM modules boards feature the letter „G"). Thenumber that follows the letter is the port position. Each rectangle also includesunder the port value a text which corresponds to the direction name to whichthe port is allocated (this text is limited to 6 characters).

- Port representation is from right to left and on a card from up to down(position on a card from 0 to 7).

- For a GSM/UMTS/CDMA board the number which follows the "G" character iscalculated by multiplying the card number (the number which is written underthe rectangle with the card representation) with 8 and adding the position onthe board. For example GSM module "G040" is located on card 5 at firstposition (5*8+0=40). Module "G041" is located on card 5 at second position(5*8+1=41). The rule applied is number of card * 8 + position on the board.

- The port representation is changing when the user selects the icon "Statusmonitoring" in a connecting state. Then the color used to display each port ischanging according to the port status: used port- white color, port in alarm -red color, invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" fieldnot set or card error) and available port - dark blue. A detailed explanationwill be presented later in this chapter ("Monitoring"). For a GSM module it willbe presented in case of a registered SIM, the active SIM card (in the nextexample is the first SIM).

- example of a GSM module displayed in dark blue color which is placedon direction "GSM". The active SIM card on the "032" module is "1".If the GSM module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) thenafter the port position and a line character it is presented a value from 0 to 5which describes the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position.

- example of a GSM module displayed in red color with the cause of error"2" meaning "no physical SIM".

- Each port from each card can be individually configured by clicking with leftmouse button on corresponding port.

- Depending on port type different parameters may be set:

Port type Category Direction Number Restriction HuntingGroup

PickupGroup Target SIM

IndexS(Subscriber)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (for "BC"settled)

NO

G (GSM) YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES

P (JPABX) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

E (E&M) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

B (BL) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO

2.2. TRUNK STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)

- By default, only one digital card (2E1 or VOIP) can be used in a TOPEXmultiACCESS or QUTEX gateway. For a multiACCESS system: it must be inserted on position to the right of thePG (Processor Card); According, in the "Trunk Status" window only two Trunkrectangles can be filled with channels (if they were declared), the other twowill be empty (like in the next image); Upon customer's request, the backplaneof the multiACCESS gateway can be modified to accomodate two digital cards(2E1 or VOIP); for example you can have two 2E1 cards ore one 2E1 card andone VOIP card. They will be inserted on positions to the left and to the right ofPG. In this case, on the screen in the "Trunk Status" area all four rectanglescan be filled with channels. Older versions of the multiACCESS used 1E1 cards,

that is the E1 board had a single E1 interface. Consequently, on older TOPEXgateways you may use by default only one E1 trunk - placed on position to theright of PG. If you replace the old 1E1 card with a 2E1 card, you may have twoE1 interfaces. The maximum number of E1 interfaces which can be installed ina TOPEX multiACCESS is four and this is the reason why in "Trunk Status"zone the representation contains four E1 trunks.

For a QUTEX system: QUTEX allows you to use up to 3 cards of 2E1. thenumber of 2E1 cards that can be used in the front side of the equipment isconfigured only by the manufacturer.- if you use 3 cards of 2E1 is important to know that the equipment cannot beequipped with VoIP cards or other subscriber cards. In this case the maximumnumber of E1 interfaces which can be installed in a TOPEX QUTEX is sixth andthis is the reason why in "Trunk Status" zone the representation contains sixthE1 trunks.- If you use only a single 2E1 card - you can install it on the back side ofQUTEX equipment (near the processor card). The other 5 cards positions canbe filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use two 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side and the otheron the front side on the first slot from the base. The other 4 cards positionscan be filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use three 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side, and theothers on the front side on the first slot and on the last slot- If you are using a VoIP card - the VoIP card will be always fixed between thepower supply card and the processor card. Additional 2E1 card can be installedon the front side of the QUTEX equipment.- for a QUTEX system - the user must be aware about the number of availablecard positions (for FXS, FXO, GSM and ISDN-BRI)- positions from 0 to 4 can beavailable in case when just a 2E1 card or a VoIP card is installed. If another2E1 card is used then just positions from 0 to 3 are available.

2.3. SLOT STATUS (EONES/multiswitch)

You can have maximum 11 digital boards on an EONES equipment. Every slotmay hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card. The middle of the screen shows groups ofthree slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on, up to “9,10,11”. Youmay install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP) in an EONESsystem, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. The alarms for the respective E1 boards are also shown as rectangles withcorresponding names: LIS, AIS, LFA, RJA, BER, etc. The color of theserectangles turns to red in case of emergence of an alarm.

2.4.1. E1 card

- The E1 representation of an E1 trunk features on the first two rows thechannels. For each channel, the type of the E1 interface is shown as a smallrectangle marked with a letter, followed by a two-figure number - the numberof the channel. The third row includes representation of the alarm buttons.Each alarm button is marked with an abbreviation for the type of alarm itrepresents, as described in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal

AIS Alarm of Indication Signal

LFA Loss of Frame Alignment

RJA Remote of Junction Alarm

LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment (not foran IDSN or SS7 interface)

RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm (not for anIDSN or SS7 interface)

BER Bit error rate

- Code representation used on drawing the E1 channels:

D E1R2 trunk channel (32positions on a E1 trunk)

I E1ISDN trunk channel ISDN(32 positions)

T E1SS7 (32 positions)

R E1R1 (32 positions)

- Each channel from each E1 interface can be individually configured byclicking with left mouse button on the corresponding channel. For eachchannel the "Category" and the "Direction" parameters can be settled.

-Up to four E1 trunks can be represented. -In the following picture an E1 - SS7 interface (letter "T") and an E1 - ISDNinterface (letter "I") are displayed.

- The indication "SC" is used to highlight the signaling channel.

- In the previous representation with the E1 trunks, the card number isdisplayed in the right side of each trunk. The trunks can be placed on card 16(trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7). - In case of a 2E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is32 (this means that the first E1 interface is located on position 32 and thenext interface is located on position 33). The position on the left side of theprocessor card is 16 (this means that the first E1 interface is located onposition 16 and the next interface is located on position 17).- In case of a E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is 32and the position on the left side of the processor card is 33.

2.4.2. VOIP card

- The VOIP card representation features four rows, each with 16 channels.The total number of channels is 64 (compressed voice channels). For eachchannel, the type of the VOIP card is shown as a small rectangle marked witha letter, followed by a two-figure number - the number of the channel.Depending on customer needs, the VoIP card can be delivered with 8,16,32 or64 channels.

- letter 'V' is used for code representation for drawing the VOIP channels:

- A VOIP card is used instead of a 2E1 board; it can be inserted in the rack ofthe gateway on card positions 16 or 32. The protocols supported are H232 andSIP. The codecs used are G711, G723, G728, G729. Please note that the firsttwo channels on the VoIP card ("V00" and "V01") can't be used as valid voicechannels.

2.5. CARD STATUS

In the area "Card status" of the window, the first row is a representation of thestatus of the boards installed in the cabinet of the equipment. Each board isshown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the 19"rack.(from right to left). The current status of the board is shown by its color.The second row shows the status of the E1 trunk board: cards 16,17, 32 and33.

2.6. LinkStatus & REMOTE SP ACCESSIBILITY

This zone is displayed only if a SS7 card is present into the gatewaymultiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES configuration. This zone is a representation ofthe accessibility of the remote (adjacent or non-adjacent) signaling points.The TOPEX gateway can handle connections to maximum 32 signaling points(SP) which are represented by boxes with values from 00 to 31. Values from 0to 11 are used for adjacent signaling points and values from 4 to 31 for non-

adjacent signaling points.

The used colors in displaying the "Remote SP accessibility" bar are:- connection to a SP not installed - light blue - connection to a SP installed - dark blue. The information regarding theinstalled SP connections is reading from the "MTP Configuration" file (" ") -the enabled routes (option "Route x" where x is from 0 to 31).- connection error (alarm) to a SP installed - red. This information is reread ateach 60 seconds.

On the EONES system - the "LinkStatus & Remote SP Accessibility" zone isdisplayed on the last OAM pane screen - the screen which contains the lastthree EONES slots (9,10 and 11)

2.7. EONES - structure of slots

For EONES equipment - the type of each slot is declared in the bottom side ofthe screen using the " " icon. As you can notice in the next picture, there isa list with all slots (named "PG"), slots starting from 0 to 11. The "Type" ofeach slot is 'E1' for E1 cards, 'VoIP' for VoIP card and 'Not Used' for slotunused.

For softswitch and for configuration with EONES slave - the ">>" button willbe used to navigate to slots 12-23.

The "IP Remote" and "Port Remote" are not used in EONES configuration - areused in master-slave configuration. The "Rez1" and "Rez2" fields are keepedfor further developments.

The "IP Private VoIP" and "IP Public VoIP" fields are used for EONES andrepresent the VoIP private IP - the VoIP IP card and VoIP public IP. For VoIPslots a new line must be filled - the corresponding "VoIPx" line. For examplethe next line corresponds to slot 0 and contents the processor card address -192.168.161.3, the MSPD port - 9677 (for the next VoIP card it will be used9675, 9673, 9671 and so on). It follows the gateway MAC behind which theEONES is located (it is the same for all EONES VoIP card) and the VoIP MACcard.voip 0 2 192.168.161.3 9677 fork /mnt/app/bin/mspd -p 9677 --trace-cmd -v--mem 16 --gw-mac 00:48:54:1A:D2:8D -m 00:52:C2:40:3E:40192.168.244.150 --log /mnt/app/out/%d-%m-%y_mspd.log -

Please notice that in case of EONES - the VoIP configuration is performed hereon "PG configuration" - slot configuration. On "VOIP Configuration" window -the "PG Card IP Address", "VoIP Card IP Address", "Public IP Address", "VoIPCard MAC" and "IP GATEWAY MAC" will be empty.

The "RTP_IP" button is used to fill the IP used in RTP packets. This value canbe different if the TOPOX equipment has more then one ethernet interfaces.

3. Changes available by icons

3.1. Downloading Configuration

This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor card fromwhich the configuration is downloading:

The configuration is downloaded from the selected processor card.

When the configuration is downloaded - the next window appears asking fortaking over the new configuration. If the answer is yes - then the

configuration will be displayed in the OAM panel.

I

3.2. Uploading ConfigurationThis option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor/processorcars to which the configuration will be uploaded:

Once the processor card is selected the uploading process is started.

The confirmation message for succesfully uploaded is "The new configurationhas been uploaded!". If an error occurs the message will be "Uploadingconfiguration Failed".

3.3. Save Current Configuration

A configuration is the collection of files which are downloaded from a gatewayduring the connection progress. These files describe the mode of working for aTOPEX gateway. The "Save Current Configuration" (icon " ") may be use onlyin a state of connection between the "gwconfig" application and a gateway.

The next image is displayed allowing the user to type the "ConfigurationName":

After the validation of button "Save" a new item will appear in the tree windowlocated in the left side of the application panel. The name which was typed inthe "Enter Configuration Name" will be presented together with characters"viz". Note:the gateways to which the user is able to make connections will havecharacters "cfg" before the gateway identification name.

There are two possible options for a saved configuration:- "Edit" - this option will display the saved configuration in the same manneras for a connected gateway. The user is able to make changes. All settings arepreserved when the user choose the "Close" option.- "Close" - this is the option to close the "Edit" configuration mode. Click "OK"to hide the configuration window.

3.4. Upload Edited ConfigurationThis option is used in a state of connection between "gwconfig" application anda gateway. The icon " " is used to launch the uploading process. First step is

to select in "Uploading CONFIGURATIONS" the desired configuration to beupload. All available configurations are displayed in a list. The user must selecta configuration then press the button "Loading".

The uploading process is started. The progress of gateway uploading may befollowed in the "Uploading configuration" window.

A confirmation message is displayed when the uploading process has ended.

The "gwconfig" software will display on the screen the new configuration. Theconfiguration is used also by the gateway main application.

3.5. Gateway ParametersBy clicking the "Gateway Parameters" icon (" ") a window for editing severalgateway parameters is shown. These parameters are regarding IP address,firewall, serial connectivity and IP connectivity with "gwconfig" software,debug, syslog and SNMP messages to be generated by Topex gateway.

Network settings - this zone allows the user to change the IP address of thegateway (in the image the record started by "IPADDR"). Also the user maychange the netmask (line started by "NETMASK") and the gateway address(line started by "GATEWAY"). A line which is started with "#" character will benot taken into account. The gateway must be restarted after one parameterfrom the "Network settings" was changed. The icon used for restarting thegateway is " ".

Connection zone: these settings are related to the serial connectivity and IPconnectivity of the TOPEX equipment with the "gwconfig" software. Thecommand "Parameters" located in the "gwconfig" software is related to the PCcommunication parameters. The parameters set for the gateway mustcorrespond to those established for the OAM program.

Serial Speed - the value is used for serial communication between OAMprogram and the software of the gateway. Allowed values are 0 (it meansunused port and must be set when you want to install a dialup server on thegateway), 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (default value);

Serial Port num - specifies the number of the serial port on the gateway to beused for serial connection with OAM software. Allowed values are 1 or 2 andthe default is 1 (COM1);

IP Port num - the port used for IP connectivity; the default value is 9009. Ifthis value is changed from OAM software, then the connection will beimmediately lost. You must have the same port number established both in theOAM program and in the software running on the TOPEX gateway. Afterperforming a reset, the OAM software will be able to connect to the gatewayusing the new value of IP Port.

Firewall - in this edit zone - user can add incoming firewall rules. Each linefrom the edit zone must contain three fields. - first field is the connection type ("tcp" or "udp");- next the IP address follows - it represents the IP address from which theconnection to the port specified in the third field is allowed. - third field represents the port on which the connection is accepted.

For example "tcp 192.168.1.6 22" means that a TCP connection is accepted onport 22 (SSH port) from "192.168.1.6" address.

To enable firewall protection you must uncomment some lines of theconfiguration file.For this, remove the "#" character from the beginning of these lines:"LAN=ppp0", "WAN=eth0" "USE_FIREWALL=yes"

After this operation is done, you must reboot the gateway for the newsettings to take effect.

Attention!Be careful when you use the embedded firewall. If the firewall protectionis started without the of presence of valid lines in the "Firewall settings", thenthe Topex gateway will be no longer reachable from IP. In that case, the onlysolution for accessing the gateway is to use the serial connection via the COM2port of the PG card. Use this serial connection to fix the firewall settings, thenyou will be able again to access the gateway via IP.

Debug

Activate 'log' file - when the option is checked the debug messages will begenerated in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. These debug files have

extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy).

db_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages will be shown inthe debug log of the TOPEX gateway.

db_cfg - when the option is checked any changes on gateway configuration willbe shown in the gateway debug log.

- the option sets the debug mask that establishes for which subjects will begenerated debug logs. The items that may be recorded in the logs are: "PortActivity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM". To edit the "DebugMask" field, the button "..." must be pressed. Then the "Computing DebugOptions" window will be displayed.

- "Port Activity" option is used to generate debug records for all ports of theTOPEX gateway;- "ComCCS" is used to generate debug records for communication with theISDN and SS7 applications;- "SOmes" is used to debug the main application which is running on theTOPEX gateway;- "comUNIX" is used to debug the commands which are received from the webserver;- "comOAM" is used to debug the communication with OAM software.

Here you just check the boxes for the options you need to generate debuginformation.

Samples of messages from a debug log of a TOPEX gateway:

If option "db_alarms" was set then messages preceeded by "RUN" will appearin the debug file:RUN Com Err cd f cat 43 (this is an alarm message on card 'f' which is cardnumber 15 from the gateway) RUN Com Err cd 10 cat 4003 (this is an alarm message on card '10' which iscard number 16 from the gateway)RUN NLIS 4 (LIS error on card 32)RUN NLFA 4 (LFA error on card 32)RUN NAIS 4 (AIS error on card 32)RUN NRJA 4 (RJA error on card 32)

If option "db_cfg" was set then messages preceeded by "CFG" will appear inthe debug file:CFG Open for read ../cfg/trafic.cfgCFG Alarm run 0 ASRalarm 80 timeasr 12(min) nr min calls 1 alarmmask 0timetest 0CFG Save ASR at 30 minCFG Debug 1 Pstart 0 Pstop 320 SaveFile 1 CFG Trafic run 0CFG Trafic idle time 5CFG Trafic seize time 30CFG GEN TRAFFIC CALL 0 1234567891108 120 port 257 mod 0. Thesemessages contains operations performed over the configuration files.

If option "Port Activity" is validated in the creation of debug file then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:00257 7235150 pid 1 E1CCSidle ACTIV channel 100257 7235150 Digits 1234567891108 Ident 12000257 7235200 Route N 123456 ... NT 123456 ... RxT 900000257 7235200 Dialdig M_CALL len 3000258 7235200 pid 2 E1CCSidle CALL mod 1 mycat 540f b_pid 1 prtb 101param 000258 7235200 Digits Ident 12000257 7235250 Dialdig ACK_CALL->Dialdest00257 7250250 Dialdest TimeOut00258 7250250 E1CCSackout TimeOut|CANCEL ->BUSY. In this casemessages were generated for ports 257 and 258.

If option "SOmes" was validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "GEN" will appear in the debug file: GEN COADA 6 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:19:10 SysDay 2

GEN Run60sec 6872131 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:20:11 SysDay 2GEN Run60sec 6465996 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN COADA 5 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0

If option "comOAM" is validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:OAM ADD CARD 16 CAT 4003 (this is a message which indicates that the card16 was added to the gateway. Value "4003" is a category which describes thetype of card.)

Syslog - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") the debugmessages can be sent to a selected IP address. This Syslog is an UNIX-like filefeature that allows logging of debug messages and sending them to a remotemachine. The destination IP address is written on target in the file"/etc/syslog.conf". All logged messages will contain the identification of thegateway (you enter the identification in the field "Equipment IP").

The type of syslog messages is chosen from the "Facility" list: "LOG_USER","LOG_LOCAL0", "LOG_LOCAL1", "LOG_LOCAL2", "LOG_LOCAL3","LOG_LOCAL4", "LOG_LOCAL5", "LOG_LOCAL6" and "LOG_LOCAL7".

syslog_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages are sent tothe syslog destination;

syslog_cfg - when the option is checked then any changes made upon gatewayconfiguration will be also sent to the syslog destination;

Syslog mask - is similar to debug mask. This option establishes for which item("Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM") the syslogmessage will be generated. Click on "..." button and the next window showsup, allowing you to select the items which will be included in the syslog.

SNMP - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") alarms canbe sent as traps to a selected IP address ("IP destination"). The user canchoose the type of the trap (default value is 6 - "Entreprise Specific"), thecommunity name (default value is "public"). For an alarm appearance - thevalue sent is 0, and for an alarm disappearance is 1. You can allow thattogether with the trap containing the 0 / 1 value, a second trap with the alarmtext specification to be sent. The OID of traps are derived from the specifiedOID ("1.3.6.1.4.1.x")

Name - this field is used as a prefix for the names of different files (alarm,billing, activity, log and ASR) created by the gateway's application. If youleave this field empty, then the name of these files is given by the current dayand an extension (for example "12-01-05.tax" is the billing file created on the12th January 2005). If the "Name" field is filled then the names of these fileswill be given by the name you have typed, concatenated with the current dayand the extension. For example if you type "Topex", the billing file created on12-01-05 will be named "Topex12-01-05.tax".

3.6. Direction - Editing directions namesBy clicking the "Directions names " icon (" ") a window for editing directionsname will be shown listing the directions name. Depending of the gatewaymain application there is a maximum of 20 OR 250 directions. The “Directions” are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have commonrouting characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you must assignone or more trunks to each direction.

To edit a direction name, you select the name of the direction you want to editand double click the name. The following window "Edit direction name" will beshown:

The direction name must be a unique identifier - an alphanumeric text(digits/letters) of maximum 19 characters long. The first character must not bea digit. The direction name must not contain inside the character space " ".Otherwise an error message will be shown:

3.7. Calls direction - Defining the directions table

Click on the icon button "Calls direction" (" ")to open up the window fordefining the table with call directions. There is a maximum of 20 or 250directions (trunk groups).

At the bottom of this window - there are two buttons named "DIR IP InSettings..." and "DIR IP Out Settings". The first one is used to control theincoming access into the TOPEX equipment. The second one is used toestablish the VoIP outgoing destinations.

To edit a direction parameters double click on it and the next window "Edit calldirections parameters" will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Insert" and "Insert_Id"fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "Signaling" 4 characters and for "Signaling2"8 characters.

Name - the name of the direction (cannot be edited here);Type - can be PORT or DIR and specifies how that direction is addressed. Theassociated list contains two strings "PORT" and "DIR". A value of "255"indicates that the direction is ignored; when the "255" value is assigned to adirection - then the entire line will be displayedin white color. The name of thedirection which has "255" assigned to "Type" field will be displayed in red colorin the list used to assign a direction for each kind of port and also in all placesin which the destination will be a direction name.Overflow -overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this overflow direction when the current direction is unavailable(completely busy or out of service); you choose a name of a defined directionfrom the corresponding list.Overflow 2 - second overflow direction for the current direction. The calls willbe re-routed to this second overflow direction when the first overflow directionbecomes unavailable; you choose a name of a defined direction from thecorresponding list. Restriction - the class of restriction applied to that direction; from the list anumber from 0 to 19 can be selected.Ignore - specifies how many digits are ignored from the numbers received onthat direction; the first x digits of the received number will be ignored. The listcontains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Insert - specifies the digits to be inserted in the number received on that

direction; The maximum allowed is 16 digits. If you don't want any digit to beinserted you must enter "---" for this field.Note: First the ignoring operation is performed and then the insertionoperation.Max_d - maximum number of digits that may be dialed on that direction.When the maximum number is reached the system will automatically send outthe call to routing analysis, without waiting to see if the caller part still sendsdigits. This option is especially useful when you define directions for which thenumber of figures to be dialed is well known (for example the numbers forcertain GSM networks). The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Ignore_id - Ignores from the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number ofdigits you have specified; The maximum allowed is 20 figures. The Ignorecommand is performed before the Insert command. The list contains a range ofvalues from 0 to 20 digits.Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID the specified figures; The maximum allowedis 16 digits.Max_id - The maximum number of digits from the Caller ID to be sent to thesubscriber who has been called. The list contains a range of values from 0 to20 digits.Signaling - contains 4 digits with shape 'xyzw' with the following significance:

Digits Purpose

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x1000)

DIRCHECKCALLBACK- when this bit is setthen for an incomingcall on this directionthe callback table willbe analysed with thereceived identity(caller identity)

bit 3 (mask 0x8000)

DIRMODULECDMA -when this bit is set allGSM ports placed onthe selected directionwill be treated asCDMA modules

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0100)

DIRTESTNET (used incase of a directionwhich contains GSMmodules) - when thisbit is 1 one then theoutgoing GSM modulewill be tested if it isregistered

DIRGOODASR - whenthis bit is set then a

y (digit 2)

bit 1 (mask 0x0200)

RELEASE message issent on ISDN with adelay of 5 secondswhen a congestionsituation isencountered on GSMpart. The call will waiton the specified timea free GSM resource.

bit 2 (mask 0x0400)

DIRCATCALL - whenthis bit is set then allcalls will be cut(stopped) on the GSMmodules for which areprogramming isnecessary (forexample when a SIMmust be changedbecause of an usedalgorithm)

bit 3 (mask 0x0800)

verify CLIR - whenthis bit is set then theCLIR setting is verifiedeach time after theCLIR setting is sentto a GSM module

z (digit 3)audio level (in range 0-7 dBm for the directions withGSM interfaces) where '0' is the biggest level valueand '7' the lowest value

w (digit 4)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0001)- when is set identityis received on selecteddirection

bit 1 (mask 0x0002)- when is set identityis sent on selecteddirection

bit 2 (mask 0x0004)

- establish thealgorithm forchanging SIM on GSMinterfaces (when notset, the algorithm forminimal cost is used(SIM selection by timeperiods). When thebit is set, the "loadbalancing algorithm" isused (equal usagetime for each SIM)

- by setting it, youallow coupling of ring-

bit 3 (mask 0x0008)back tone while dialingon the next link,before the called partyanswers

By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Signaling" field will appear:

Signaling2 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. One bit called "Transit Q.850" is used to transfer the Q.850 termination codefrom the GSM link back on the E1-ISDN link. These Q.850 codes are availableonly for the Siemens GSM modules. For Voxson modules and when the"Transit Q.850" option is not checked the main application is sending acongestion message for NO DIALTONE message and for a NO CARRIERreceived under 2 seconds. The BUSY message is also received from GSMnetwork and it is sent as it is. A NO CARRIER message received for a valuegreather than 2 seconds will be treated as a release from the GSM network.A second bit called "Load balancing algorithm on SIM index" is used to enablethe load-balancing algorithm ("equal load") on the SIMs that are alreadyselected by SIM index algorithm.

"Calculate Tax Pulses" - for each direction (group of trunks) for incoming calls,you can establish the calculating (and sending) of the tax pulses. The taxpulses will be generated according to rules you specify and will accumulate inthe billing files. In any case, the calculated tax pulses are saved in the files. Inthe case of an ISDN connection (E1-ISDN trunk) these pulses are also sentout, using ISDN - AOC messages. You must remember that the mask must beapplied to the direction to which E1-ISDN channels belong.Note: You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in“Routing Table”.

The "Search UP" and "Search Down" fields are used for establish a rule inwhich channels are selected - for example for a SS7 E1 trunk - the order inwhich channels are selected in very important - if the trunk is used in bothdirection then one side will choose channels from the first one - and the otherside from the last one.

The "Priority" field is useful in order to implement routes with the same prefixto have different priorities. For example - when a TOPEX softswitch is used toroute calls to several TOPEX gateways - then each outgoing direction will haveassigned a priority. The customer can assign higher priority to the machineswith higher traffic capabilities and performances. The lowest priority is 0 andthe higher is 9.

Signaling3,Signaling4,Signaling5 and Signaling6 - each one contain 8digits which will be fully used in further development.

Verifications are made for the fields that are involving insertion operation:"Insert" and "Insert_id". The allowed characters are digits from 0 to 9, "*","#", "f" and "F". Characters "\","/","-" and "." are ingored in saving process. Anerror message is displayed in case of an error.

By pressing "OK" you validate the settings for the "Signaling" field.

Note: If the field "Signaling" for a direction (for a record with type "DIR" ) ischanged by modifying "Receive identity","Send identity" or "Audio Level", thenall the GSM modules belonging to that direction will be re-programmed (reset)in order to properly activate the sending and the receiving of the identity. Alsothe audio level will be re-programmed. A confirmation message will bedisplayed as follows:

3.7.1. DIR IP Settingsa) DIRIPIN section - this section is used to perform direction settings for VoIPincoming calls.

By clicking the "DIR IP In Settings..." button in "Define calls direction" windowthe following configuration window will show up:

You can Add or remove (Del) records about incoming VoIP calls.

Here the user must allocate to each pair <protocol, IP range> a direction anda maximum number of incoming calls. The name of the direction can be one ofthe already defined directions, so it can be “MYVOIP” - the genericdirection used for group the VoIP channels or another direction if youwant to use ignore / insert features. If you use the generic MYVOIP name, allVoIp calls will be treated in the same way, but if you use speciffic directionnames, you can define different rules for different incoming IPs. This allowsyou to perform operations such ignoring / inserting digits on the incomingnumber or identity (see "Calls direction") like for ordinary calls.

Examples:SIP 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for SIP protocol calls areallowed from all IPs, and maximum 60 calls are allowedH323 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for H323 protocol also callsare allowed from all Ips, and maximum 60 calls are allowed

Note1: in the "IP field" you can complete either a single IP (such as192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just fromthat IP. It is the same as using range /32.For example if you use 192.168.1.0/24 then IPs allowed are 192.168.1.x;For example if you use 192.168.0.0/16 then IPs allowed are 192.168.x.x;For example if you use 192.0.0.0/8 then IPs allowed are 192.x.x.x;For example if you use 0.0.0.0/0 then IPs allowed are x.x.x.x (calls areallowed from all IPs!);

Note2: The maximum number of incoming calls controls the number ofsimultaneosly calls accepted from the specified IP. If you enter 0 (zero) in thefield “Max Calls”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number ofincoming calls. The equipment will accept any number of calls.The default value is 100.

Proxy - must be enabled if the source IP is behind a NAT.Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination havedifferent codecs. This feature works only on the equipments supplied with aVoIP card (or there is a TOPEX slave machine with VoIP card).Congrate - this is the congestion rate. It should not be 0. The default value is1000.Maxrate - this parameter represents the total number of setup calls on asecond. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000.Prefix - this parameter was added in case when calls are coming with differentprefixes from the same IP source. In case of two such prefixes - the user canassign two different directions for the same IP source.Maxcost - this parameter will be used in further developments.

Nrdig - with this parameter - you can control the number of expected digits foreach call coming from the specified IP.Endcause - this field is the release code used when the received number has adifferent number of digits then the expected ones - "NrDig" value. The defaultvalue is 34.

b) DIRIPOUT section - this section is used to perform settings for outgoingVoIP calls.

Here the software application feature a possibility to allow overflow over an IPdirection. The user defines for each direction name a protocol (SIP or H323), adestination IP, a port used for signaling for example 1720 for H323 and 5060for SIP), the maximum number of outgoing calls.

In order to route a call on VoIP to a destination IP address - there are twopossibilities of setting in "Routing Table".- if you use "DIRIP" in "action" field then you can provide a VoIP protocol(SIP/H323) but just one IP.- if you use "DIR" in "action" field then you can provide a direction name (youdon't have any VoIP channel assign to that direction - because all VoIPchannels are assigned to "MYVOIP" direction). Here in "DIR IP OUT" section

you'll make the relation to an IP address and a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323).

- RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT.- Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination hasdifferent codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance if the destinationIP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding;

- Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. Thisparameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition("Define calls direction");

3.8. Routing table Click on the icon button "Routing table" (" ") to open the window with therouting table. You can define a maximum of 128 routing rules (also there aresituations in which the TOPEX machine can handle more routing records suchas 1024 or 4000 records). The user can consult the current settings of theTOPEX machine regarding the number of directions and routing records in thelicence window);

To add a routing rule to the table click the "Add" button. A new record will beadded at the bottom of the list (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To insert a new record over the selected record from the table the "Insert"button can be used (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To delete a rule for routing select it from the list and then click the "Del"button (the deleted line will have an empty "Prefix" field).You can have the same prefix more then once - case in which you can use"Move" buttons to change the prefix order - for the same prefix - the upperline will have a greater priority than the lower one.To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Prefix","Insert" and"Insert_Id" fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "IP" 15 characters and 4 for"Signaling", "Tax" and "Port" fields.

Incoming direction - this parameter is used in case of using several routingrecords with the same prefix in order to make the difference between incomingsource. It have to be interpreted here as incoming source direction. A"DEFAULT" value means that there is not rule to be applied.Prefix - the routing digits (the first digits which are necessary to route a call)- if you leave empty the field the respective routing rule will Not be taken intoaccount at saving action; The maximum allowed is 16 digits;- inside a prefix string the value 'f' can be used to indicate any digit from '0' to

'9'. For example "1f2" means all prefixes from "102", "112" until "192". Thisfeature is very useful because it allows to reduce the number of records in therouting table.Action - the action to be taken: (there is a list with six strings: "PORT", "DIR","SERV","HUNT", "DIRIP" and "LCR".- PORT- the call will get out through the port specified in the 'Dest' list- DIR - the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Dest' list- SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the'Dest' list- HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that was specified inthe 'Dest' list;- DIRIP - in such a case the "Dest" field will be interpreted as VoIP protocol -SIP or H323. The user must provide destinations IP address and port (in casewhen the default values of 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP are not used).- LCR - the call will get out by analising the LCR table for the index specifyedin the "Dest" field. This field can take a value from 0 to 6. Each valuerepresents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specifiedmoment.Dest - the destination may be:- a port number (in range 0-127)- a direction name specified in "Define directions names" (from the list)- a service number (from 0 to 19)- a number of a group of hunting (from 0 to 19);- an index to the LCR tableIgnore - the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the digits(numbering) sent out through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert - Adds to the number sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits; Themaximum allowed is 16 digits;Ignore _Id - the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sentout through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits;The maximum allowed is 16 digitsIP - is used in the situation when "DIRIP" is used to fill the action field. It isthe remote IP address used to establish voice over IP connection.Port - is the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when"DIRIP" is specified in the action field.Signaling - contains 4 digits 'xyzw' with the following significance :

Digits

Bit (fromright to left) Interpretation

Alloc BSS - this option is used in thesituations when the ring-back tone

x (digit 1)

bit 3 (mask0x8000)

must be identified in order to declarethe call as answered. This option isuseful in cases when the gatewayapplication must make the differencebetween a call answered withoutring-back tone and a call answeredafter a ring-back tone. Additionalsoftware must be installed on thegateway.

bit 1 (mask2000)

Simulate Tax - is used in case of FXOjunction - in which the answer atdestination can't be recognized. Insuch a situation this option has to bevalidated. The call is considered asanswered as soon as the call is madeon output link.

bit 0 (mask0x1000)

Retry Attempt - when this bit is 1one retry attempt will be made incase of a first failure on thisdirection; when this bit is 0 no retryattempts will be made

y (digit 2)

Check Operator (mask 0x0800) - is used whenportability facility is desired. For each call, adatabase interrogation is performed. The portabilitydatabase can be located on the same gateway or onanother PC. Additional software must be installedon the gateway.

Restrict ID (mask 0x0400) - is used for SS7direction in order to indicate that the identity isrestricted. The identity can be hidden if in the routing record -the ignore identity field is put to maximum digitallowed - 20.

z (digit 3) enable to set the number of digits which are waitingto take the action specified in the field "Action"

w digit 4)enable to set the number of seconds in which digitsare waiting to take the action specified in the field"Action"

Value of 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). Whena bigger number of digits is required, the value of 'y' may be used. A group of'yz' with values '10' means 16 digits.

By pressing button "..." when action="DIR" or "DIRIP", a window for setting"Signaling" field will appear:

The field called "Number of Seconds" can be filled with values from 0 to 15 andthe field "Number of Digits" with values from 0 to 20. A message error isshown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Note: there are situations when the "Computing Signaling Field"window will look different. When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "FLASHING", the window willlook like in the next image:

When the two specified fields have these values ("SERV", respectively "4"), theincoming calls will be forwarded to a "FLASING" tone. With the "Signaling"field you can specify actions about the tones heard by the incoming user:- "Connect To Music" - the gateway flashing tonality is provided to the

incoming call;- "Connect To DSP" - the tonality will be obtained from a DSP (with possiblevalues from 0 to 63);- "Loop" - the "Tx" and "Rx" sense are looped together;- "Quiet" - no tonality will be provided to the incoming call; the user will nothear anything;

The "Timer" field is used as follows: if a "0" value is used then the tonality willbe heard continously; otherwise the value will specify the amount of time onwhich the tonality will be played to the incoming call.

When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "PLAY_RELEASE", the windowwill look like in the next image:

The release cause for the prefix specified in routing table with action = "SERV"and destination = "PLAY_RELEASE" will be released with the cause specified in"Release Cause". A message to be played on such a situation can be alsorecorded and stored on the TOPEX equipment.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=SELECT PORT" is used for testing thequality of voice through the two GSM modules from the gateway (as explainedin "Facilities-Commands" chapter).

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=DISA" is used for DISA operation onISDN channels. For example a record could be:"Prefix = 8""Action = SERV""Destination = DISA""Ignore =1""Signaling = 0000"The meaning of this record is: calls are coming from ISDN with the prefix (firstdigit) '8'. This digit is deleted (because the value in the field "Ignore" is 1).DISA tone is provided. All those new digits, which are collected in DTMF tone,will be analyzed according to the routing table. If you want to be sure that allthe digits from the original number are deleted you can use instead "Ignore =20". If you want to force the call to be outputted only on a GSM direction, you can

have in the list starting with '8' the "Insert" field filled with the first digit of amobile call. For example "Insert = 0". Then, in the record for prefix "0" in therouting table you must set "Ignore =1" so one digit is deleted.Note: for a GSM port, DISA tone is provided from the GSM port by selectingthe appropriate setting in the "Category" zone.

Tax - type of billing. You can establish the prefixes that will be charged withbilling pulses in “Routing Table”. To can handle charging issues you mustchange the field “Tax”.

Prefix Action Dest. IP Port Ign Ins Ign_id Ins_id Signaling Tax

0 DIR GSM 0 0 0 00a4 110a

There are three methods (rules) for configuring calculation of tax pulse. Thefirst digit (the leftmost of the four) of “Tax” field is used to differentiatebetween those methods. Allowed values for the method are: 0 – no method, 1– method 1, 2 – method 2 and 3 – method 3.

Method 1)“1xyy” – upon answering the call is charged with “x” pulses. During the stateof conversation the call is charged with one pulses every “yy” seconds. So ifyou select “1” you must specify the number of pulses at response (10 in theexample below) and the time period for pulse generation (20 seconds in theexample below).

Method 2)“200x” – the calls are charged according to several zones and tariffs. Thezones are geographical areas where the tariff is the same. This kind oftaxation is performed by several fixed telephony (PSTN) operators. If youselect Method 2 you may change only the “Tariff Index” value.

The list of all zones and tariffs is defined in the next window, “Pulse calculationbased on Zones” that is displayed by pressing “…” button.

You can easily handle zones and tariffs.A maximum number of ten zones and four tariffs can be defined. In the image above you can notice the tariff allocation on each day of theweek.First, you have the day-tariff assignment. “day=>1,0” means that the tariff 0is applied on each “Monday”. The days of the week are allocated beginningwith Monday – 1 up to Sunday – 7. There is also an 8th day of the week, theholidays the first value is 8. These special days that begin with 8 are defined in“Define Holidays”

After day – tariff allocation the tariff – zone correspondence follows:- each line starts with a triplet “tariff=x,yy,zz”, where “x” is the number of thetariff and “yy-zz” is the time interval when the settings that follow are applied.- After the characters “tariff=x,yy,zz” come the ten columns, the zonesshowing time period when a pulse is generated. The temporization values arein msec, so if a value is “60000” this means 60 seconds

Method 3)“ 3xxx” – the calls are charged according with a tariff. This is an extension(refinement) of Method1. Besides the number of pulses upon answering andthe period for generating pulses, now you can specify also a period without taxpulses and the number of pulses per taxing period. This kind of billing is usedby several mobile telephony carriers. If you select method 3, you may changeonly the “Tariff Index” value. There are maximum 10 tariffs, so values for “Tariff Index” can be value from 0to 9.

The list of all tariffs is defined in the window “Pulse Calculation based onTariffs”, which is displayed by pressing the button “…”.

In the picture above, “Tariff1” is defined as follows:- one pulse is sent upon answering- then follows a one minute pause, for 60 seconds no pulses are sent- after 60 seconds one pulse is sent every 10 seconds.

Note. In the “Tax” field, there is also a facility for limiting the maximumduration of a call limit. For this, you select “4” for the value of the field“Method”. This is NOT really a method for calculating the charge for a call!

With this, you may impose a time limit for the call. The value for “Time” is inminutes, so the example above means that no calls longer that one hour willbe allowed.

SecondSign - here the user can specify in case of a SS7 route some

translations parameters as follows:

The first zone is related to "Nature of Address" information. We offer theposibillity to override the "Called Party" nature of address and "Calling Party"nature of address.The "Called Party" nature of address is changed by enabling the first twooptions "Check Called Party NAI" and "Override Called Party NAI".The original "Called Party NAI" - Subscriber,Unknown,National,Internationaland UK Specific - can be changed to "Override Called Party NAI" whichcontains the same list as the first one.

Moreover the "Calling Party NAI" can be override by selecting a value from"Override Calling Party NAI" and enabling the "Override Calling Party NAI"option.

The second zone named "Type of Media Required" - the route will be availablejust for the specified type of media.Possible values are "speech", "64k_unrestr" and "3K1Hz_audio".

The "Translation Occured" is to indicate for SS7 that a translation of numberhas occured

Ctime - this parameter establish the maximum call duration (in minutes). It issimilar to "Tax" method 4. If this value is set here (not 0) the "Tax" method 4will be ignored.

Search Mode - this parameter is used for routing in case of using routes withthe same prefix. In such a case a method for overflowing and dividing the

traffic between several routes must be provided. Each routes from such agroup must have "Retry Atempt" option in "Signaling field" (0x1000).

Overflow is performed if one of the following situations occurs:- when the call is routed on VoIP - the main application is checking if thenumber of simultaneously calls is greater then the maximum number of outputcalls established in diripout settings (see DIRIPOUT section).- when the call is dropped from the remote side with a release cause which isset for rerouting in "trafic.cfg". For example to reroute on congestion messagethe line "rerouteoncause 34 1" must be added in "trafic.cfg".

We assume this premise in the following explanations. This parameter is usedin conjunction with "Search Param" parameters:

SearchMode

SearchParam

Significance

ASR notused

the route will be choosenbased on ASR value

ACD notused

the route will be choosenbased on ACD value

Priority notused

The call will be routedbased on direction priority(direction specified in"dest" field).Calls from the routinggroup (with the sameprefix) will go mostly onthe direction with thehighest priority. If themaximum number of callsis reached (for examplefor a direction specified in"DIR IP OUT" settingswhen "Max Calls Out"value is passed

the route will be choosenfrom the first to the last

Down notused

one. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe first route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Up notused

the route will be choosenfrom the last to the firstone. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe last route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Circular notused

the route will be choosencirculary.

Percentspecifiesthepercent

Calls will be routed basedon percentage. The"Search Parameters"represents in this casethe percentage value. Theapplication running onTOPEX machine knows thenumber of calls on eachmachine.

Sign1 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign2 - is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" canbe override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” isdisplayed by pressing the “…” button.

To override the incoming category - the "Check IN Category" and "Override INCategory" must be selected. In the "IN Catgory" list - you select the incomingcategory which will be replaced with "Override IN Category". The possiblevalues are: "unknown""op_french""op_english""op_german"

"op_russian""op_spain""op_rsrv1""op_rsrv2""op_rsrv3""notused""ord_subscr""prio_subscr""data_call""test_call""payphone""uk_oper_call""uk_admin_diverted"

Sign3 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. Sign4 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

3.9. LCR TableIf you click the appropriate icon the "LCR index table" (" ") window willappear, where the table with the 8 indexes of LCR rules is displayed. Eachindex includes information about the selected direction for specified timeintervals on each day of the week and even the days that were declarednational holidays (non-working days).

To edit a certain LCR index, double click on that index and the next windowwill be displayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears the informationis displayed by default for "Monday".

For each day of the week, a list shows up with the time periods (intervals) thatspecify the direction to be used. In the image above , for 00:00 until 24:00the direction "LOCAL" will be used. The periods are structured as hours andminutes separated by character ":". When the user modifies the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are filled with the line information: period "From" to"Until" and the current direction. Those values can be modify and validate byoption "Mod". If you select"the Add" option, a new line will be added in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of a declared name direction arenot saved in the "LCR" file. The format of the "LCR" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size. An example of LCR file content is as follows:

#---LCR INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_lcr day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min dir(%x)l 00 1 00:00 24:00 0l 00 1e 00:00 24:00 1l 00 20 00:00 00:01 fl 00 20 00:01 12:01 11l 00 20 12:01 14:01 13l 00 20 14:01 23:01 al 00 20 23:01 24:01 9l 07 13 00:00 24:00 1l 07 4 00:00 11:45 1l 07 4 11:45 12:23 8l 07 4 12:23 12:31 1l 07 4 12:31 18:50 8

Each line is containing a letter 'l', a LCR index number (for example 00 and07), a mask (each day of the week has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and finally an index to

specify the direction used. This is the index in the "Directions Names" table (avalue from 0 to 19).Note: if the same periods and the same direction are used on different days(but for the same LCR index) then instead of two records in the file will bewritten only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operationbetween those days. For example "1e" is used to identify Tuesday, Wednesday,Thursday and Friday.

3.10. Classes of restrictions If you select "Restriction Classes" from the icon (" ") then the window"Restriction Classes" will show, allowing you to define certain classes ofrestrictions for the calls.

The window "Restriction Classes" includes 20 classes with 20 restrictions each.To edit (change) the restrictions from a class, double click on that class. A newwindow will appear, called "Edit restriction classes", as shown below. Using thiswindow you can establish up to 20 restrictions for each class.

Rules for establishing restrictions:- each restriction has 8 charactersThe characters can be any figure or the letters 'a' or 'f' - 'a' represents the figure 0 (zero). For instance a subscriber with therestriction aa000000 won't be able to make calls started with digits "00"(international phone calls).- 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restrictionf0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to call any number - it will be ableonly to receive phone calls.- '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there areeight "0" figures this means that no restriction has been defined for that field.- a class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a classwe have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal valuecorresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all therestrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will beadded the restrictions defined in the current class.

3.11. Table with indexes for selection of active SIM cardsIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "SIM card index table" window willappear, where a table with the 4 indexes of SIM cards is displayed. Each indexincludes information about the SIM selected for each hour interval of each dayof the week and even the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days)

To edit a SIM index double click on that index and the next window will bedisplayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, by default theinformation is displayed for "Monday".

A list is displayed with the periods (intervals) when the SIM card (1,2,3 or 4)can be used. The periods are structured in hours and minutes separated by ":"character. When the user changes the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are automatically filled with the line information:period "From" to "Until" and the active SIM card. These values can be modified

and validated by option "Mod". If user selects "Add" option a new line will beadded in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of an active SIM card are not savedin the "simindex" file. The format of the "simindex" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size.

An example of simindex file content is as follows:

#---SIM INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_sim day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min sim(%x)#---HOLYDAYS---#h holydayday holydaymons 00 1f 00:00 06:00 2s 00 17 06:00 20:00 0s 00 1f 20:00 21:30 3s 00 1f 21:30 24:00 0s 00 8 06:00 20:00 1s 00 60 00:00 24:00 0s 00 80 00:00 12:00 0s 00 80 12:00 24:00 1s 01 ff 00:00 06:00 0s 01 ff 06:00 12:00 1s 01 ff 12:00 18:00 2s 01 ff 18:00 24:00 3s 02 ff 00:00 24:00 1s 03 ff 00:00 24:00 0h 01 01h 01 01h 25 12h 08 01

Each line that specifies a sim index begins with the letter 's', then follows aSIM index number (00, 01, 02 and 03), a mask (each week day has anidentifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and aSIM card value. In the file the active sim card is written from 0 to 3. In alllocations in the "gwconfig" software values from 1 to 4 are used for SIM cards

(on GSM holders values 1,2,3 and 4 are shown).Note: if the same time periods and the same active SIM card is used ondifferent days (for the same SIM index) then instead of two records in the filewill be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an ORoperation between those days. For example "1f" is used to identify Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

Note: the records starting with 'h' character are used for holidays definition.

3.12. Defining the holidaysIn order to define the non-working days with special GSM tariffs, click on theappropriate icon (" ") to show the window named "Holidays Changing". Thiswindow shows a default list with the national holidays and you can edit thelist, add or remove non-working dates.

To add a holiday in the list click the "Add" button. Once a record has beenadded you have to double click on it in order to be available for editing, asshown in the window below.

To delete a holiday from the list, select the date from the list and click the"Del" button.

3.13. Callback TableIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "Callback table" window will appear:

Callback services assure lower costs for the mobile subscribers: from a mobilephone you just call the Topex gateway and hang up. The software checksidentity on incoming calls and if the telephone numbers are in its databasecalls them back. You don't have to pay anything for the connection! This isvery useful for mobile users in the field that have prepaid cards, which featurean expensive tariff. They can ring the Topex gateway located at headquarters,

and the equipment will call them back, put them into connection with othermobile subscriber or allow them to send e-mail messages via SMS.

Callback table is containing the following fields: "Identity", "Action","Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo".

Callback has several implementations (depending on the "Action" field whichcan take the values "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA"):- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACK" then the caller party will becalled back. The back call is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback"field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" fieldor a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number, then thecaller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACKONSMS" then the caller partywill be called back. The callback is sent to the phone number specified in"Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the"Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phonenumber then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phonenumber;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "SMSTOMAIL" then the text content of theSMS will be sent to the IP address which is specified in the field "MailTo";

- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "DISA" then a "DISA" tone will be providedto the caller part; The subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is calledback and receives DISA tone (if the field "CallTo" does not contain anotherphone number). "Direct Inward Services Access' allows the mobile subscriberto get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

To edit the "Action" field the button "..." must be pressed. The followingoptions are available "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA".

Note: Callback calls are recorded in the SMS files.

3.14. MTP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "MTP Configuration" window willappear:

In this window the signaling point (SP) definitions are performed:- "SP definition (own codes)" - this is the zone where the own (gateway)signaling points are defined. Each "SP" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each SP the "Code" and "Flag" must be set. For"Flag" a value of "1" is indicating that this node is an STP (signaling transferpoint). - "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)"- this is the zone where the adjacentsignaling points are defined. Each "Linkset" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each linkset the associated "SP" and the "Code"must be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition(own codes)" zone.- "Destinations" - this is the zone where the destinations are defined. Each"Destination (Connection ID)" is defined by enabling the appropriate checkbox"Dest" field. The first four destinations are filled based on "Linkset" definitions- "SP" and "Code" fields are completed directly if the correspondance "Linkset"is defined. User can define indirect routes using the "Priority" fields. For eachpriority, the linkset is set as follows: there are three priorities - represented as

three columns: "Priority 1", "Priority 2" and "Priority 3". Priority 0 is reservedfor the direct route between the own SP and the destination. For each priorityand for each destination, user can select one of the enabled linksets (thelinkset list is filled with the linkset values enabled in "Adjacent SP definition(LinkSet)" zone). For each destination (with a number greater than 3) theassociate "SP","Code", "Priority" and "Linkset" can be set. The SP list is filledwith the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone.

Note: the own SP code, the adjacent SP code and the nonadjacent SP codemust have the same "NI" field.

Note: the ">>" button is used for destinations from 16 to 31.

Note: the zone "Code value" is used to automatically convert a hex code usedto define a signaling point to the other known formats: "Code 2-3-8-3" and"Code NI-SP". The user must point with the mouse inside a "Code" edit field.The fields from the "Code value" zone will be filled with values . The option"Apply" is used to fill back the original "Code" edit field (an <ENTER" action onone of the fields from the "Code value" zone will cause a recalculation to beperformed).

Examples:1) to declare an own SP0 code "8b38", non-STP - check "SP0" in the "SPdefinition (own codes)" zone and then click the mouse on the edit field locatedin the right side of the "SP0" checkbox - you can directly complete the pointcode or you can edit the code value in the "Code value" computing zone. Hereyou can input the code in different formats. When you finish you press<ENTER> key and "Apply" button. You select "0" in the "Flags" field. 2) to declare an adjacent destination code (code "8103") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0- check "Linkset 0", select '0' in "SP" list and fill the point code valuewith "8103".3) to declare a non-adjacent destination code (code "8547") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0 on Connection ID 4. Select "Dest 4" checkbox, select "0" from "SP"list, complete code field and select linkset on the highest priority available box.4) to declare an indirect route (linkset 1) to an adjacent destination code"8103" (linkset 0) - select linkset 1 in the highest priority available - on therow starting with "Dest 0".

3.15. ISUP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "ISUP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "ISUP Configuration" window allows the allocation of the circuit groups (inrange from 0 to 7). - each circuit group is enabled by the option "Group x", where "x" is from 0 to6. - "Connection ID" can take values from 0 to 31. The " Connection ID" fields arecompleted in "MTP Configuration" window displayed after the user selects " "icon. - "First Port" contains the first port from a SS7 card. - "First CIC" (Circuit Identification Codes (CIC)) and "Range" are used to defineall CIC values.

The SS7 trunks can be placed on card 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6)and 33 (trunk 7). Ports for card 16 are in range 128-159, for card 17 in range160-191, for card 32 in range 256-287 and for card 33 in range 288-319. Forexample the field "First Port" must be filled with the value 256 for an SS7 cardinstalled on card 32. The range is establishing the total number of channelsfrom the field "First Port". For a single SS7 card the range field will be 32. Iftwo consecutive SS7 cards are used (for example 32 and 33) the range cantake the value "64".

3.16. VoIP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" "), the "VOIP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "VOIP Configuration" window contains two zones: "VOIP" and "H323". Thetype of protocol (H323 or SIP) is choosed from the "Protocol Type" field. Whenthe "OK" option is clicked - the OAM application will load the settings fromVoIP zone and depending upon "Protocol Type" selection - the settings fromH323 or SIP zone will be saved.

For the VoIP zone you can change the following settings:- Version: with or without RTP transcoding. Transcoding means that ourequipment performs conversion of codecs, that is the codecs used on theoutput are different from the ones used on the incoming call. For an incomingcall from VoIP that goes out also through VoIP, the RTP channel is processedby the multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES equipment and transcoding may beperformed. No transcoding means that the equipment performs VoIP signaling,but does not process the RTP channel, it goes directly from source IP todestination without going through the Topex equipment. In this casetranscoding cannot be performed.The conversion of codecs may be required if the caller uses codec g711, butthe destination supports only g728, so the Topex equipment must perfomtranscodig. But if the called party also supports g711, no transcondig is

required, and the RTP channel from the caller may be connected directly todestination.

- "PG Card IP Address" - the IP address of the processor card (PG card).Thisfield is supposed to be filled with the same value as the ones you havespecified in the "Network settings - IPADDR" (icon "Gateway Parameters").

- "VoIP Card IP Address" - the IP address of the VoIP card. There are two situations concerning the PG Card IP address and respectivelythe VoIP card IP address.1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in a LAN, then both addresses must bein the range IP addresses of that LAN. In this case the following ports must beopened if a firewall is used: the ports declared for RTP when the VoIP card wasinstalled (for example 3000-3063; to see the range of ports assigned for RTP,go to window "H323 Settings" - window which is described on the bottom ofthe window in the area called "IP Card Settings"). RTP ports are UDP and mustbe forwarded to the IP address of the VoIP card.The ports 1718, 1719 and1720 are TCP and they must be forwarded to the IP address of the processorcard (PG).2) when the PG card is using a public IP address then the VoIP card must alsouse a public IP address.

- "VoIP Card MAC" - this value represent the MAC address assigned to theVoIP card. This value is preset or is given by TOPEX.

- "Public IP Address" - when the TOPEX gateway is used inside a LAN andwhen the H323 signaling is performed with a machine from the internet, thenin this field you enter the external IP address of the LAN gateway. When H323signaling is performed with a machine located inside the same LAN, then inthis field you enter the same value as in the "VoIP Card IP Address" field.

- "IP GATEWAY MAC" - this field is filled in case of making RTP connectionsto a machine which is NOT in the same address range. This field will disappearin future developments (the MAC address will be obtained automatically in allcases, so you no longer need to fill in the value for the remote MAC).1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in the same LAN, then a program(MSPD) running on the Topex equipment automatically detects and fills theMAC of the target gateway. You will enter in the field “MSPD Parameters” thecommand “--no-gw”. This means no outside access is required. 2) when the remote VoIP gateway is on the the public IP address, then youmust first use an utility (MSPD executable) to search and find out the MAC ofthe target gateway, then you must type this MAC address in the field “IPGateway MAC”.

- “Audio Codecs”: a list of pairs <codec no><packetization time>, which areNOT delimited by commas. This is the list of codecs to be used by the RTPprotocol. VoIP uses several different codecs, having different parameters (bitrate and complexity).The codecs used by Topex EONES are coded with one ortwo digit numbers, such as 0 for g711u, 4 for g723.1, 8 for g711 or g711a, 15for g728 and 18 for g729. The packetization time is usually 20 (milliseconds), but it may be as long as 30msec or as short as 10 msec. For a specified codec, like g729, the number ofchannels supported depends of the packetization time. Increasing thepacketization time reduces the packetization overhead, so when going form 20msec to 10 msec the number of voice channels goes down form 60 to only 40.

- "Enable VAD" - this checkbox option allows the "Voice Activity Detection"facility to be used. Typical voice conversations can contain up to 35 to 50 percent silence. OnVoIP networks, both conversation and silence is packetized. VAD sends out RTPpackets only when voice is detected, thus decreasing bandwidth by 30-50 %.This way the Topex EONES will send voice packets only when it has voiceinput. When it detects silence on RTP, it will send to the other side a “silencepacket” that use less bandwidth and allows to be interpreted for generatingcomfort noise.- “LOG on MSPD” – enables logging on MSPD. The name of the log file will be“day-month-year_mspd.log”,such as 08-03-06_mspd.log

- "Port MSPD" - MSPD is a program that controls the VoIP, in this field youcan enter the number of the port to be used by MSPD, such as 9677 that is thedefault. - “RTCP” – RTP Control Protocol - This checkbox establishes if the equipmentuses or not the control protocol for RTP.The control protocol for RTP, RTCP is used for control and diagnostic on RTPsessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in theIETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintainQuality of Service . RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodicallysend each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

DTMFThis configuration area establishes the means of sending out DTMF in the RTPpackets. There are two methods, transmission of DTMF out of band in RTPpackets, or sending out INFO messages (as telephone-events). In SIP protocol,the INFO method would be used for the carrying of mid-call signalinginformation along the session signaling path (for example to send the DTMF

digits generated during a SIP session)SIP INFO method can be used by SIP network elements to transmit DTMFtones out-of-band in a reliable manner independent of the media stream. Ithas advantages of reliabilty (the tones are not affected by low-rate codecs), ofProvides DTMF tone generation for SIP requests and for Enables transport ofDTMF digits along the signaling path.The options available are:- “DTMF-RTP”: if you chek this options, you must also complete the Parametersfield to the right

- “DTMF INFO”: you select to send out DTMF tones as INFO messages- “None” : the sending of dual-tone multifrequency signals is not treated bythe Topex equipment.

Example for DTMF-RTP option: dtmfRTP 101 100 1

The syntax is : - payload type for DTMF in RTP (according to RFC 2833)- payload type for DTMF in RTP redundancy- redundancy scheme: 0 or 1, where 0=IETF and 1=AAL2

For the H323 zone the user can change:- enable "Gatekeeper" - enabling this option will allow using a gatekeeper.Type the IP address of the gatekeeper in the "Gatekeeper" field. The H323negociation will be performed by connecting at the specified gatekeeper IPaddress. If you check the "Gatekeeper" option, the fields "User", "Password"and "ID" must also be filled in. They will be used in the login procedure.

- "Prefixes" - is used to inform the gatekeeper about the digits routed by thegateway on that link. This value is the same with the "prefix" establshed in"Routing Table" to route the call on the VoIP card.

- "Trace H323" - allows the generating of an H323 log file, which will besaved on the HDD of the Topex gateway The name of the file is given bycurrent day.

- enabling "Fast Start" - this option determines the method used for codecsand voice activity detection negotiations. If the options is enabled, then bothcodecs and VAD will be negociated on call setup or on response by usingadditional parameters. When this option is disabled, then the negociation isperformed after response by using the standar H245 protocol. This negociation

will delay the start of the media session. If you enable "Fast Start”, thestarting of the session will be faster.

Examples:1) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from the same LAN.

Input data: the address of the PG card is “192.168.244.70”, the address of theVoIP card is “192.168.244.123” (MAC address “00:52:C2:40:3A:12”).Outgoing calls beginning with the prefix “0” will be routed through the “VOIP”direction to address “192.168.244.76” as shown in the next image.

PG Card IP Address – 192.168.244.70

VoIP Card IP Address –192.168.244.123

Public IP Address – 192.168.244.123(because H323 signaling is performedwith an IP address from the samerange, here is filled the same addresslike in the “Voip CARD IP address”

MSPD Parameters – “- -v –-no-gw –mem 16”. The log option is fixed andlog file is “/mnt/app/out/mspd.log”.Because the other machine is in thesame LAN the option "--no-gw" used.

Port use for communication betweenH323 and gateway main application –9010.

Codecs – “g729b,g729”

VAD – disabled

Fast Start – enabled

Gatekeeper - not used

Trace H323 – log on H323 enabled

Routing table: the gateway will route calls starting with "5" and "6" to the“VOIP” direction and H323 signaling will be started by connecting to“192.168.244.76” (remote machine).

2) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from internet.

The difference regards the “Public IP Address” which will be set with the LANgateway external address. The firewall of the LAN gateway must allow portforwarding for the ports which were already presented in this document.

3) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be filledwith the same value - meaning the external IP address of the VoIP card.

4) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case a gatekeeper is used (optiongatekeeper enabled and an IP address specified).

In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be thesame. The H323 signaling will be initiated for a call with the gatekeeper(instead of the IP address taken from the routing table). For login (identifing)to the gatekeeper field “Users”, “Password” or “ID” are used. If in routing tablethe prefix for routing calls on VoIP is “0” the in “Prefixes” field you must setalso “0”.

3.17. AlertsThis option (" ") establishes sending out the alerts, recording of ASR valuesand enables several debug and testing functions. Alerts are used in case ofalarms or if ASR values fall below a selectable level.

In case of occurrence of different pre-programmed events, the TOPEX systemcan issue warnings (alerts) and also send out a description of the events. Thealarms may be sent to the administrator of the equipment in three ways:- by e-mail (a warning message that has attached the alarm files)- by SMS- as a call on the mobile phone of the operator (several beeps)

The "Alerts" command shows the window for setting up the parameters for the

alerts:

The zone called "Alert zone" which is used to activate (enable) thetransmission of the alerts. For activate the alerts the option ("Alert activated")must be checked.

The field "ASR alert limit" is used to set a level for activating ASR alerttransmission when ASR value falls below the specified value. The ASR value isread at time interval specified in "Time period for checking". To validate theASR alert a minimum number of calls must be set. Of course, if during the

specified time period you have only one call, and it is not connected, this won'tbe relevant for ASR, so it is not taken into account.

There is the possibility to validate the type of alarms for which alerts aretransmitted: "CCS-ISDN", "ASR" and "ALL".

For testing alerts purposes you can use the field "Timer for testing alerts". Fora "0" value in this field the alerts will be sent only in real situations. Fortesting purposes a non-zero value (specyfing the number of minutes) must beused.

"DIAL alert" is used if you want the alerts to be sent via phone calls. You mustenter the phone number to be called upon alert. You may also set the numberof beeps (1,2,3 etc) to be sent out in case of alert. By means of this variablenumber of beeps an operator can determine from which TOPEX system thealert is coming from: gateway A sends one beep, gateway B send two beepsand so on.

"SMS alert" is used in case of alerts by sending a SMS message to a mobilephone. You must enter the phone number to be alerted by SMS. You can alsochange the content text of the SMS alert message. This SMS alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by pressing "File..." option to the right ofthe "SMS alert" area.

"MAIL alert" is used in case of sending e-mail alert messages to an emailaddress. In case of activation of this kind of alert the following e-mail relatedparameters must be set: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject","Server" and "Port". You also have the facility to send the alert message with the current alarm filefor the TOPEX gateway as an attachment. The text of the e-mail alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by clicking "File..." option to the right ofthe "MAIL alert" area. The following fields must not contain spaces inside thevalue: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject" and "Server";

"SMS2MAIL" - this option is used to forward all incoming SMS to an emailaddress. This option is placed here because it is working together with thesettings estabished in "MAIL alert" zone. The SMS content is sent to theaddress specified in "MailTo" field.

The "ASR Reading Parameters" zone is for establishing the ASR readingprocedure. First, to activate the ASR reading process the option "Validate ASRreading" must be checked. Then the interval (in minutes) for reading andsaving ASR values is set in "ASR read period" field. Please note that this valuemust be the same with the value entered above in the field "Time period for

checking" used for ASR alerts.

The "Debug Parameters" zone is used for the debugging process. This facility isintended to help debugging the TOPEX system: log files for the equipment arecreated and respectively displayed. If the "Validate Debug" box is checked thenall activities on ports specified in range "From" and "To" is displayed. If"Validate Saving" is also checked, this information will be saved in log files ontarget.

The "GSM" zone is used for:1)- "CELL, LEVEL and Channel" interrogation. The GSM scanning is launchedby checking the option "Validate Cell Interrogation". The "GSMScan" value isthe value in seconds at which each GSM module is searched upon cell, leveland channel. If a call is passing through a GSM module and if the "GSMScan"value is reached, the interrogation upon the mentioned values will be doneafter the call ending.2)- the reset of the "Load Sim" values - the user can enable the option"Validate Reset of Load Sim values" and specify the "Day and Time" at whichthose time of SIM using values are resetting. User will fill the time moment in"hour minut day" format. These values are separated by space character. The"Load Sim" values can be reset in each day at the specified time "hour minut"if the "day" is filled with "0". The "Load Sim" values can be reset on eachmonth at the specified time "hour minut" if the "day" is filled with the desiredday. If one of the values "hour" and "minut" are wrong then the reset will notoccur.

There are the following text limits at the fields: "ASR alert limit", "ASR readperiod", first port and last port - 3, "Time period for checking" - 4, "Minimumcalls number" - 4, "Timer for testing alerts" - 3,"Beep Number Identifier" - 2,"Gateway address","Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject" and "Server" - 40.

"Simserver zone" - is used in case of a multiACCESS/QUTEX equipment whichis working with GSM cards simserver ready. The "simserver" zone contains anactivation checkbox "Activate", the IP of the simserver and the port to connectto (default value is 13001). Finally the "Name" is the gateway identificationname, name which is also set in simserver to recognize the gateway client.

3.18. Test callsFor enabling test calls you can use the icon"Test calls" (icon " "):

In "TESTING calls" window is enabled to define call tests which can beperformed by the gateway. Test calls must be first enabled with the option"run 1" (to disable test calls a line with option "run 0" must be used). For eachtest call two parameters will be used: "pause xx" and "con yy" which representthe time period between two attempts (xx) and the time to keep the call (yy).After the record preceded by "#nr" the test calls definition follows: each linewill contains the number to be dialed, the identity of the call, the caller portand a value of 0 or 1. With value '0' in a record the number will be firstanalyzed with the definition of the direction (the direction that contains thespecified port) and after that will be analyzed according to the routing table.With a value of '1' in a record, the number will be sent out directly from theport.

For example a test record can be "12345 101 257 1". It means an outgoingcall with number '12345" and identity "101' is sent on port 257.

Note1) a good method for testing calls and to analyse the routing process is toadd a subscriber card and to add a record in the "TESTING calls" window withan installed port from the subscriber card (that port must have also the optionof making calls). For example if the card 15 is a subscriber card then a recordfor port "120" will be:"0700000000 120 120 0"Note2) for making test calls on E1 trunks or GSM cards an example was givingbefore:

"12345 101 257 1",For sending the number digit by digit a value "0000" must be used to fill the"Signaling" field for the direction that contains the test port.Note3) test calls are very useful in finding the available number of GSMchannels. Test calls are simultaneously generated towards the vocalmessaging. After the test calls sequence is started, the number of connectedcalls can be observed by using "Live monitoring" facility.

Moreover a new method can be use to generate non-simultaneously calls - thetime delay between attempts and the time for keeping the calls connected wasthe same for all test calls from the list. This new method allows the user tocreate a list of test calls in order to have variable time delays between them.Also, not all calls from the list are launched at the same time.

This new method includes the following parameters: (the lines beginning with"#" are comments, used just to show you the structure of commands for testcalls):#traffic_run 1/0 nr_simultaneous_calls(max 4 calls) call_typetraffic_run 0 1 test#traffic_idle t_idle(seconds of idle time betwen calls) rand_add(random addedseconds)traffic_idle 10 5#traffic_sel t_sel(seconds of selection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_sel 5 3#traffic_con t_con(seconds of connection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_con 1 2#traffic_call nr id#traffic_call 5113 100traffic_call 5112 100traffic_call 5777 100

You must notice that each line contains the prefix "traffic_" concatenated with"run", "idle", "sel" ,"con’ and "call". In order for this new method to work, theuser must create a direction with the name "SENDCALL" (icon "DirectionsNames"). The "Type" field must be completed with "DIR" in "Calls directions".All those test calls are generated from this fictive direction "SENDCALL".

- "traffic_run 0 1 test" – to disable this second method for launching calls: youcan type "0" after "traffic_run". To enable the method – you must type "1".

The second number specified in this line is the number of test calls that can begenerated at the same time (in the example above it is "1"). The list with the

test calls is described by the lines beginning with "trafic_call".

The "test" word is used to specify the tonality heard by the called part (in thiscase a flashing tone).

- "traffic_idle 10 5" – specifies the time to wait before to launch a new testcall. The first digit (in this case 10) means the number of seconds to wait. Tothis value you may add the next value (it can be present or not ) which meansa range for a random value. The random number can be between zero andthat value. In the above example, the random range of five means that therandom value is between 0 and 5. Consequently, the waiting time will getrandom values between 10 (10+0) and 15 (10+5).

- "traffic_sel 5 3 " – specifies the value used to simulate the selection time fortest calls. Here also the first digit (in this case 5) means the starting numberof seconds to simulate the selection time. To this start value may be added thenext digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,three means a random value between 0 and 3. Thus the number used tosimulate the selection time for test calls will have get random values between5 (5+0) and 8 (5+3).

- "traffic_con 1 2" – specifies the value used to simulate the conversation timefor test calls. The first digit (in this case 1) means the starting number ofseconds to simulate the conversation time. To this start value may be addedthe next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,two means a random value between 0 and 2. Hence, the value used tosimulate the duration of the test calls will take random values between 1(1+0) and 3 (1+2)

- "traffic_call nr id" – specifies the number("nr") to be dialed and the identify("id")

3.19. Transferring filesYou can transfer files from and into the TOPEX gateway.By choosing the associated icon (" ") , a window for file exchange will bedisplayed.

The left panel ("Gateway Files - current") shows up the structure of files andfolders from the system associated directory.You will see directories named "Alarms","Billing","Activity","Log" and "Viewer".

You can change between those directories and the root directory of theconnected system.

The right panel of the window ("Gateway files") shows the files and foldersstructure located on the TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateway that isconnected to the PC. Directory content ("bin" directory) of gateway files isautomatic downloaded. On the gateway you can consult three directories "bin"(where is located the telephony application), "cfg" (where the configurationfiles are stored) and "out" (where system makes files for alarms, billing andmonitoring (activity)). You may navigate through these directories of the rightpanel by double clicking.

When you want to download a file from gateway you enter in the directoryfrom which you want to make download. You choose a file. The file isdownloaded (you have a progress indication) on to the OAM computer.

It is mandatory to download files to appropriate destination: alarms (*.alrformat) and asr (*.asr format) in "Alarms", billing (*.tax format) in "Billing"and activity (*.mon format) in "Activity". If you want to view a text file youcan download it to "Viewer" folder. Options from tree commands "Alarms","Billing" and "Activity" are working with files with the previous extensions.

Automatic file transfer is allowed in connection state. You click on the "AutoDownloading Files" icon button (" ") to show the window called "DownloadFiles From Gateway".

The purpose of the automatc file transfer is to generate automatically requestsfor billing, alarms, activity, ASR and SMS files on the selected time interval.The finalization mode for each downloaded file will be either "ERROR" or "OK".The files are automatically saved in directories according to their type. Thedefault value for the time interval is the current day.

The option "Download Billing Records (for today) starting with hour: " is usedto download the records which are started with the specified hour from thebilling current day file. The specified hour may be changed. The option "Download Billing Records (for today) last: 100 (records)" is used todownload last 100 records from the billing current day file. The number of lastrecords to be downloaded may be changed. For one of these last two options (which cannot be set in the same time) theresulted billing records will be automatically displayed.

3.20. Clean HDD SpaceThis option (" ") allows you to delete files from the TOPEX system. This can beneeded if the equipment has been in use for a long time and has stored manylarge files on the hard disk. You may want to delete the older or not importantfiles to make room for new files. You must choose the associated icon ("Clean HDD Space").The window "Deleting Files From Gateway" allows you to choose a time period

and the type of files to be deleted. The type of files can be:- billing files (extension "*.tax")- alarms files (extension "*.alr") - activity files (extension "*.mon")- ASR files (extension "*.asr") - SMS files (extension "*.sms")- log files (extension "*.log"); these files are created by the gatewayapplication when "Validate Debug" and "Validate Saving to File" are checked in"Parameters for ALERTING" window (icon option " "). Informations that aresaved in this kind of files is about the port activity for all ports in range "From"until "To", values which are specified in the same window for defining alerts.- status files (extension "*.sta"); these files are used to store the state for allports (by state of a port we are meaning uninstalled, free, busy or alarm).These files are used by the web application.

By pressing "OK" option the requests for deleting files are sent to the gateway.The process of deleting the files can be observed in a listbox which is displayedin the "Deleting Files From Gateway". At the end of deleting process a requestfor reading HDD occupied space is sent to the gateway. The indicator of theHDD space from the status bar will be changed if the occupied HDD space waschanged on the gateway.

3.21. File EditorThis option (" ") allows you to edit the configuration (.txt) files that can beloaded later into the TOPEX system. You must choose the associated icon ("FileEditor").

The first window "File Editor Selection" allows you to navigate through thesubdirectories structure in the system root folder.

From this window you choose the text file to edit, then a new dialog windowwill show up, with the content of the file. The selection is done by doubleclicking on the name of the file, so there is no need for an "OK" button - thiswindow has only a "Cancel" button at the bottom.

There is a limit for the size of files to be edited, they should not be over65,535 bytes in length.

File content is saved by "Save" option.

3.22. Loading hourYou can upload the time into the TOPEX system. When you click on the icon ("

") for loading hour a dialog box will appear in which you can change also thecomputer time. Loading hour is very important because you modify thegateway clock: time and date. So this action is protected by password. Thispassword is always "topex".

The default value shown is the date and time that are set on the computerwhere the OAM program is running. Before sending the time to the system,the program performs a validity check, so if you enter for the time and datevalues that are not valid you will receive an error message: 'Error in changinghour'.

3.23. Automatic download of alarms and ASRAllows auto-download of alarms and ASR info from all of the TOPEX systemsthat are connected (with IP communication). The icon command (" ") is"Automatic Requests". When you click it, the OAM program will automaticallylaunch (at pre-established time intervals) interrogation requests for theinstalled TOPEX systems. The requests may be about alarmed modules andabout ASR value (both general and instantaneous). This is very useful whenyou have several TOPEX gateways, because you no longer need to manuallyconnect to each one and ask it for the alarms and ASR information.

You must set a "Period" (in seconds) for the interrogation cycle of all TOPEXsystems that are connected. The values must be greater or at least equal to 60seconds.Then you select a threshold for the ASR value: when the general orinstantaneous value is under the established level, the value is shown in awindow (called "ASR"). By double-clicking with left mouse button a statistic isshown with the last 24 values for general and instantaneous ASR (for thesystem which is currently in process of automatic interrogation).

The "ALARMS Alert " panel of the Automatic Requests window allows you toselect different kind of alarms. When these alarms occur in the TOPEX system,they will be shown and stored.

When the interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown inthe dialog window title, as you see in the first image. After you have selectedthe types of alarms, you may press either "Start" or "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed at any moment byselecting "Change" value.

When interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown in thedialog window title. Valid options are "Start" and "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed whenever bychoosing "Change" value. When automatic interrogation process is started onthe status bar in the first box (leftmost) the following text will appear: "AUTOREQUEST ACTIVATED in xxx !!!" where "xxx" is the number of seconds untilthe interrogation request will be made.

When interrogation process is started the text "STARTED" is shown in thedialog box title. Valid options are "Stop" for canceling the interrogationprocedure, "Change" for changing parameters and "Cancel". There is also"View" option for displaying a statistics with the last 24 values forinstantaneous ASR (for the TOPEX systems which are in process of automaticinterrogation).

When the specified period expires the request for system interrogation will belaunched. On status bar will be displayed the text "AUTO REQUEST INPROGRESS !!!". In the next box to the right side all messages will be enclosedby the system name (connection name).(For example "cfg_GSM")

During the automatic interrogation procedure it is allowed to connect to asystem only if the OAM software is in a pause between two interrogations. Inthe contrary case it is allowed to stop the automatic procedure which is inprocess (when in the status bar is written "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS !!!")by selecting the "Disconnect" command from any of the systems. Then theOAM program will again wait for the established time period before issuingautomatic requests for interrogation.

Notes:

- normally if you have connected to a TOPEX system you can perform"Disconnect" only from that system. But when in automatic request mode, the"Disconnect" command may be sent from any system!- If the connection is broken with "Disconnect" command, only the ASR andalarms that have already been scanned will be downloaded.

3.24. GSM Reprogramming

This reset command (" ") is useful in situations when there is need to refreshthe settings for all the GSM modules. This GSM refresh must be issued to allow the proper setting of the receiving orsending of the identity through GSM modules and also the setting of the audiolevel.

There is a confirmation message which is requested to the user, before to startthe reprogramming procedure.

3.25. Halt and Reboot commandsThose two commands are similar to the LINUX commands. First commandHALTS (" ")(stops) the machine and the second REBOOT (" ") the machine.After HALT command, the TOPEX system may be safely disconnect from thepower supply. Incorrect shut down of the equipment may cause damage of thefile system and other problems such as a large delay in startup due to the filesystem check.

3.26. Visualization ListThe icon " " display a visualization window with the settings of all ports(rights, number, target, direction, SIM index regarding type of port).

The list is build in physical order of ports starting with 000.

In the picture above it can be seen GSM positions for which are given thefollowing settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT',direction, SIM index, target, Pin1,Pin2, Pin3 and Pin4 values. Also it can be seen ISDN channels settings:'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT' and direction.

By using the 'FIND' and 'NEXT' buttons you may search for a text string in thiswindow.

4. Print options

In all situations involving a print command a dialog box will appear. It willcontains two options:

- print to printer (a printer must be installed into system)

- print to file (in this situation a file name will be given for saving data)

5. NOTE

There are two types of windows used. There is a window for viewing filescontent and another window for viewing or modifying system configuration.When we are working with files content we can operate on the tree commandsfor the chosen system and when we are finishing we press the right button and

hide the window. If we are working viewing a configuration we can hide it bypressing right button. If you are connected and the configuration window isabove by pressing right button you are questioning if you want to disconnect.

At the right side of the status bar there is an indicator for connection: it is bluewhen we are connected to a system and it is red when we are not connected toany system.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch -Operations, Administration, and Maintenance - Optionswhich can be selected to supervise the gatewayfunctionality

1. Status MonitoringFor viewing online state of the gateway equipment - in the connected state -we can choose icon to start monitoring (" ") the system. If the monitoringprocess is started then the icon will be displayed in a gray rectangle " ". Tostop the monitoring process, click again the icon " ". A command for stateviewing will be sent to system at regular intervals (5 seconds).The monitoringprocess may be stopped by pressing once again the icon. You can see:

- for ports (port status): ------ which port is opened (used) - white color------ which port is in alarm - red color (for GSM - there is no SIM active andfor subscriber - there is a line in fault). There are two situations for GSMpositions: first situation when no SIM number is shown (a line can be viewed)and the second situation when the SIM number is displayed. For first situationthere are few possibilities: there is no SIM card physical installed on that GSMport or PIN code is incorrect or the GSM module is in fault. For the secondsituation the cause is that SIM module is not registered into a GSM network:antennas are not connected or there is congestion in GSM network or SIM cardis inactivated in GSM network or there is a problem in radio frequency section.------ invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" field notset or card error). Card error will appear red in the card status area. Carderror will appear in the absence of an installed card (which is present inconfiguration) or when the card is damaged and therefore cannot be interrogated by the processor card.------ available port - dark blue

- for trunk you can see alarmed channels and the situations of possible alarmson trunk: LIS, LFA, LMA, AIS, RSA, RJA, BERFor E1-ISDN trunk the indication "SC" is used to display the status of thesignaling channel: when link is up the dark blue color is used; the red color isused to indicate that the link is down (LAYER2 alarm); the white color is usedto indicate that a restoration of the link is performing.

- for card status there are shown: dark blue for installed board, light blue fornot installed card and red for alarm on that card

2. CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL InfoThis option is selected in connected state with a gateway from the toolbar bypressing the icon "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info". For viewing cell, leveland channel info choose the icon (" "). If the cell, level and channelmonitoring process is started then the icon will be displayed in a grayrectangle.The window "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info" will present for a list of GSMmodules (modules that contain the "Installed" option in the "Category" fieldand for which there is no alarm indication) the "Cell", "Level" and "Channel"information. In the right side of the window is displayed a statistic for each cellto which GSM modules are registered. For each cell the number of modulesconnected "Count" and the average "Level" is presented. The window positionand size will be kept on a file on HDD for a future using.

3. Calls monitoring

For viewing online calls on the gateway equipment - you can choose icon tostart call monitoring (" "). If the call monitoring process is started then theicon will be displayed in a gray rectangle. The call monitoring can be stoppedat any time by pressing one more time the same icon or the window closingbox. Following the validation of the icon, several types of monitoring windowscan be displayed:a)- LIVE Monitoring (n), where n may be from 1 to 4

b)- LIVE Monitoring – Report on DIRECTIONSc)- LIVE Monitoring – IP signaling

a) The first type of window, “LIVE Monitoring (n)”, is used to see on line thecalls passing all the range of ports of the EONES gateway. The range is definedfrom 0 to 1471, for all directions on incoming and outgoing sides. The user hasthe posibility to open up to 4 (four) windows of that type. The tooltip displayedfor the live monitoring icon is “Calls monitoring – new window”. When all thefour windows are opened the icon tooltip will show “Calls monitoring – nowindow available”.Through those four windows you have the possibility to filter calls fromdifferent directions on both incoming or outgoing ways.

The digit “n” shown between the round brackets ( and ) represents the indexof the window - it can be a value from one to four. In this example you see thewindow (1):

Each call in progress is displayed with:- the port source ("PortS")- number made ("Number")- identity of the call ("Identity")- day and time. - the field "Duration1" is filled with the time of selection. - the field "Duration2" is filled with the conversation time. - the status of a call can take the following values:"SETUP","PROCEED","ALERTING","CONNECTED" and "RELEASED" (the background color

is different for each type of status).- the destination port ("PortD") - can take a value of "65535" until theincoming call is routed through an destination port.- "End" - finalization call mode - possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS,AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT. It indicates the mode of endingthe call:- first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party or B=calledparty- next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK -ANSWER (response in the destination part), RELS - RELEASE (release in othersituation then ring-back tone or busy), INEX - INEX (non-existent fromequipment point of view - no defined route), CONG - CONG (congestion fromequipment point of view - no available resources), SERR - SERR (Signalingerror), NERR - NERR (Network error), NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone), BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation) and TOUT - TIMEOUT(timer expiration) - "End2" - finalization call mode on ISDN calls - possible values are ' 31'(normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard for release code- “IP:Port (sign)” – the IP signaling port – filled in case of incoming voip callsand viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records(IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option).- “IP:Port (RTP)” – the IP signaling RTP– filled in case of incoming voip callsand viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records(IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option).

Note1: the fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the statusfield takes the value "RELEASED".Note2: Initially the LIVE MONITORING window displays the IN records (theincoming side of each call; not the output side of the call. This is performed inorder not to have the same call into two records. Because for an incoming callwill have in case of routing succes another correspondent line in which thesource port is the destinaton port from the other record.)

The Filter option displays a window “Live Monitoring Filter” in which you canselect as you wish the range of ports to be monitorized through the livemonitoring process.

You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVE Monitoring". Theformat to be used is "xx-yy" for a range of port or simple ‘x’ for just a port.The separation character is a comma “,”. The monitoring will be displayed for the selected ports (the cumulation for therange of ports and ports). The default range which is used is from 0 to 1471. Also you can select a direction for viewing incoming or outgoing calls(Direction – port source or port destination).

The name of log file is always "livex.txt" (where ‘x’ is 1,2,3 or 4 depending ofthe “LIVE Monitoring” window rank). The content of the file can be reset withthe option "Reset".

On the bottom of “LIVE Monitoring” window there is a statistic (which can berestarted through the ”Clear” button), which contains the live number of totalcalls and connected calls, the ASR and ACD values and the time since thesupervision was started.

The “Graph” button is used to display a statistic on the last 60 minutes uponthe values of ASR and ACD.

In the upper part of the previous picture you can see a statistic on the ACD(Average call duration). The color which is used for ACD is blue, and for theaverage ACD is yellow.

On the bottom half of the last picture there is a statistic on the ASR. The colorwhich is used for ASR is green, and for the average ACD is yellow.

The calculated values for both ASR and ACD are highlighted in blue color.Tooltips with the calculated values are displayed if the user put the mouseover those points.

b) LIVE Monitoring – Report on DirectionsThis live monitoring window show an online statistic on each direction (inputand output) and a total. Only the directions for which at least a port is installed on the gateway will bedisplayed. There is an indication on each direction about the number ofconnected calls (displayed with blue color), number of attempted calls(displayed with red color) and online ASR. By pressing on a column (IN orOUT) for a direction a new window will be displayed ("Type of call end"window).

Here you can obtain detalied information regarding the end of a call attempt.The information is structured in three columns:- first column "Side A" contains all calls released from caller party.- second column "Side B" contains all calls released from called party. - third column "Total" contains all calls. For each zone, when you clikc over a column, the causes for calls releasing aredetailed as shown:

c) LIVE Monitoring – IP SignalingA single window which provide access to the calls which are passing throughour EONES equipment.This happens when the EONES gateway is performing just the VoIP signalingand when the RTP is made without using the resources of EONES VoIPchannels, or in case of incoming VoIP calls. The first type of calls are not usingthe VoIP ports of EONES and therefore cannot be displayed in one normalwindows of the LIVE MONITORING feature. Thus you need the “IP signaling”window to be able to monitor the calls that are bypassing the EONESequipment:

Those records are temporary records. For the first type of windows – therecords are preserved after disconnection until a new records is coming on thesame input or output port. In this second case the records are deleted after 20seconds.

To close live monitoring windows – you should close down all windows of thefirst type.Then Live monitoring windows for directions and IP signaling will bealso closed, automatically.Note1: the fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the statusfield is takes the value "RELEASED".Note2: You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVEMonitoring". The format to be used is "xx-yy". The calls monitoring will be displayed for theports in range from "xx" to "yy". Those two values must be separated by theminus character "-". The option "Set" must be used to validate the new port range. The defaultrange which is used is ports from 0 to 319. Note3: You can select the option "IN" or "OUT". Those two options are aboutthe type of the call (from the point of view of the TOPEX EONES): incoming oroutgoing calls. The default option is “IN”, it is automatically selected at startupof live monitoring.Note4: You may also save all online messages regarding the progress of thecalls into a log file The name of this log file is always "live.txt". The content ofthe file can be reset with the option "Reset".

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch -Operations, Administration, and Maintenance - Optionswhich can be selected to supervise the gatewayfunctionality

1. Status MonitoringFor viewing online state of the gateway equipment - in the connected state -we can choose icon to start monitoring (" ") the system. If the monitoringprocess is started then the icon will be displayed in a gray rectangle " ". Tostop the monitoring process, click again the icon " ". A command for stateviewing will be sent to system at regular intervals (5 seconds).The monitoringprocess may be stopped by pressing once again the icon. You can see:

- for ports (port status): ------ which port is opened (used) - white color------ which port is in alarm - red color (for GSM - there is no SIM active andfor subscriber - there is a line in fault). There are two situations for GSMpositions: first situation when no SIM number is shown (a line can be viewed)and the second situation when the SIM number is displayed. For first situationthere are few possibilities: there is no SIM card physical installed on that GSMport or PIN code is incorrect or the GSM module is in fault. For the secondsituation the cause is that SIM module is not registered into a GSM network:antennas are not connected or there is congestion in GSM network or SIM cardis inactivated in GSM network or there is a problem in radio frequency section.------ invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" field notset or card error). Card error will appear red in the card status area. Carderror will appear in the absence of an installed card (which is present inconfiguration) or when the card is damaged and therefore cannot be interrogated by the processor card.------ available port - dark blue

- for trunk you can see alarmed channels and the situations of possible alarmson trunk: LIS, LFA, LMA, AIS, RSA, RJA, BERFor E1-ISDN trunk the indication "SC" is used to display the status of thesignaling channel: when link is up the dark blue color is used; the red color isused to indicate that the link is down (LAYER2 alarm); the white color is usedto indicate that a restoration of the link is performing.

- for card status there are shown: dark blue for installed board, light blue fornot installed card and red for alarm on that card

2. CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL InfoThis option is selected in connected state with a gateway from the toolbar bypressing the icon "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info". For viewing cell, leveland channel info choose the icon (" "). If the cell, level and channelmonitoring process is started then the icon will be displayed in a grayrectangle.The window "CELL, LEVEL and CHANNEL Info" will present for a list of GSMmodules (modules that contain the "Installed" option in the "Category" fieldand for which there is no alarm indication) the "Cell", "Level" and "Channel"information. In the right side of the window is displayed a statistic for each cellto which GSM modules are registered. For each cell the number of modulesconnected "Count" and the average "Level" is presented. The window positionand size will be kept on a file on HDD for a future using.

3. Calls monitoring

For viewing online calls on the gateway equipment - you can choose icon tostart call monitoring (" "). If the call monitoring process is started then theicon will be displayed in a gray rectangle. The call monitoring can be stoppedat any time by pressing one more time the same icon or the window closingbox. Following the validation of the icon, several types of monitoring windowscan be displayed:a)- LIVE Monitoring (n), where n may be from 1 to 4

b)- LIVE Monitoring – Report on DIRECTIONSc)- LIVE Monitoring – IP signaling

a) The first type of window, “LIVE Monitoring (n)”, is used to see on line thecalls passing all the range of ports of the EONES gateway. The range is definedfrom 0 to 1471, for all directions on incoming and outgoing sides. The user hasthe posibility to open up to 4 (four) windows of that type. The tooltip displayedfor the live monitoring icon is “Calls monitoring – new window”. When all thefour windows are opened the icon tooltip will show “Calls monitoring – nowindow available”.Through those four windows you have the possibility to filter calls fromdifferent directions on both incoming or outgoing ways.

The digit “n” shown between the round brackets ( and ) represents the indexof the window - it can be a value from one to four. In this example you see thewindow (1):

Each call in progress is displayed with:- the port source ("PortS")- number made ("Number")- identity of the call ("Identity")- day and time. - the field "Duration1" is filled with the time of selection. - the field "Duration2" is filled with the conversation time. - the status of a call can take the following values:"SETUP","PROCEED","ALERTING","CONNECTED" and "RELEASED" (the background color

is different for each type of status).- the destination port ("PortD") - can take a value of "65535" until theincoming call is routed through an destination port.- "End" - finalization call mode - possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS,AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT. It indicates the mode of endingthe call:- first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party or B=calledparty- next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK -ANSWER (response in the destination part), RELS - RELEASE (release in othersituation then ring-back tone or busy), INEX - INEX (non-existent fromequipment point of view - no defined route), CONG - CONG (congestion fromequipment point of view - no available resources), SERR - SERR (Signalingerror), NERR - NERR (Network error), NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone), BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation) and TOUT - TIMEOUT(timer expiration) - "End2" - finalization call mode on ISDN calls - possible values are ' 31'(normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard for release code- “IP:Port (sign)” – the IP signaling port – filled in case of incoming voip callsand viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records(IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option).- “IP:Port (RTP)” – the IP signaling RTP– filled in case of incoming voip callsand viewing IN records or in case of outgoing calls and viewing OUT records(IN, OUT settings are performed through the “Filer” option).

Note1: the fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the statusfield takes the value "RELEASED".Note2: Initially the LIVE MONITORING window displays the IN records (theincoming side of each call; not the output side of the call. This is performed inorder not to have the same call into two records. Because for an incoming callwill have in case of routing succes another correspondent line in which thesource port is the destinaton port from the other record.)

The Filter option displays a window “Live Monitoring Filter” in which you canselect as you wish the range of ports to be monitorized through the livemonitoring process.

You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVE Monitoring". Theformat to be used is "xx-yy" for a range of port or simple ‘x’ for just a port.The separation character is a comma “,”. The monitoring will be displayed for the selected ports (the cumulation for therange of ports and ports). The default range which is used is from 0 to 1471. Also you can select a direction for viewing incoming or outgoing calls(Direction – port source or port destination).

The name of log file is always "livex.txt" (where ‘x’ is 1,2,3 or 4 depending ofthe “LIVE Monitoring” window rank). The content of the file can be reset withthe option "Reset".

On the bottom of “LIVE Monitoring” window there is a statistic (which can berestarted through the ”Clear” button), which contains the live number of totalcalls and connected calls, the ASR and ACD values and the time since thesupervision was started.

The “Graph” button is used to display a statistic on the last 60 minutes uponthe values of ASR and ACD.

In the upper part of the previous picture you can see a statistic on the ACD(Average call duration). The color which is used for ACD is blue, and for theaverage ACD is yellow.

On the bottom half of the last picture there is a statistic on the ASR. The colorwhich is used for ASR is green, and for the average ACD is yellow.

The calculated values for both ASR and ACD are highlighted in blue color.Tooltips with the calculated values are displayed if the user put the mouseover those points.

b) LIVE Monitoring – Report on DirectionsThis live monitoring window show an online statistic on each direction (inputand output) and a total. Only the directions for which at least a port is installed on the gateway will bedisplayed. There is an indication on each direction about the number ofconnected calls (displayed with blue color), number of attempted calls(displayed with red color) and online ASR. By pressing on a column (IN orOUT) for a direction a new window will be displayed ("Type of call end"window).

Here you can obtain detalied information regarding the end of a call attempt.The information is structured in three columns:- first column "Side A" contains all calls released from caller party.- second column "Side B" contains all calls released from called party. - third column "Total" contains all calls. For each zone, when you clikc over a column, the causes for calls releasing aredetailed as shown:

c) LIVE Monitoring – IP SignalingA single window which provide access to the calls which are passing throughour EONES equipment.This happens when the EONES gateway is performing just the VoIP signalingand when the RTP is made without using the resources of EONES VoIPchannels, or in case of incoming VoIP calls. The first type of calls are not usingthe VoIP ports of EONES and therefore cannot be displayed in one normalwindows of the LIVE MONITORING feature. Thus you need the “IP signaling”window to be able to monitor the calls that are bypassing the EONESequipment:

Those records are temporary records. For the first type of windows – therecords are preserved after disconnection until a new records is coming on thesame input or output port. In this second case the records are deleted after 20seconds.

To close live monitoring windows – you should close down all windows of thefirst type.Then Live monitoring windows for directions and IP signaling will bealso closed, automatically.Note1: the fields "Duration2", "End" and "End2" are filled only when the statusfield is takes the value "RELEASED".Note2: You can select a range of ports for which to display the "LIVEMonitoring". The format to be used is "xx-yy". The calls monitoring will be displayed for theports in range from "xx" to "yy". Those two values must be separated by theminus character "-". The option "Set" must be used to validate the new port range. The defaultrange which is used is ports from 0 to 319. Note3: You can select the option "IN" or "OUT". Those two options are aboutthe type of the call (from the point of view of the TOPEX EONES): incoming oroutgoing calls. The default option is “IN”, it is automatically selected at startupof live monitoring.Note4: You may also save all online messages regarding the progress of thecalls into a log file The name of this log file is always "live.txt". The content ofthe file can be reset with the option "Reset".

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - Modify parameters

- If you select "Parameters" the following window pops up:

Is permitted to modify System name, IP address and IP port number, serialport (in range COM1-COM12) and the link type "Serial communication/IPcommunication". Also the "DialUp" parameters can be changed: "Use PPPaddress", "DialUp connection name", "DialUp Number", user name andpassword used for authentication and "Connection Timeout".

There is a text limit of 19 characters for the "Name" field and 2 characters forthe "Serial Port num".A value check is performed for the serial port value. If the value is not in therange 1 - 12, an error message will be displayed and the incorrect field will becolored in red.Also, value check is performed for the "Name" field. If this values is not filledor is the same as an already existent "Name" (used for another system), anerror message will be displayed and the incorrect field will be colored in red, asshown in the following image:

Is permitted to activate automatic requests for reading ASR and alarms.

Note: in case of reduncancy when two processor card are used the "Modifingsystem parameters" window will be different:

In this last window - you can notice one IP address, one port number and oneserial port number for each processor card.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ALARMS

The alarm files are named <current date>.alr and they include the followingfields:

Field InterpretationCurrent date dd-mm-yy

Current time xx:xx:xx

Alarm statusSET - blocked (appearance of alarm)

RES - unblocked (disappearance of an alarm)

Type of alarm

PROCUP - the processor is started. This is an event, itworks only with SET, not set/reset

PROCDN - the processor is stopped. This is an event, itworks only with SET, not set/reset.

ALIM val - Supply indicator

JONBLOCK - junction alarm

APFALS - local subscriber alarm

CARDERR - board alarm

LIS - Loss of Incoming Signal (is an alarm that indicates thatthere is no signal on the E1 trunk input)

LFA - Loss of Frame Alignment (is an alarm that indicatesthat the frame alignment is not detected)

LMA - Loss of Multiframe Alignment (is an alarm thatindicates that the multiframe alignment is not detected)

AIS - Alarm Indication Signal (the alarm is send by atransmission equipment to indicate the lost of the inputsignal on the E1 trunk )

RSA - Remote Signaling Alarm (is an alarm which istransmitted by the gateway when one of the followingalarms is detected: LIS, LFA or AIS)

RJA - Remote Junction Alarm (is an alarm which istransmitted by the gateway when LMA alarm is detected)

CCS - Common Channel Signaling Alarm. Warns about thedata link for the ISDN E1 trunk.

SLIP - This alarm event is caused by non-synchronousoperation of the two equipment (TOPEX system and PBX orVoIP gateway).

BER val - Bit Error Rate; val is a number from zero to threethat shows the error rate as follows: 0 = 10-6, 1 = 10-5, 2= 10-4, 3 = 10-3.

ASR - alarm of ASR - value calculated on gateway - alarmwhich is generated if the ASR is below a threshold. The ASRvalue is calculated if "Validate ASR reading" is enabled in"Alerts" window. The ASR value is recomputed at each "ASRread period" seconds.The ASR alert is generated if the ASR value is below "ASRalert limit" and if "Alert activated" checkbox is enabled (see"Alert Zone" - "Parameters"); also the "ASR" checkbox mustbe enabled in "ALARMS for alerting" area.

Port Number of the alarmed port

Card Number of the alarmed card

All these fields are separated in file by "," character (comma character).

By choosing "Alarms" - tree command for a system, all alarm files from thefolder "Alarms" of the system directory we'll be shown.

It is possible to select the alarm file you want. Double click with the left mousebutton, then a dialog box for making an alarm filter we'll be seen. The alarmfilter indicates how to check options and values for searching inside the"Alarms" directory.

The field "Period" indicates by default the time period corresponding to thename of the alarm file that was selected. This period can be changed in orderto extend the time interval that is analyzed. The software will look for recordsin the alarm files name whose name falls inside the selected time period.

There is an option to view only certain types of alarms and to specify the cardand the port number for them.

You can select only alarms appearances / disappearances or both.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods and 3 for the fields that arespecifying a card or a position number.The correctness of the period definition is checked before the filter validation.

By pressing "OK" button all alarms corresponding to the filtering criteria willbe displayed in the "Local Viewer" window.

Each record contains the moment of the appearance (with "SET") or thedisappearance (with "RES") of the alarm and a description (text) of the alarm.Regarding the error type the next two fields are important (sense): positionand card.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - BILLING FILES (CDR)

The billing files are named <current date>.tax and include the informationrequired for detailed billing (taxation) of the calls.

During the development period, the information which is saved in thebilling file was increased by adding columns. In the followingexplanations is described the basic billing file structure; at the end ofthis short description, the table which contains the billing fields willpresent also the new added columns.

The following example - for a multiACCESS - GSM equipment (with ananswered call) contains a test call from port "120" with the phone numberdialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120".

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222,10,abcd,GSM

Note 1): an incoming call can be made either from a subscriber or from anincoming direction (containing E1 trunks or GSM modules);Note 2): the number and the identity can be subject to modifications by themultiACCESS/QUTEX gateway. Changes are caused by applying the rulesabout the ignore and insert operations and the maximum expected digits fromthe "Define Calls directions". Also, if a route exist for the dialed number,changes can be made by the ignore and insert operations from "Routing table".But in the billing files the phone number and the identity will always be theoriginal ones;Note 3): the total number of digits that can be treated correctly by "gwconfig"software is 20, both for identity field and for the number field;Note 4): the number, the identity and the IMSI values used here are forexample purposes only;

The next example (with an answered call) contains a test call made from E1-SS7 or VoIP ports on an EONES equipment.Example1: the fist example with an answered call contains a test call receivedon port 32 (E1 port). The received number was “5235”. The output port was aVoIP port (258) located on “SS71” direction. The call was released from thecalled party side (see “BOK”). The duration of the call was two seconds, andselection duration was 11 seconds. The IP fields are filled with space and the port fields with 00000, because the

incoming port was not a VoIP port.

TLI,00032,100 ,5235 ,10-03-06,11:11:03,000002,00001,00,00258,BOK , 16,, 11,0000, MYVOIP , ,00000, ,00000, ,00000, ,00000

Example2: another example, also with an answered call, in which the call iscoming from VoIP port 258 with number “5235” and identity “258”. The callwas coming from “192.168.1.152” – signaling port “37380” and RTP port“49172”. The destination IP was “192.168.104.20” (EONES processor addressin this case) with signaling port 5060 and VoIP IP address “192.168.104.21”(voip ip address of the EONES) with RTP port 10516. The output port was 259located on “MYVOIP” direction.

TJI,00258,258 ,5235 ,10-03-06,11:21:29,000003,00001,00,00259,BOK , 16,, 2,0000, MYVOIP ,192.168.1.152 ,37380,192.168.1.152,49172,192.168.104.20,05060,192.168.104.21 ,10516

Note 1: an incoming call can be made from a an incoming direction (containingeither E1 trunks or VoIP channels);Note 2: the IP fields together with signaling and RTP ports are written intobilling files when “Add IP fields” is established in “Gateway Parameters”. Billing records can be aslo send to an external MYSQL database for storage andfurther processing.Note 3: the number and the identity can be subject to modifications by theEONES. The changes are caused by applying the rules about the ignore andinsert operations and the maximum expected digits from the "Define Callsdirections". Also, in addition, if a route exist for the dialed number, thenchanges can be made by the Ignore and Insert operations from "Routingtable". But in the billing files the phone number and the identity will always bethe original (initial) ones;Note 4: the total number of digits that can be processed by the "gwconfig"software is twenty (20), both for the field “identity” and for the field “number”;

A billing file has the following fields:

Field Description

Call type TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Portxxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This values indicates the physical port position.

This value can be 65535 in case of a multiswitch.

Sourceidentity

subscriber number or caller identity (20 digits)

CallDigits(CallNumber)

call number (20 digits)

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the following shape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss (ending time)

ConnectedDuration

xxxxxx - speaking duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

Billing Unitsfor the call

xxxxx - billing Units for the call (5 digits)

This field is usually filled with 0 for non-answered calls and with 1 However if tax pulses calculation is set on incoming direction (see "Direction") then this value will be filled according with the number of pulses charged at response and on bases (see "Tax" field in "Routing Table").

DestinationSIM Number

When the destination port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specifies a value for SIM (1,2,3,4 or ff)

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is unfinished a value of 65535 will be foundin this field (5 digits)In case of a TOPEX multiswitch - calls terminated with success will have also 65535 in this field.

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY,ATOUT,BTOUT,AERRAUTH,ANOCRED,AFINCRED,AVMAIL,BVMAIL,NOVOIPCH,CODECERR,NOLICENCE,ACLREJECT.

It indicates the mode of ending the call:- first character indicates who has released the call: A=caller party - next characters are keywords detailing how the call was ended: OK - ANSWER (response in the destination part)RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy)INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route)CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no available resources)SERR - SERR (Signaling error)NERR - NERR (Network error)

Finalizationcall mode

NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone)BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation)TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)AERRAUTH - when the ANI or prepaid user is not authenticated on RADIUSANOCRED - when the ANI or prepaid user has no credit availableAFINCRED - for ANI or prepaid user when the credit expires during the AVMAIL - BVMAIL - when a call is finished on vocal message box - cause of non answer NOVOIPCH - when no VoIP channel is availableCODECERR - when the source codec is not in the list of supported codec NOLICENCE - indicates two situations: 1) that the LICENCE had expired for the requested protocol - for example VoIP or SS7. The LICENCE of a gateway can be seen in ACLREJECT - indicates for an incoming VoIP call that the IP is not in different then the expected value or the number of incoming calls is greater that the threshold value. This are set in DIRIPIN section.

Finalizationcall mode onISDN calls

Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values corresponding to ISDN standard for callrelease codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (multiACCESS or QUTEX - when the destination port is a GSM port)

SelectionDuration

xxx- three digits - total time (in seconds), cumulated value of both dial time and selection time

CELL For a call routed through a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it represents the CELL of the mobile networkwhere the SIM was registered.

Direction

The direction to which the destination port is belonging (it is the output direction)

In case of TOPEX software versions released after 2006 - this field has the interpretation of incoming direction.This direction can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for example FXO,FXS,GSM a direction used for incoming VoIP calls - which is the generic "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (withoutports) used just to allow inserting/ignoring digits from number or identity

IP addressand RTP port

The IP source and destination address and the RTP source and destination port in case of a VoIP call.

This info includes the Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the source, the followed by Signaling IP and Signaling Port for the destination, and lastly the RTP IP and RTP port for thedestination.For the VoIP incoming calls, the destination signaling IP is the one of destination RTP is the IP of the VoIP card. In case of VoIP outgoing calls, the source RTP IP is the one VoIP card of the Topex (multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES) equipment, while

remote VoIP card that made the call.

Session_idThis is an unique identifier of a call inside the equipment software. It is useful for a call debugging inside equipment log files.

Jitter Jitter is a variation in packet transit delay caused by queuing, contention and serialization effects on the paththrough the network.

Packet Loss VoIP packet loss occurs when a large amount of traffic on the network causes dropped packets. This results dropped conversations, a delay in receiving the voice communication,

Client_id

Direction -outputdirection

This direction is the output direction and can be a direction to which ports are belonging (for exampleFXO,FXS,GSM or E1 - ISDN/SS7) or a direction used for outgoing VoIP calls - which can "MYVOIP" direction or a virtual direction (without ports) used just to specify the VoIP protocol and the signalingdestination IP (see DIRIPOUT section).

Proto in protocol used on incoming side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (FXS,FXO,GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7)

Proto out protocol used on outgoing side - H323/SIP (VoIP), CAS (FXS,FXO,GSM,ISDN) or CCS (SS7)

Payload Type

the value of codec:G729 - 18G723 - 4G711, G711a - 8G711u - 0

PacketizationTime

The Packetization Time is the length of the digital voice segment that each packet holds. The default is 20millisecond packets. Selecting 10 millisecond packets enhances the voice quality, as to packet loss, but doubles the load on the network traffic.

If you select "Billing" - tree command for a system, then all billing files fromthe folder "Billing" of the selected system directory will be seen.

You go to the billing file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mousebutton a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selective

display of the billing information. This filter for billing (taxation) files permitsthe setting of options and values for searching records inside the subdirectoryfor billing.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period corresponding by default tothe name of the billing that you have selected. You may change this defaultperiod to extend the time interval that is analyzed. For each of the "From"and "Until" limits, subfields are "Day" and "Hour". The program will look forrecords in the billing files whose name falls inside the selected time period.

From the source point of view you may specify these options: - physical position of the source port- port number (for an exchange subscriber call) or caller identity- a direction - a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names"- the source port type: local or junction (trunk)

From the call destination (called part) point of view you may specify theseoptions:- digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, equal or greater than the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a direction- a name of a direction defined in "Directions Names"- a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is a GSMport)- a value for IMSI code - a value for CELL code

The section "IP and Port Filter" contains several options to select from theincoming call side:- signaling IP- signaling port- RTP IP- RTP portFrom the ougoing call side:- signaling IP- signaling port- RTP IP- RTP port

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also thebilling records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1trunk the source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will berouted over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will berepresented by 'A' and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Dependingby the side which ends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and thefinalization mode will contain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS- RELEASE, INEX - INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS -NO ANSWER, BUSY - BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT. "Call Type" lets you to specifythe mode of ending of the call.

Note: physical port position on a E1 trunk is computed in the followingprocedure: for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 +channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) theport will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk and for E1trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number onE1 trunk.

You may set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represents call release codefor ISDN calls. Other types of calls will display a value of ' 31' in the billingrecords.

You may also set the option to select the records with the conversationduration and the selection duration (in seconds) less, equal or greater thanthe value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the source port position, sim index and ISDN EndType,5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 3 for selection duration, 16 forspecifying IMSI code and 20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the billing filter are checked before validation (by pressingthe button "OK"). The program checks correctness of the following:- period definition (day and hour - day less or equal to 31, month less or equalto 12, year less or equal to 36, hour less or equal to 23, minute less or equalto 59 and second less or equal to 59);- port position of the call source (in range 0 to 319);- sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255);- destination port position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319);- duration and selection duration (a value greater or equal to zero);- number of digits (a value greater or equal to zero); - ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal to zero);

If something is wrong, an error message will be shown to the user and thefield that has caused the error will be colored in red (while the text colorbecomes white). When the user goes back to the incorrect field in order tocorrect the wrong data, then the red color will disappear. In the followingexample an error message "Wrong port value" is displayed because of an errorfield on port position (a value "342" which is greater than the maximumnumber of 319).

Finally, you can set the option for viewing only the totals of the recording(option "Display only the total without the records") that corresponds tothe selected criteria or you can choose to display the values without totals(option "Display only the records without a total").

The option "Display only the records without a total" is useful for filtering outthe records in a certain time interval for the purpose of post-processing of thestored billing information (post-processing is done for cost analysis). For theseapplications, you need a text file with values only (that may be imported into aspreadsheet like Excel) but without totals interspread in it.

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "Billing Report". These columns will be explained later in this chapter.The information regarding the billing columns to be displayed is stored in thefile "tax_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same directory from where "gwconfig"software is running. In this file it is also saved the information about the size

of the columns presented in the billing report.

By pressing "OK" button all Billing records corresponding to the filter criteriawill be seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from theselected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts(field "Attempts"), total number of connected calls (field "Connected"),ASR (field "ASR"), total duration of calls (conversation part-field"Duration"), associated billing units (field "TaxUnits"), and at the end a totalfor all of the intervals - total number of attempts, total number of connectedcalls, ASR, total duration and billing units. Note1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer"subdirectory for the chosen system in a file with the "tot" extension and thename corresponding to the selected time interval. This way you may get boththe total of calls for several days and also a general total.Note2: Once you have defined a filter for the billing files, some of its settingswill be saved, so you can apply the same filter to several billing files. Thesettings established in the billing filter are saved in the file "tax_fl.dat" on theharddisk in the directory where "gwconfig" software is running. These settingsare:"Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriber part and junction part,"Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER", "RELEASE","INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and "TIMEOUT") andthe options regarding the viewing of totals and billing records ("Display only the

total without the records" and "Display only the records without a total"). Thesesettings are loaded before the showing of the billing filter in order to be pre-established.Note3: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Ident" is provided for both ascending anddescending sort.Depending of the number of records the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiSwitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - ACTIVITY

The monitoring (activity) files are very detailed activity files, that recordeverything about the calls. They are generated to detail the mode of call setupand follow up the calls from and towards the ports that have checked the field"Monitoring".

Activity files are named <current date>.mon and they include for eachrouted call four activity recordings. For a call not routed the file contains onlytwo recordings representing just the calling part.

The first following example (with an answered call) contains a test call fromport "120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is"120". Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". First line whichis starting with "TLI,00120" contains the original number and the originalidentity. The rules (regarding the ignore and insert operations and themaximum expecting digits) which are defined in the section "Define Callsdirections" are first applied to the number and to the identity. The linepreceded by "IN,00120" contains the modified number and the modifiedidentity according to the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from"Define Calls directions" table. The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits)and "Insert = '0'" (insert the digit '0') for the number, so the number waschanged from "81712345678" to "0712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id =1" (ignore one digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for theidentity so the identity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rulesestablished in "Define Calls directions" table are applied for the incoming part,the call is routed by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a recordwith "Prefix = 0" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore","Ignore_id","Insert"and "Insert_id" are not specified.The third and fourth line represent theoutgoing part of the call routed through a GSM port "00008". Caller id sentthrough this port is "3320" and number is "0712345678".

Note 1): an incoming call can be made from a subscriber or from a incomingdirection (containing E1 trunks or GSM modules);Note 2): the fields that are specifying the modified number and the modifiedidentity are the same in the second and in the third line ("0712345678" forthe number and "3320" for the identity). Identity will appear modified or notby fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Define Calls direction" windowand by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from the "Routing table" window.Number will appear modified or not by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Define Calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Routing table" window;

Note 3): the fourth line does not contain any information about the numberand the identity;Note 4): the number and the identity can be also affected by the field"Max_d", and respectively by "Max_id" from the "Define Calls direction"window;Note 5): the total number of digits that are well treated by "gwconfig" softwareis 20 for identity field and number field;Note 6): in the billing files the number and the identity will not appearchanged.Note 7): the number, the identity and the IMSI values used above are fortesting purposes only;

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,00,00008,BOK ,16,222222222222222,17,abcd,GSMIN ,00120,3320 ,0712345678 ,TD008,TSEL009,MODfe,0001,ffTJO,00008,3320 ,0712345678 ,10-03-04,14:30:43,000004,00001,ff,00120,BOK , 16, , 17,0000,OUT,00008, , ,TD008,TSEL009,MOD01,0001,00

The second example (also with an answered call) contains a test call from port"120" with the number dialed "81712345678". The identity of the call is "120".Port "120" is allocated to the direction called "LOCAL". First line which isstarting with "TLI,00120" contains the original number and the originalidentity. The rules (regarding the ignore and insert operations and themaximum expecting digits) defined in the section "Define Calls directions" arefirst applied to the number and to the identity. The line preceded by"IN,00120" contains the modified number and the modified identity accordingto the settings belonging to the "LOCAL" direction from "Define Calls directions"table. The rules were "Ignore = 2" (ignore two digits) and "Insert = '51'"(insert the digits '51') for the number, so the number was changed from"81712345678" to "51712345678". The rules were "Ignore_id = 1" (ignoreone digit) and "Insert_id = '33'" (insert the digits '33') for the identity so theidentity was changed from "120" to "3320". After the rules established in"Define Calls directions" table are applied for the incoming call, the call isrouted by applying the "Route table" definition. In this table a record with"Prefix = 5" is defined. In this case the fields "Ignore=2" (ignore two digits)and "Insert='0'" (insert the digit '0') (the fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" arenot specified).The number "51712345678" will become "0712345678". Thethird and fourth line represent the outgoing part of the call routed through aGSM port "00008". Caller id sent through this port is "3320" and number is"0712345678".

TLI,00120,120 ,81712345678 ,10-03-04,15:08:44,000004,00001,00,00008,AOK ,16,222222222222222,19,abcd,GSMIN ,00120,3320 ,0712345678 ,TD007,TSEL012,MODfe,0000,ffTJO,00008,3320 ,0712345678 ,10-03-04,15:08:44,000005,00001,ff,00120,AOK , 16, ,19,0000OUT,00008, , ,TD007,TSEL012,MOD01,0000,00

Note that there are two kind of records: first record like in lines 1 and 3 fromthe previous example and the second record like in lines 2 and 4 (containing"IN" and "OUT").

The first recording includes the fields:

RECORD1

Field Significance

Call Type

Unfinished Incoming call: - MJI or MLI(the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished (answered)incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call sourceis a junction respectively a subscriber)

Unfinished Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO(the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished (answered)outgoing call- TJO or TLO (the call sourceis a junction respectively a subscriber)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port(5 digits);

Sourceidentity

subscriber number or source identity (20digits). For outgoing records identity("Ident") will appear modified or not byfields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fromthe "Define calls direction" window andby fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id"from the "Routing table" window;

call number (20 digits).For outgoingrecords this field will appear modified or

CallDigits(CallNumber)

not by fields "Ignore" and "Insert" fromthe "Define calls direction" window andby fields "Ignore" and "Insert" from the"Routing table" window;

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the followingformat dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss ;

ConnectedDuration

xxxxxx - duration of the conversation inseconds (6 digits);

Billing Unitsfor the call

xxxxx - billing Units for the call (5 digits);

DestinationSIMNumber

When the destination port is a GSM port(multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specifies avalue for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or ff);

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port(5 digits) (when the call is unfinished avalue of 65535 will be found in this field (5digits);

Finalizationcall mode

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS,BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG,ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT andBTOUT;

Finalizationcall modeon ISDNcalls

Possible values are ' 31' (normal call) fornon ISDN calls or values corresponding toISDN standard for call release codes;

IMSIInternational Mobile Subscriber Identity (isfilled for incoming records routed through aGSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX))

SelectionDuration

xxx- three digits - cumulated selectiontime in seconds. It cumulates both "Dialtime" (time in seconds for dialing thenumber) and "Selection time" (time inseconds while the response is waited for).

CELL

The GSM CELL (four digits - alphanumericcode) where the SIM used for the call isregistered ("Destination SIM Number" onthe "Destination Port") (multiACCESS orQUTEX). The cell info is useful to search

which cells from the network havegenerated better ASR values.

Direction The direction to which the destination portis belonging (it is the output direction)

The second record contains:

RECORD2

Field Significance

Call typeIN (incoming call)

OUT (outgoing call)

Source Port xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits). This is thedestination port from the preceding record;

SourceIdentity

Represents the source identity. For incoming records (precededby "IN") the identity may be modified by fields "Ignore_id" and"Insert_id" established in direction definition and by fields"Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window; forrecords preceded by "OUT" this field is empty;

CallDigits(CallNumber)

Number dialed (20 digits). For incoming records (preceded by"IN") the number may be modified by fields "Ignore" and"Insert" established in direction definition window and by fields"Ignore" and"Insert" from "Routing table" window; for recordspreceded by "OUT" this field is empty;

Dial time TDxxx-time in seconds for dial;

Selectiontime

TSELxxx-time in seconds when the response is waiting;

Call Type MODxx -specified call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). Thisfield is used for further developments;

Finalizationmode

Possible value are 0000-AOK, 0001-BOK, 0002-ARELS, 0003-BRELS, 0004-AINEX, 0005-BINEX, 0006-ACONG, 0007-BCONG,0008-ASERR, 0009-BSERR, 000a-ANERR, 000b-BNERR, 000c-ANANS, 000d-BNANS, 000e-ABUSY, 000f-BBUSY, 0010-ATOUT,0011-BTOUT(4 digits);

SIMinformation

For calls routed to destination through a GSM module itrepresents the active SIM card. Possible values are 1,2,3,4 or ff(xx- 2 digits);

NOTE: The activity records are processed before viewing into a more simpleformat by grouping two records (record 1 and 2) into a single one (chapter"ACTIVITY").

By choosing "Activity" - tree command for a system, all activity (monitoring)files from the subdirectory "Activity" of the selected system directory we'll bedisplayed.

By double clicking with left mouse button on a file, a dialog window for activityfilter will be displayed. This filter allows setting several options for searchingthe data from the "Activity" filter.

The "Period" area indicates (by default) the period which corresponds to theselected Activity file name. This period can be changed in order to increase the

time interval to be analyzed. This software searches for "Activity" files havingassigned a name corresponding to this period. A time period can be also set (in"Hour" area).

To specify filtering from the point of view of the source of calls you have thefollowing options: - physical position of the source port- port number (for an exchange subscriber call) or caller identity- a direction (all source port on that direction will be searched) - the source port type: local subscriber or junction

The following options for the call destination (called part) are available: - digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, greater or equal that the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a direction (all destination port on that direction will be searched) - the value of the SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is aGSM port)- a value for IMSI code- a value for CELL code

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also theactivity records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1trunk the source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will berouted over a GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will berepresented by 'A' and called party by 'B'. Depending by the side which endsthe call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode will containone of the following strings:

OK - ANSWER (call answered, response in the destination part)RELS - RELEASE (release in other situation then ring-back tone or busy)INEX - INEX (non-existent from equipment point of view - no defined route)CONG - CONG (congestion from equipment point of view - no availableresources)SERR - SERR (Signaling error)NERR - NERR (Network error)NANS - NO ANSWER (release on ring-back tone)BUSY - BUSY (release on busy situation)TOUT - TIMEOUT (timer expiration)

Note: physical port position on a E1 trunk is computed in the followingprocedure: for E1 trunk installed on card 32 (trunk 6) the port will be 256 +channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card 33 (trunk 7) the

port will be 288 + channel number on E1 trunk, for E1 trunk installed on card16 (trunk 2) the port will be 128 + channel number on E1 trunk and for E1trunk installed on card 17 (trunk 3) the port will be 160 + channel number onE1 trunk.

You can set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represent call release code forISDN calls. For other calls in billing records a value of ' 31' will be displayed.

You may set also the option to select the records with the conversationduration (in seconds) less, greater or equal than the value typed.You may set also the option to select the records with the selection duration(in seconds) less, greater or equal than the value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the source port position, sim index and ISDN EndType,5 for destination port position, 6 for duration, 3 for selection duration, 16 forspecifying IMSI code 16 and 20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the monitoring filter are checked before the validation (bypressing the button "OK"). The correctness of the period definition ( - (day andhour - day less or equal then 31, month less or equal then 12, year less orequal then 36, hour less or equal then 23, minute less or equal then 59 andsecond less or equal then 59)), port position of the call source (in range 0 to319), sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destination port position (65535 or avalue in the range from 0 to 319), duration and selection duration (a valuegreater or equal than zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal thanzero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal than zero); A message errorwill be shown to the user and the field that was causing the error will becolored in red (and the text color will become white). When the user givesback the focus to the error field in order to correct the wrong data, then thered color will disappear. In the following example an error message "Wrongport value" is displayed because of an error field on port position (a value"342" which is greater than the maximum number of 319).

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "Activity Report". Those columns will be presented later in this chapter.The information regarding the activity columns to be displayed is stored in thefile "mon_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same directory from where"gwconfig" software is running. In this file it is saved also the informationregarding the size of the columns presented in the activity report.

By pressing "OK" button (in the "Activity Filter" window) all activity recordscomplying with the filter criteria will be shown.

All these records will be saved in "Viewer" folder for the chosen system in afile named "moni.tmp".

An activity record will contain (when all fields are selected to be presented inthe "Activity Record Definition" window) the following fields:

Field Significance

Type (Call type)

Unfinished Incoming call: - MJI or MLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)or Finished incoming call- TJI or TLI (the call source is a junction respectively a subscriber)

Unfinished Outgoing call: - MJO or MLO (the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber) or Finished outgoing call- TJO or TLO (the call source is a junction respectively asubscriber)

PortS (SourcePort)

xxxxx - physical position of the source port (5 digits);

Ident (SourceIdentity)

subscriber number or caller identity (20 digits) (this field may be modified for outgoingrecords by "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" fields from "Define calls direction" and by fields"Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window);

Ident Changed(Source Identity

This field is filled only for incoming records and contains the changed source identity whichcan be modified by "Ignore_id" and 'Insert_id" fields from directions definition windowand by fields "Ignore_id" and "Insert_id" from "Routing table" window; In the previous

Changed) picture it can be seen on the first record (an incoming call) in the field "Ident" the value"120" modified in the field "Ident changed" to "3320" (like in the examples);

CallDigits (CallNumber)

call number (20 digits)(this field may be modified for outgoing records by "Ignore"and"Insert" fields from "Define calls direction" window and by fields "Ignore"and "Insert"from "Routing table" window);

CallDigitsChanged(CallNumber Modified)

This field is filled only for incoming calls and contains the changed call number which can bemodified by "Ignore" and "Insert" fields from directions definition window and by"Ignore" and "Insert" by "Routing table" window; In the previous picture it can be seenon the first record (an incoming call) in the field "CallDigits" the value "81712345678"modified in the field "CallDigits changed" to "0712345678" (like in the examples);

Day and Time(Day and Time ofthe call)

Day and Time of the call in the following shape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss

Selection(Duration of theselection and dialphases)

xxx - selection duration of the call in seconds (3 digits); this time is calculated by adding thevalues "Dial time" and "Selection time"

ConnectedDuration(Duration of thecall)

xxxxxx - connected duration of the call in seconds (6 digits)

TUnits (BillingUnits for the call)

xxxxx - Billing Units for the call (5 digits)

SIM1 (DestinationSIM Number)

When the destination port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specify a value for SIMcard (1,2,3,4 or ff)

PortD (DestinationPort)

- physical position of the destination port (5 digits) (when the call is unfinished a value of65535 will be found in this field (5 digits)

End (Finalizationcall mode)

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS, BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG, ASERR,BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS, BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT

End 2(Finalizationcall mode onISDN calls)

Possible values are ' 31' (normal call) for non ISDN calls or values from ISDN standard forrelease code

Dial (Dial time) xxx-dial time in seconds

Sel (Selectiontime)

xxx-selection time in seconds

Call (Call type) xx-specify call type (0-incoming call, 1-outgoing call). This field will be used for furtherpurposes.

SIM2 (Source SIMNumber)

When the source port is a GSM port (multiACCESS or QUTEX) it specify a value for SIM card(1,2,3,4 or ff)

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity (is filled for incoming calls routed through a GSMport (multiACCESS or QUTEX))

CELL The GSM CELL where the SIM used for the call ("Destination SIM Number" on the"Destination Port") is registered.(multiACCESS or QUTEX)

Direction The direction to which the destination port is belonging (it is the output direction)

Note1: several settings established in the monitoring filter are saved in the file"moni_fl.dat" on the harddisk in the directory where "gwconfig" software isrunning. These settings are:"Port Type" (section "Call Source") - subscriberpart and junction part, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side") and "Call Type"("ANSWER", "RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER",

"BUSY" and "TIMEOUT"). These settings are loaded before the showing of themonitoring filter in order to be pre-established.Note2: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Day and Time" is provided for bothascending and descending sort.Depending of the number of records the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - SMS FILES

These files are used to keep information regarding the sending of short textmessages (SMS) and about the calls made from an internet browser. SMS'scan be sent and CALLS can be made from any internet browser by accessingthe TOPEX gateway. The "SMS" files are named <current date>.sms. The SMSfiles are also containing the CALLBACK actions.

1) To send a SMS just connect to the gateway to the "txsms.html" page (toreach this page, you must first type into the browser's address bar the IPaddress of the TOPEX gateway).

For accessing the TOPEX gateway, you must add its IP address to the section"Trusted sites" for your browser. The format of the record to be added is"http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of theTOPEX gateway. The authentication of clients is performed using "DigestAuthentication" algorithm.Accessing TOPEX gateway from an Internet browser is password protected. Youmust logon with your name and password.

The default password is "topex".

After going over the password protection, a new page will appear asking theuser to enter the SMS destination phone number (field "Phone Number") andthe SMS message (field "SMS text"). The SMS will be sent by clicking the"SendSms" option. The SMS can't be sent if direction named "SENDSMS" doesnot exist on the target.The SMS number will be parsed with all the rules whichare included in the definition of the "SENDSMS" direction and the routingtable.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has beensent ("OK Your SMS was sent OK! Thank you!").

Example of SMS records in a SMS file: SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:24:50,000005,00004,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:26:12,000000,00000,ff,65535,ASERR, 16, SMS ,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000 ,12-03-04,07:27:02,000000,00000,ff,65535,AINEX, 16,

- first record is containing a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The SMS was sent successfully ("BOK");- second record contains a SMS message from the address "192.168.1.152" tothe number "0700000000". The SMS was not sent successfully because thedirection called "SENDSMS" was not existent on the target ("ASERR");- the third record is containing a SMS message from the address"192.168.1.152" to the number "0700000000". The SMS was not sentsuccessfully because no route to destination was found ("AINEX");

Note 1): the total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig"software is 20;Note 2): the number, the identity and the IMSI values which are used are onlyfor testing purposes;Note 3): the code "WWW" is used only to indicate the origin of the SMS("WWW");

There is also another page called "txsmsgrp.html" which is used to send a SMS

to a group of mobile phones. These groups can be defined on the gateway inthe file "/mnt/app/cfg/sms_groups". The structure of this file is as following:grup test0740000001 0740000002

The "Group Name" in the previous picture will be filled in with the groupname: in the displayed example the group name is "test" (the word whichfollows the key word "grup". The SMS will be sent to the phone numbers thatfollow the line with "grup" keyword. The numbers are searched until an emptyline is found or until another line starting with "grup" is found.

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the SMS has beensent ("Your SMS has been sent OK! Sent to 2 numbers"). The number ofmobile phone destinations is also displayed.

2) A call can be sent in the same way by accessing the page "txcall.html". Toallow sending a CALL from an Internet browser the direction called"SENDCALL" must exist on the target. The call will pass all the rules which areincluded in the definition of the "SENDCALL" direction and the routing table.The user must enter the CALL destination phone number (field "PhoneNumber") and further options (field "Call Options" - not yet implemented).

A successful message will appear to inform the user that the CALL will be made

Example of records regarding making CALLS from a SMS file:CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:45:49,000000,00000,ff,65535,AINEX, 16, CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:47:10,000000,00000,ff,65535,ASERR, 16, CALL,WWW ,192.168.1.152 ,0700000000,12-03-04,07:48:10,000040,00004,00,00008,BOK , 16,222222222222222

- first record is containing a CALL test made from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The CALL wasn't made ("AINEX") because noroute to destination was found;- second record is containing a CALL test from the address "192.168.1.152" tothe number "0700000000". The CALL was not made because the directioncalled "SENDCALL" was not existent on the target ("ASERR");- the third record is containing a CALL test from the address "192.168.1.152"to the number "0700000000". The CALL was made successfully ("BOK"); thecalled part was answered;

Note 1): The total number of digits that can be processed by "gwconfig"software is 20;Note 2): the number, the identity and the IMSI values which are used are onlyfor testing purposes;Note 3): the code "WWW" is used only to indicate the origin of the CALL("WWW");

3) SMS ALERT indication. When a SMS alert is sent, the current SMS filecontains the number and the moment of sending and the following fields:"Type" -> "SMS", "Source" -> "ALARM" and "IP" -> 127.0.0.1.

SMS ,ALARM,127.0.0.1 0700000000 ,08-10-04,16:44:11,000599,00010,00,00033,BOK , 16,226019451004927

4) CALLBACK records

CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-

04,11:25:33,000001,00000,00,00008,AOK , 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:32:32,000013,00000,ff,00008,BBUSY, 17,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:33:14,000007,00000,00,00008,BRELS, 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:36:07,000001,00000,00,00008,AOK , 16,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000000 ,13-04-04,11:40:22,000012,00000,00,00008,BBUSY, 17,226019451004927 CALL,CBACK,0700000000 ,0700000001 ,13-04-04,12:03:40,000001,00000,00,00009,AOK , 16,226019451004922

A record is generated into a SMS file for each back call. Callback table containsthe following fields: "Identity", "Action", "Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo". ACALLBACK record contains the identity (in the example it is the field"0700000000" - the identity is one of the "Identity" from the Callback table)and the number dialed in the callback action. The number dialed can be thesame number like the identity number or can be another one (if the field"Callback" is filled with another number then the identity number).

In the billing file, the number dialed by the called party of the back call actionwill be saved. If the "CallTo" field is filled in the callback table then thatnumber will be saved in the billing file.

A SMS file has the following fields:

Field Description

Recordtype

SMS or CALL (the record is a SMSrespectively a CALL test)

SourcePort

WWW (for SMS and CALLS made from theinternet),CBACK and ALARM

IP oridentity

the IP address of the client from where theSMS was sent or the CALL was launched(20 digits) or the identity of the call in caseof a CALLBACK record

CallDigits(Call

SMS destination number or CALL testnumber (20 digits) or the number called in

Number) a CALLBACK record

Day andTime

Day and Time of the call in the followingshape dd-mm-yy,hh:mm:ss (ending time)

CallDuration

xxxxxx - duration of the call in seconds (6digits). Is different from a zero value incase of a successful sending of a SMS ormaking a CALL test and indicates theamount of time from the moment ofaccepting the request and the moment ofthe successful ending;

Lengthxxxxx - the length of SMS message and thelength of the option of CALL message (5digits) or 00000 for a CALLBACK record

DestinationSIMNumber

When the destination port is a GSM port itspecify a value for SIM (1,2,3,4 or ff)

DestinationPort

- physical position of the destination port(5 digits) (when the call is unfinished avalue of 65535 will be found in this field (5digits)

Finalizationcall mode

Possible values are AOK, BOK, ARELS,BRELS, AINEX, BINEX, ACONG, BCONG,ASERR, BSERR, ANERR, BNERR, ANANS,BNANS, ABUSY, BBUSY, ATOUT and BTOUT

Finalizationcall modeon ISDNcalls

Possible values are either ' 31' (normal call)for non ISDN calls or values correspondingto ISDN standard for call release codes

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

By choosing "SMS" - tree command for a system, all SMS files from the folder"Billing" of the selected system directory we'll be seen.

You choose the SMS file you want to see, and by double clicking the left mousebutton a dialog window will pop up, allowing you to build a filter for selectivedisplay of the SMS information. This filter for SMS files permits setting theoptions and values for searching the records inside the SMS files.

The first field, "Period", indicates the time period corresponding by default to

the SMS file that you have selected. Sub-fields are Day and Hour each ofthem with "From" and "Until" limits. You may change the default period toextend the time interval that is analyzed. The program will look for records inthe SMS files whose name fall inside the selected time period.

From the source point of view you may specify the following options: - IP source;- you may specify the source value: (this value can be used in furtherdevelopments);- the record type: SMS or CALL;- the record source: WWW or CBACK or ALARM;

From the call destination (called party) point of view you may specify thefollowing options:- digits from the destination digits. You can choose to select only records withthe number of destination digits less, equal or greater then the value typed.- physical position of destination port- a value for SIM card (1,2,3,4 or 255)(when the destination port is a GSMport)- a value for IMSI code

You may specify a filter on the finalization call mode. All calls and also theSMS records have a caller and a called party. For an incoming call on E1 trunkthe source party will be a channel on the trunk and the call will be routed overa GSM interface (the destination port). Caller party will be represented by 'A'and called party by 'B' (field "Release Side"). Depending by the side whichends the call a letter ( 'A' or 'B') will be shown and the finalization mode willcontain one of the following strings: OK - ANSWER, RELS - RELEASE, INEX -INEX, CONG - CONG, SERR - SERR, NERR - NERR, NANS - NO ANSWER, BUSY- BUSY, TOUT - TIMEOUT. "Call Type" lets you to specify the mode of endingof the call.

You may set a value for "ISDN EndType" which represent call release codefor ISDN calls. Other types of calls will display a value of ' 31' in the SMSrecords.

You may set also the option to select the records with the duration (inseconds) less, equal or greater then the value typed.

The maximum size of the fields is 8 for the periods (date and hour), 2 for thenumber of digits, 3 for the sim index and ISDN EndType, 5 for destination portposition, 6 for duration, 15 for the IP field, and 16 for specifying IMSI code and20 for specifying destination digits.

Certain values from the SMS filter are checked before the validation (bypressing the button "OK"). The correctness of the period definition (day andhour - day less or equal then 31, month less or equal then 12, year less orequal then 36, hour less or equal then 23, minute less or equal then 59 andsecond less or equal then 59), sim index (in range 1 to 4 or 255), destinationport position (65535 or a value in the range from 0 to 319), duration (a valuegreater or equal than zero), number of digits (a value greater or equal thanzero), ISDN EndType (a value greater or equal than zero); A message errorwill be shown to the user and the field that was causing the error will becolored in red (and the text color will become white). When the user givesback the focus to the error field in order to correct the wrong data, the redcolor disappears. In the following example an error message "Wrong simindex" is displayed because of an error on SIM field (a value "5" which isgreater than the maximum number of a SIM card (4).

Finally, you can set the option for viewing only the totals of the recording(option "Display only the total without the records") that correspond tothe selected criteria or you can choose to display the values without totals(option "Display only the records without a total").

The option "Display only the records without a total" is useful for filtering outthe records in a certain time interval for the purpose of post-processing (costanalysis) of the stored SMS information. For these applications, you need atext file with values only (that may be imported into a spreadsheet like Excel)but without totals interspread in it.

The option "Report Definition" is used to define the columns to be displayedin the "SMS Report". These columns will be presented later in this chapter. Theinformation regarding the SMS columns to be displayed is stored in the file"sms_rep.dat" on the harddisk in the same home directory from where"gwconfig" software is running. In this file is also saved the informationregarding the size of the columns presented in the SMS report.

By pressing "OK" button all SMS records corresponding to the filter criteria willbe seen.

In the dialog window that shows up you can see a total for each day (from theselected interval) and time intervals that include: total number of attempts(field "Attempts"), total number of SMS successfully sent (field"Connected") and the percentage of successfully SMS sent- (field "Period")and in the end a total for all of the intervals - total number of attempts, totalnumber of connected and the percentage of successfully connections.Note1: All the recordings, together with the totals, are saved in the "Viewer"subdirectory for the chosen system in a file with the "sms" extension and thename corresponding to the selected time interval. This way you may get boththe total of records for several days and also a general total.Note2: several settings which are established in the SMS filter are saved in thefile "sms_fl.dat" on the harddisk in the home directory where "gwconfig"software is running. These settings are:"Record Type" (section "Call Source") -SMS or CALL,"Record Source" (section "Call Source") - WWW or CBACK orALARM, "Release Side" ("A Side" or "B Side"), "Call Type" ("ANSWER","RELEASE", "INEX", "CONG", "SERR", "NERR", "NO ANSWER", "BUSY" and"TIMEOUT") and the options regarding the viewing of totals of SMS records("Display only the total without the records" and "Display only the recordswithout a total"). These settings are loaded before the showing of the SMSfilter in order to be pre-established.Note3: a sorting operation can be performed on all fields (except "Type" field).The sorting operation is activated by clicking the desired column. The firstoperation on a field is an ascending sort. The indication will be the character"^" which is added to the column name.

A second click on the same field will give an descending sort. The indication willbe the character "v" which is added to the column name.

An example of sorting the column "Day and Time" is provided for bothascending and descending sort.If the number of records is large, the sorting operation can take a significantamount of time.

TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES/multiswitch - Operations,Administration, and Maintenance - CONNECT...

1. Connecting steps

First click on the Connect… property and wait until the connection with theremote TOPEX system is established.

A dialog window will appear after the connection was successfully established.The login procedure on the remote equipment will follow.

A dialog box will appear and in case of connection successfully established theOAM program tries to download the configuration information, as follows:· File with information about the installed cards ("card.cfg");· File with information about the port settings ("port.cfg");. File with information about directions name ("dirname.cfg"); · File with information about established directions ("dir.cfg");· File with information about the SIM modification table ("simindex.cfg");· File with information about restrictions established ("restr.bin");· File with information about pin codes on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("pin.cfg");· File with information about loading on GSM/UMTS interfaces ("loadsim.bin");· File with information about maximum usage time on GSM interfaces("tmaxsim.bin");· File with information about the LCR table ("lcr.cfg" - LCR is an abbreviation toLeast Cost Routing); · File with information about the CALLBACK table ("callback.cfg");· Files with information for defining the parameters for alerting andprogramming of the test calls ("trafic.cfg");

· File with information concerning the parameters used for communicationbetween a Topex gateway and the "gwconfig" application, and the parametersused for debug purposes ("exec.cfg");· File that contains the IP settings of the gateway ("network.cfg");· Files with information about the signaling point allocation ("mtpcfg") and CIC(circuit identification codes) allocation to gateway ports ("isup.cfg"), files usedin case of SS7 card presence;- Files used for VOIP-H323/SIP configuration: "voip.cfg" and "h323.cfg" and"sip_pbx.cfg".

There are progress indicators for all of these files. All these files create agateway configuration. The "gwconfig" application allows the user to save agateway configuration into a separate location (directory). Then you can edit(modify) this configuration and later upload it to one or more TOPEX gateways.

There are a few situations that can occurr while attempting to connect:

1.The OAM program tries up to four times to connect to a system. If it can'tconnect at the fourth retry it displays the following error message: "PassingConnection Retry Error".

2. In the case of passing fourth attempts for login the following error messagewill appear: "Passing Authentication Retry Error". User will not be able toview or modify system configuration.

3. If the program does not receive from the system one or more of theconfiguration files, it displays the following error message:"Downloading Configuration Failed". User will not be able to view or modify

system configuration.

4. If the dialog process between system and OAM computer falls (up to anumber of consecutive errors) a "Passing LAPD Retry Error" messageoccurs.

5. If connection breaks down (because of IP) during the configurationdownloading process or during the connected state, a "Connection Lost"message appears.

You can only connect to one TOPEX system at a time. So if you want toconnect to another system, you must first disconnect from the previous one.

Please note that there are two types of windows used by the program. There isone window displaying the content of the files and another window for viewingand changing the configuration (settings) of the Topex systems. When youwork with files content you will be able to operate upon the commands fromthe tree-like structure for the equipment you want and with the right mousebutton you will be able to hide the window. If you work (change or view) witha certain configuration, this can be hidden using the right mouse button. If theOAM program is in the state of connection to one of the systems, by clickingwith the right mouse button over the status bar, you will make pop up awindow with the option of disconnecting from the current system.

Note: - In order to allow additional facilities, the application may also be launchedtogether with the following parameters:1) The OAM software includes a protection against starting more then oneinstance. If it is necessary to start the software more then one time, youshould use the following command to start the software: "gwconfig.exe -d"or "gwconfig.exe -D". The “D” parameter allows simultaneous administration of several Topexgateways.2) Parameter "-c" or "-C" allows automated connection of the administrationprogram to a TOPEX gateway. The “c” parameter must be followed by a spacedelimiter and the three following fields: identification name for the remotesystem, user name and password (to allow automated log-in).For example: "gwconfig.exe -c TEST,<username>,<password>".In case of redundancy when the password is not explicity requested - thisparameter ("-c") must be used to provide the username/password to connectto each processor card.3) Parameter "-s" or "-S" allows saving of several types of date. Theinformation saved concerns the status of activation of monitoring, livemonitoring and interrogation about mobile network information (cell IDs and

signal levels). For instance "gwconfig.exe -s" or "gwconfig.exe -S"4) There are situations in which the configuration contains files with largedimensions and the process of downloading is taking too much time. In such asituation the "z" parameter must be used in order to compress and transferfrom and to proccesor card the compressed files.

All these parameters can be combined and added to the command line.

Note: if another user is connected at the same time with the "gwconfig"software from another PC, when you try to access the Topex gateway you getthe following error message:

This message indicates the IP address from which the connection to thatgateway has already been accepted.

5) in case of TOPEX equipment with redundancy (multiswitch or EONES) - theapplication is connecting to each processor card but the configuration is notautomatically downloaded like in a normal case. During the system setup - theuser connects to each processor card and downloads the current systemconfiguration - - Downloading Configuration. Every change made from OAMwill be done on both processors in the same time. If one processor card ischanged - then the current configuration can be send through the upload icon:

- Upload Configuration

2. Configuration modifier

Once the configuration files are downloaded, in the right side a "ModifyConfiguration" window will be displayed. In this window you can view andchange the current configuration (settings) of the equipment.

In the previous image (valid for multiACCESS/QUTEX equipments) you willnotice:- a menu bar with names such as "Systems", "Facilities", "About", "Help" and"Exit";- underneath, a toolbar with different buttons marked with icons;- to the left, the tree-like structure of installed gateways;- the right panel, blue, which is the main window;- in the upper corner, the flags for selecting the language;

The previous image is different for an EONES equipment. The EONES systemcan contains up to 11 digital boards. On the OAM pane the EONES structure isdivided on succesive screens, with three slots each. Every slot may hold a 2E1

trunk or a VoIP card. The main difference between multiACCESS/QUTEX OAMpanel and the EONES panel are the navigation arrows that allows you to gofrom one configuration screen to another - arrows which are located on thebottom right zone of the OAM pane.

Note: there is also a situation when an TOPEX EONES is slave of another

TOPEX - case in which there will be 22 E1 or VoIP slots. For example you canhave a multiswitch master with an EONES slave.

At the bottom of the screen (bottom left corner) thereare left and right navigation arrows. These arrows allowsyou to go from one group of three slots to the nextone or to go back

.

Types of boards:

S

AnalogueSubscriber board8 ports (FXScard)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

GGSM/UMTS/CDMAmodules board 2ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

PPBX junctionsboard 8 ports(FXO card)

multiACCESS/QUTEX

E E&M junctionsboard 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

B BL phones board8 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

RG Radio board 4ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

NT/TE ISDN-BRI boardwith 4 ports

multiACCESS/QUTEX

D E1R2 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

IE1ISDN-PRIboard (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

T E1SS7 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

R E1R1 board (32channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

V

VOIP card - withH323 or SIPprotocol (8,16,32or 64 channels)

multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES

For multiACCESS/QUTEX systems, the configuration window is divided intothree distinct areas:

- Port status: the analog boards ports (subscriber (FXS), GSM, PBX (FXO),E&M and BL) are viewed;- Trunk status: the E1 trunks or VOIP channels are viewed;- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

For EONES/multiswitch systems, the configuration window is divided into twodistinct areas:- the area with SLOTs - on each succesive screen - the OAM pane displayshree slots. Every slot may hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card; The middle of thescreen shows groups of three slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on,up to “9,10,11”. You may install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP)in an EONES system, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. For the case of an EONES slave - the total number of slots will be 22.For the multiswitch system - if RTP proxy is needed - for example in case ofSIP users behind NAT - then a VoIP card will be declared (but not physicallypresent). Otherwise - the configuration can be empty. If transcoding is neededthen a TOPEX multiaccess or QUTEX equipped with a VoIP card will be declaredas slave to the softswitch configuration.- Card status: the boards inserted in the system rack are viewed;

If a SS7 card is present into the gateway configuration then another zone willshow up on the panel: "Remote SP accessibility".

2.1. PORT STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)- In the Port Status area each column represents an analog board physicallyinstalled in the rack of the equipment. You can have maximum 16 boards formultiACCESS equipment (128 ports) or 5 boards for QUTEX equipment (40ports). Each port is shown as a small rectangle marked with a letter(character) followed by a three digit number. The letter is an identifier for thetype of board (Ex. the GSM modules boards feature the letter „G"). Thenumber that follows the letter is the port position. Each rectangle also includesunder the port value a text which corresponds to the direction name to whichthe port is allocated (this text is limited to 6 characters).

- Port representation is from right to left and on a card from up to down(position on a card from 0 to 7).

- For a GSM/UMTS/CDMA board the number which follows the "G" character iscalculated by multiplying the card number (the number which is written underthe rectangle with the card representation) with 8 and adding the position onthe board. For example GSM module "G040" is located on card 5 at firstposition (5*8+0=40). Module "G041" is located on card 5 at second position(5*8+1=41). The rule applied is number of card * 8 + position on the board.

- The port representation is changing when the user selects the icon "Statusmonitoring" in a connecting state. Then the color used to display each port ischanging according to the port status: used port- white color, port in alarm -red color, invalid position -light blue (invalid position means "Installed" fieldnot set or card error) and available port - dark blue. A detailed explanationwill be presented later in this chapter ("Monitoring"). For a GSM module it willbe presented in case of a registered SIM, the active SIM card (in the nextexample is the first SIM).

- example of a GSM module displayed in dark blue color which is placedon direction "GSM". The active SIM card on the "032" module is "1".If the GSM module is displayed in red color (therefore no SIM registered) thenafter the port position and a line character it is presented a value from 0 to 5which describes the cause of not having a registered SIM on that position.

- example of a GSM module displayed in red color with the cause of error"2" meaning "no physical SIM".

- Each port from each card can be individually configured by clicking with leftmouse button on corresponding port.

- Depending on port type different parameters may be set:

Port type Category Direction Number Restriction HuntingGroup

PickupGroup Target SIM

IndexS(Subscriber)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (for "BC"settled)

NO

G (GSM) YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES

P (JPABX) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

E (E&M) YES YES NO NO NO NO YES NO

B (BL) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO

2.2. TRUNK STATUS (multiACCESS/QUTEX)

- By default, only one digital card (2E1 or VOIP) can be used in a TOPEXmultiACCESS or QUTEX gateway. For a multiACCESS system: it must be inserted on position to the right of thePG (Processor Card); According, in the "Trunk Status" window only two Trunkrectangles can be filled with channels (if they were declared), the other twowill be empty (like in the next image); Upon customer's request, the backplaneof the multiACCESS gateway can be modified to accomodate two digital cards(2E1 or VOIP); for example you can have two 2E1 cards ore one 2E1 card andone VOIP card. They will be inserted on positions to the left and to the right ofPG. In this case, on the screen in the "Trunk Status" area all four rectanglescan be filled with channels. Older versions of the multiACCESS used 1E1 cards,

that is the E1 board had a single E1 interface. Consequently, on older TOPEXgateways you may use by default only one E1 trunk - placed on position to theright of PG. If you replace the old 1E1 card with a 2E1 card, you may have twoE1 interfaces. The maximum number of E1 interfaces which can be installed ina TOPEX multiACCESS is four and this is the reason why in "Trunk Status"zone the representation contains four E1 trunks.

For a QUTEX system: QUTEX allows you to use up to 3 cards of 2E1. thenumber of 2E1 cards that can be used in the front side of the equipment isconfigured only by the manufacturer.- if you use 3 cards of 2E1 is important to know that the equipment cannot beequipped with VoIP cards or other subscriber cards. In this case the maximumnumber of E1 interfaces which can be installed in a TOPEX QUTEX is sixth andthis is the reason why in "Trunk Status" zone the representation contains sixthE1 trunks.- If you use only a single 2E1 card - you can install it on the back side ofQUTEX equipment (near the processor card). The other 5 cards positions canbe filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use two 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side and the otheron the front side on the first slot from the base. The other 4 cards positionscan be filled with FXS, FXO, GSM or ISDN-BRI cards.- If you use three 2E1 cards, one will be installed on the back side, and theothers on the front side on the first slot and on the last slot- If you are using a VoIP card - the VoIP card will be always fixed between thepower supply card and the processor card. Additional 2E1 card can be installedon the front side of the QUTEX equipment.- for a QUTEX system - the user must be aware about the number of availablecard positions (for FXS, FXO, GSM and ISDN-BRI)- positions from 0 to 4 can beavailable in case when just a 2E1 card or a VoIP card is installed. If another2E1 card is used then just positions from 0 to 3 are available.

2.3. SLOT STATUS (EONES/multiswitch)

You can have maximum 11 digital boards on an EONES equipment. Every slotmay hold a 2E1 trunk or a VoIP card. The middle of the screen shows groups ofthree slots each, numbered “0,1,2” , “2,4,5” and so on, up to “9,10,11”. Youmay install up to 11 (eleven) digital boards (2E1 or VoIP) in an EONESsystem, so the last slot, no 11, will be always empty. The alarms for the respective E1 boards are also shown as rectangles withcorresponding names: LIS, AIS, LFA, RJA, BER, etc. The color of theserectangles turns to red in case of emergence of an alarm.

2.4.1. E1 card

- The E1 representation of an E1 trunk features on the first two rows thechannels. For each channel, the type of the E1 interface is shown as a smallrectangle marked with a letter, followed by a two-figure number - the numberof the channel. The third row includes representation of the alarm buttons.Each alarm button is marked with an abbreviation for the type of alarm itrepresents, as described in the table below:

LIS Loss of Incoming Signal

AIS Alarm of Indication Signal

LFA Loss of Frame Alignment

RJA Remote of Junction Alarm

LMA Loss of Multiframe Alignment (not foran IDSN or SS7 interface)

RSA Remote of Signaling Alarm (not for anIDSN or SS7 interface)

BER Bit error rate

- Code representation used on drawing the E1 channels:

D E1R2 trunk channel (32positions on a E1 trunk)

I E1ISDN trunk channel ISDN(32 positions)

T E1SS7 (32 positions)

R E1R1 (32 positions)

- Each channel from each E1 interface can be individually configured byclicking with left mouse button on the corresponding channel. For eachchannel the "Category" and the "Direction" parameters can be settled.

-Up to four E1 trunks can be represented. -In the following picture an E1 - SS7 interface (letter "T") and an E1 - ISDNinterface (letter "I") are displayed.

- The indication "SC" is used to highlight the signaling channel.

- In the previous representation with the E1 trunks, the card number isdisplayed in the right side of each trunk. The trunks can be placed on card 16(trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6) and 33 (trunk 7). - In case of a 2E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is32 (this means that the first E1 interface is located on position 32 and thenext interface is located on position 33). The position on the left side of theprocessor card is 16 (this means that the first E1 interface is located onposition 16 and the next interface is located on position 17).- In case of a E1 card, the position on the right side of the processor card is 32and the position on the left side of the processor card is 33.

2.4.2. VOIP card

- The VOIP card representation features four rows, each with 16 channels.The total number of channels is 64 (compressed voice channels). For eachchannel, the type of the VOIP card is shown as a small rectangle marked witha letter, followed by a two-figure number - the number of the channel.Depending on customer needs, the VoIP card can be delivered with 8,16,32 or64 channels.

- letter 'V' is used for code representation for drawing the VOIP channels:

- A VOIP card is used instead of a 2E1 board; it can be inserted in the rack ofthe gateway on card positions 16 or 32. The protocols supported are H232 andSIP. The codecs used are G711, G723, G728, G729. Please note that the firsttwo channels on the VoIP card ("V00" and "V01") can't be used as valid voicechannels.

2.5. CARD STATUS

In the area "Card status" of the window, the first row is a representation of thestatus of the boards installed in the cabinet of the equipment. Each board isshown as a small rectangle marked with the number of the card in the 19"rack.(from right to left). The current status of the board is shown by its color.The second row shows the status of the E1 trunk board: cards 16,17, 32 and33.

2.6. LinkStatus & REMOTE SP ACCESSIBILITY

This zone is displayed only if a SS7 card is present into the gatewaymultiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES configuration. This zone is a representation ofthe accessibility of the remote (adjacent or non-adjacent) signaling points.The TOPEX gateway can handle connections to maximum 32 signaling points(SP) which are represented by boxes with values from 00 to 31. Values from 0to 11 are used for adjacent signaling points and values from 4 to 31 for non-

adjacent signaling points.

The used colors in displaying the "Remote SP accessibility" bar are:- connection to a SP not installed - light blue - connection to a SP installed - dark blue. The information regarding theinstalled SP connections is reading from the "MTP Configuration" file (" ") -the enabled routes (option "Route x" where x is from 0 to 31).- connection error (alarm) to a SP installed - red. This information is reread ateach 60 seconds.

On the EONES system - the "LinkStatus & Remote SP Accessibility" zone isdisplayed on the last OAM pane screen - the screen which contains the lastthree EONES slots (9,10 and 11)

2.7. EONES - structure of slots

For EONES equipment - the type of each slot is declared in the bottom side ofthe screen using the " " icon. As you can notice in the next picture, there isa list with all slots (named "PG"), slots starting from 0 to 11. The "Type" ofeach slot is 'E1' for E1 cards, 'VoIP' for VoIP card and 'Not Used' for slotunused.

For softswitch and for configuration with EONES slave - the ">>" button willbe used to navigate to slots 12-23.

The "IP Remote" and "Port Remote" are not used in EONES configuration - areused in master-slave configuration. The "Rez1" and "Rez2" fields are keepedfor further developments.

The "IP Private VoIP" and "IP Public VoIP" fields are used for EONES andrepresent the VoIP private IP - the VoIP IP card and VoIP public IP. For VoIPslots a new line must be filled - the corresponding "VoIPx" line. For examplethe next line corresponds to slot 0 and contents the processor card address -192.168.161.3, the MSPD port - 9677 (for the next VoIP card it will be used9675, 9673, 9671 and so on). It follows the gateway MAC behind which theEONES is located (it is the same for all EONES VoIP card) and the VoIP MACcard.voip 0 2 192.168.161.3 9677 fork /mnt/app/bin/mspd -p 9677 --trace-cmd -v--mem 16 --gw-mac 00:48:54:1A:D2:8D -m 00:52:C2:40:3E:40192.168.244.150 --log /mnt/app/out/%d-%m-%y_mspd.log -

Please notice that in case of EONES - the VoIP configuration is performed hereon "PG configuration" - slot configuration. On "VOIP Configuration" window -the "PG Card IP Address", "VoIP Card IP Address", "Public IP Address", "VoIPCard MAC" and "IP GATEWAY MAC" will be empty.

The "RTP_IP" button is used to fill the IP used in RTP packets. This value canbe different if the TOPOX equipment has more then one ethernet interfaces.

3. Changes available by icons

3.1. Downloading Configuration

This option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor card fromwhich the configuration is downloading:

The configuration is downloaded from the selected processor card.

When the configuration is downloaded - the next window appears asking fortaking over the new configuration. If the answer is yes - then the

configuration will be displayed in the OAM panel.

I

3.2. Uploading ConfigurationThis option (icon) is available in case of a TOPEX EONES or multiswitchequipped with redundancy. The first step is to select the processor/processorcars to which the configuration will be uploaded:

Once the processor card is selected the uploading process is started.

The confirmation message for succesfully uploaded is "The new configurationhas been uploaded!". If an error occurs the message will be "Uploadingconfiguration Failed".

3.3. Save Current Configuration

A configuration is the collection of files which are downloaded from a gatewayduring the connection progress. These files describe the mode of working for aTOPEX gateway. The "Save Current Configuration" (icon " ") may be use onlyin a state of connection between the "gwconfig" application and a gateway.

The next image is displayed allowing the user to type the "ConfigurationName":

After the validation of button "Save" a new item will appear in the tree windowlocated in the left side of the application panel. The name which was typed inthe "Enter Configuration Name" will be presented together with characters"viz". Note:the gateways to which the user is able to make connections will havecharacters "cfg" before the gateway identification name.

There are two possible options for a saved configuration:- "Edit" - this option will display the saved configuration in the same manneras for a connected gateway. The user is able to make changes. All settings arepreserved when the user choose the "Close" option.- "Close" - this is the option to close the "Edit" configuration mode. Click "OK"to hide the configuration window.

3.4. Upload Edited ConfigurationThis option is used in a state of connection between "gwconfig" application anda gateway. The icon " " is used to launch the uploading process. First step is

to select in "Uploading CONFIGURATIONS" the desired configuration to beupload. All available configurations are displayed in a list. The user must selecta configuration then press the button "Loading".

The uploading process is started. The progress of gateway uploading may befollowed in the "Uploading configuration" window.

A confirmation message is displayed when the uploading process has ended.

The "gwconfig" software will display on the screen the new configuration. Theconfiguration is used also by the gateway main application.

3.5. Gateway ParametersBy clicking the "Gateway Parameters" icon (" ") a window for editing severalgateway parameters is shown. These parameters are regarding IP address,firewall, serial connectivity and IP connectivity with "gwconfig" software,debug, syslog and SNMP messages to be generated by Topex gateway.

Network settings - this zone allows the user to change the IP address of thegateway (in the image the record started by "IPADDR"). Also the user maychange the netmask (line started by "NETMASK") and the gateway address(line started by "GATEWAY"). A line which is started with "#" character will benot taken into account. The gateway must be restarted after one parameterfrom the "Network settings" was changed. The icon used for restarting thegateway is " ".

Connection zone: these settings are related to the serial connectivity and IPconnectivity of the TOPEX equipment with the "gwconfig" software. Thecommand "Parameters" located in the "gwconfig" software is related to the PCcommunication parameters. The parameters set for the gateway mustcorrespond to those established for the OAM program.

Serial Speed - the value is used for serial communication between OAMprogram and the software of the gateway. Allowed values are 0 (it meansunused port and must be set when you want to install a dialup server on thegateway), 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (default value);

Serial Port num - specifies the number of the serial port on the gateway to beused for serial connection with OAM software. Allowed values are 1 or 2 andthe default is 1 (COM1);

IP Port num - the port used for IP connectivity; the default value is 9009. Ifthis value is changed from OAM software, then the connection will beimmediately lost. You must have the same port number established both in theOAM program and in the software running on the TOPEX gateway. Afterperforming a reset, the OAM software will be able to connect to the gatewayusing the new value of IP Port.

Firewall - in this edit zone - user can add incoming firewall rules. Each linefrom the edit zone must contain three fields. - first field is the connection type ("tcp" or "udp");- next the IP address follows - it represents the IP address from which theconnection to the port specified in the third field is allowed. - third field represents the port on which the connection is accepted.

For example "tcp 192.168.1.6 22" means that a TCP connection is accepted onport 22 (SSH port) from "192.168.1.6" address.

To enable firewall protection you must uncomment some lines of theconfiguration file.For this, remove the "#" character from the beginning of these lines:"LAN=ppp0", "WAN=eth0" "USE_FIREWALL=yes"

After this operation is done, you must reboot the gateway for the newsettings to take effect.

Attention!Be careful when you use the embedded firewall. If the firewall protectionis started without the of presence of valid lines in the "Firewall settings", thenthe Topex gateway will be no longer reachable from IP. In that case, the onlysolution for accessing the gateway is to use the serial connection via the COM2port of the PG card. Use this serial connection to fix the firewall settings, thenyou will be able again to access the gateway via IP.

Debug

Activate 'log' file - when the option is checked the debug messages will begenerated in the debug log of the TOPEX gateway. These debug files have

extension "log" and the name corresponding to the current day (format day-month-year: dd-mm-yy).

db_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages will be shown inthe debug log of the TOPEX gateway.

db_cfg - when the option is checked any changes on gateway configuration willbe shown in the gateway debug log.

- the option sets the debug mask that establishes for which subjects will begenerated debug logs. The items that may be recorded in the logs are: "PortActivity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM". To edit the "DebugMask" field, the button "..." must be pressed. Then the "Computing DebugOptions" window will be displayed.

- "Port Activity" option is used to generate debug records for all ports of theTOPEX gateway;- "ComCCS" is used to generate debug records for communication with theISDN and SS7 applications;- "SOmes" is used to debug the main application which is running on theTOPEX gateway;- "comUNIX" is used to debug the commands which are received from the webserver;- "comOAM" is used to debug the communication with OAM software.

Here you just check the boxes for the options you need to generate debuginformation.

Samples of messages from a debug log of a TOPEX gateway:

If option "db_alarms" was set then messages preceeded by "RUN" will appearin the debug file:RUN Com Err cd f cat 43 (this is an alarm message on card 'f' which is cardnumber 15 from the gateway) RUN Com Err cd 10 cat 4003 (this is an alarm message on card '10' which iscard number 16 from the gateway)RUN NLIS 4 (LIS error on card 32)RUN NLFA 4 (LFA error on card 32)RUN NAIS 4 (AIS error on card 32)RUN NRJA 4 (RJA error on card 32)

If option "db_cfg" was set then messages preceeded by "CFG" will appear inthe debug file:CFG Open for read ../cfg/trafic.cfgCFG Alarm run 0 ASRalarm 80 timeasr 12(min) nr min calls 1 alarmmask 0timetest 0CFG Save ASR at 30 minCFG Debug 1 Pstart 0 Pstop 320 SaveFile 1 CFG Trafic run 0CFG Trafic idle time 5CFG Trafic seize time 30CFG GEN TRAFFIC CALL 0 1234567891108 120 port 257 mod 0. Thesemessages contains operations performed over the configuration files.

If option "Port Activity" is validated in the creation of debug file then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:00257 7235150 pid 1 E1CCSidle ACTIV channel 100257 7235150 Digits 1234567891108 Ident 12000257 7235200 Route N 123456 ... NT 123456 ... RxT 900000257 7235200 Dialdig M_CALL len 3000258 7235200 pid 2 E1CCSidle CALL mod 1 mycat 540f b_pid 1 prtb 101param 000258 7235200 Digits Ident 12000257 7235250 Dialdig ACK_CALL->Dialdest00257 7250250 Dialdest TimeOut00258 7250250 E1CCSackout TimeOut|CANCEL ->BUSY. In this casemessages were generated for ports 257 and 258.

If option "SOmes" was validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "GEN" will appear in the debug file: GEN COADA 6 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:19:10 SysDay 2

GEN Run60sec 6872131 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN Local Time Wday 03 Mday 07 Date 07-04-04 Hour 11:20:11 SysDay 2GEN Run60sec 6465996 us Tcalls 15 Tspech 0 Dcalls 1 Dspech 0 Arelease1,Brelease 0GEN COADA 5 TRI 145 TRA 5 CPS 508 CPL 256 DTMF 0 R2 0 CH 0 CMD 0

If option "comOAM" is validated in the creation of debug mask then messagesstarting with "OAM" will appear in the debug file:OAM ADD CARD 16 CAT 4003 (this is a message which indicates that the card16 was added to the gateway. Value "4003" is a category which describes thetype of card.)

Syslog - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") the debugmessages can be sent to a selected IP address. This Syslog is an UNIX-like filefeature that allows logging of debug messages and sending them to a remotemachine. The destination IP address is written on target in the file"/etc/syslog.conf". All logged messages will contain the identification of thegateway (you enter the identification in the field "Equipment IP").

The type of syslog messages is chosen from the "Facility" list: "LOG_USER","LOG_LOCAL0", "LOG_LOCAL1", "LOG_LOCAL2", "LOG_LOCAL3","LOG_LOCAL4", "LOG_LOCAL5", "LOG_LOCAL6" and "LOG_LOCAL7".

syslog_alarms - when the option is checked the alarm messages are sent tothe syslog destination;

syslog_cfg - when the option is checked then any changes made upon gatewayconfiguration will be also sent to the syslog destination;

Syslog mask - is similar to debug mask. This option establishes for which item("Port Activity", "ComCCS", "SOmes", "comUNIX" and "comOAM") the syslogmessage will be generated. Click on "..." button and the next window showsup, allowing you to select the items which will be included in the syslog.

SNMP - if you activate this option (by checking the box "Activate") alarms canbe sent as traps to a selected IP address ("IP destination"). The user canchoose the type of the trap (default value is 6 - "Entreprise Specific"), thecommunity name (default value is "public"). For an alarm appearance - thevalue sent is 0, and for an alarm disappearance is 1. You can allow thattogether with the trap containing the 0 / 1 value, a second trap with the alarmtext specification to be sent. The OID of traps are derived from the specifiedOID ("1.3.6.1.4.1.x")

Name - this field is used as a prefix for the names of different files (alarm,billing, activity, log and ASR) created by the gateway's application. If youleave this field empty, then the name of these files is given by the current dayand an extension (for example "12-01-05.tax" is the billing file created on the12th January 2005). If the "Name" field is filled then the names of these fileswill be given by the name you have typed, concatenated with the current dayand the extension. For example if you type "Topex", the billing file created on12-01-05 will be named "Topex12-01-05.tax".

3.6. Direction - Editing directions namesBy clicking the "Directions names " icon (" ") a window for editing directionsname will be shown listing the directions name. Depending of the gatewaymain application there is a maximum of 20 OR 250 directions. The “Directions” are groups of inbound or outbound trunks that have commonrouting characteristics. To ensure adequate routing of calls, you must assignone or more trunks to each direction.

To edit a direction name, you select the name of the direction you want to editand double click the name. The following window "Edit direction name" will beshown:

The direction name must be a unique identifier - an alphanumeric text(digits/letters) of maximum 19 characters long. The first character must not bea digit. The direction name must not contain inside the character space " ".Otherwise an error message will be shown:

3.7. Calls direction - Defining the directions table

Click on the icon button "Calls direction" (" ")to open up the window fordefining the table with call directions. There is a maximum of 20 or 250directions (trunk groups).

At the bottom of this window - there are two buttons named "DIR IP InSettings..." and "DIR IP Out Settings". The first one is used to control theincoming access into the TOPEX equipment. The second one is used toestablish the VoIP outgoing destinations.

To edit a direction parameters double click on it and the next window "Edit calldirections parameters" will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Insert" and "Insert_Id"fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "Signaling" 4 characters and for "Signaling2"8 characters.

Name - the name of the direction (cannot be edited here);Type - can be PORT or DIR and specifies how that direction is addressed. Theassociated list contains two strings "PORT" and "DIR". A value of "255"indicates that the direction is ignored; when the "255" value is assigned to adirection - then the entire line will be displayedin white color. The name of thedirection which has "255" assigned to "Type" field will be displayed in red colorin the list used to assign a direction for each kind of port and also in all placesin which the destination will be a direction name.Overflow -overflow direction for the current direction. The calls will be re-routed to this overflow direction when the current direction is unavailable(completely busy or out of service); you choose a name of a defined directionfrom the corresponding list.Overflow 2 - second overflow direction for the current direction. The calls willbe re-routed to this second overflow direction when the first overflow directionbecomes unavailable; you choose a name of a defined direction from thecorresponding list. Restriction - the class of restriction applied to that direction; from the list anumber from 0 to 19 can be selected.Ignore - specifies how many digits are ignored from the numbers received onthat direction; the first x digits of the received number will be ignored. The listcontains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Insert - specifies the digits to be inserted in the number received on that

direction; The maximum allowed is 16 digits. If you don't want any digit to beinserted you must enter "---" for this field.Note: First the ignoring operation is performed and then the insertionoperation.Max_d - maximum number of digits that may be dialed on that direction.When the maximum number is reached the system will automatically send outthe call to routing analysis, without waiting to see if the caller part still sendsdigits. This option is especially useful when you define directions for which thenumber of figures to be dialed is well known (for example the numbers forcertain GSM networks). The list contains a range of values from 0 to 20 digits.Ignore_id - Ignores from the identity of the caller (Caller ID) the number ofdigits you have specified; The maximum allowed is 20 figures. The Ignorecommand is performed before the Insert command. The list contains a range ofvalues from 0 to 20 digits.Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID the specified figures; The maximum allowedis 16 digits.Max_id - The maximum number of digits from the Caller ID to be sent to thesubscriber who has been called. The list contains a range of values from 0 to20 digits.Signaling - contains 4 digits with shape 'xyzw' with the following significance:

Digits Purpose

x (digit 1)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x1000)

DIRCHECKCALLBACK- when this bit is setthen for an incomingcall on this directionthe callback table willbe analysed with thereceived identity(caller identity)

bit 3 (mask 0x8000)

DIRMODULECDMA -when this bit is set allGSM ports placed onthe selected directionwill be treated asCDMA modules

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0100)

DIRTESTNET (used incase of a directionwhich contains GSMmodules) - when thisbit is 1 one then theoutgoing GSM modulewill be tested if it isregistered

DIRGOODASR - whenthis bit is set then a

y (digit 2)

bit 1 (mask 0x0200)

RELEASE message issent on ISDN with adelay of 5 secondswhen a congestionsituation isencountered on GSMpart. The call will waiton the specified timea free GSM resource.

bit 2 (mask 0x0400)

DIRCATCALL - whenthis bit is set then allcalls will be cut(stopped) on the GSMmodules for which areprogramming isnecessary (forexample when a SIMmust be changedbecause of an usedalgorithm)

bit 3 (mask 0x0800)

verify CLIR - whenthis bit is set then theCLIR setting is verifiedeach time after theCLIR setting is sentto a GSM module

z (digit 3)audio level (in range 0-7 dBm for the directions withGSM interfaces) where '0' is the biggest level valueand '7' the lowest value

w (digit 4)

Bit (from right to left) Interpretation

bit 0 (mask 0x0001)- when is set identityis received on selecteddirection

bit 1 (mask 0x0002)- when is set identityis sent on selecteddirection

bit 2 (mask 0x0004)

- establish thealgorithm forchanging SIM on GSMinterfaces (when notset, the algorithm forminimal cost is used(SIM selection by timeperiods). When thebit is set, the "loadbalancing algorithm" isused (equal usagetime for each SIM)

- by setting it, youallow coupling of ring-

bit 3 (mask 0x0008)back tone while dialingon the next link,before the called partyanswers

By pressing button "..." a window for setting "Signaling" field will appear:

Signaling2 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. One bit called "Transit Q.850" is used to transfer the Q.850 termination codefrom the GSM link back on the E1-ISDN link. These Q.850 codes are availableonly for the Siemens GSM modules. For Voxson modules and when the"Transit Q.850" option is not checked the main application is sending acongestion message for NO DIALTONE message and for a NO CARRIERreceived under 2 seconds. The BUSY message is also received from GSMnetwork and it is sent as it is. A NO CARRIER message received for a valuegreather than 2 seconds will be treated as a release from the GSM network.A second bit called "Load balancing algorithm on SIM index" is used to enablethe load-balancing algorithm ("equal load") on the SIMs that are alreadyselected by SIM index algorithm.

"Calculate Tax Pulses" - for each direction (group of trunks) for incoming calls,you can establish the calculating (and sending) of the tax pulses. The taxpulses will be generated according to rules you specify and will accumulate inthe billing files. In any case, the calculated tax pulses are saved in the files. Inthe case of an ISDN connection (E1-ISDN trunk) these pulses are also sentout, using ISDN - AOC messages. You must remember that the mask must beapplied to the direction to which E1-ISDN channels belong.Note: You can establish the prefixes that will be charged with billing pulses in“Routing Table”.

The "Search UP" and "Search Down" fields are used for establish a rule inwhich channels are selected - for example for a SS7 E1 trunk - the order inwhich channels are selected in very important - if the trunk is used in bothdirection then one side will choose channels from the first one - and the otherside from the last one.

The "Priority" field is useful in order to implement routes with the same prefixto have different priorities. For example - when a TOPEX softswitch is used toroute calls to several TOPEX gateways - then each outgoing direction will haveassigned a priority. The customer can assign higher priority to the machineswith higher traffic capabilities and performances. The lowest priority is 0 andthe higher is 9.

Signaling3,Signaling4,Signaling5 and Signaling6 - each one contain 8digits which will be fully used in further development.

Verifications are made for the fields that are involving insertion operation:"Insert" and "Insert_id". The allowed characters are digits from 0 to 9, "*","#", "f" and "F". Characters "\","/","-" and "." are ingored in saving process. Anerror message is displayed in case of an error.

By pressing "OK" you validate the settings for the "Signaling" field.

Note: If the field "Signaling" for a direction (for a record with type "DIR" ) ischanged by modifying "Receive identity","Send identity" or "Audio Level", thenall the GSM modules belonging to that direction will be re-programmed (reset)in order to properly activate the sending and the receiving of the identity. Alsothe audio level will be re-programmed. A confirmation message will bedisplayed as follows:

3.7.1. DIR IP Settingsa) DIRIPIN section - this section is used to perform direction settings for VoIPincoming calls.

By clicking the "DIR IP In Settings..." button in "Define calls direction" windowthe following configuration window will show up:

You can Add or remove (Del) records about incoming VoIP calls.

Here the user must allocate to each pair <protocol, IP range> a direction anda maximum number of incoming calls. The name of the direction can be one ofthe already defined directions, so it can be “MYVOIP” - the genericdirection used for group the VoIP channels or another direction if youwant to use ignore / insert features. If you use the generic MYVOIP name, allVoIp calls will be treated in the same way, but if you use speciffic directionnames, you can define different rules for different incoming IPs. This allowsyou to perform operations such ignoring / inserting digits on the incomingnumber or identity (see "Calls direction") like for ordinary calls.

Examples:SIP 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for SIP protocol calls areallowed from all IPs, and maximum 60 calls are allowedH323 0.0.0.0/0 MYVOIP 100 0 0 100 100 p 0 0 0- for H323 protocol also callsare allowed from all Ips, and maximum 60 calls are allowed

Note1: in the "IP field" you can complete either a single IP (such as192.168.144.57) or a range of IP values (for example "192.168.1.0/24"); If you use an IP without specifying the range, then calls are accepted just fromthat IP. It is the same as using range /32.For example if you use 192.168.1.0/24 then IPs allowed are 192.168.1.x;For example if you use 192.168.0.0/16 then IPs allowed are 192.168.x.x;For example if you use 192.0.0.0/8 then IPs allowed are 192.x.x.x;For example if you use 0.0.0.0/0 then IPs allowed are x.x.x.x (calls areallowed from all IPs!);

Note2: The maximum number of incoming calls controls the number ofsimultaneosly calls accepted from the specified IP. If you enter 0 (zero) in thefield “Max Calls”, this means no restrictions are placed upon the number ofincoming calls. The equipment will accept any number of calls.The default value is 100.

Proxy - must be enabled if the source IP is behind a NAT.Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination havedifferent codecs. This feature works only on the equipments supplied with aVoIP card (or there is a TOPEX slave machine with VoIP card).Congrate - this is the congestion rate. It should not be 0. The default value is1000.Maxrate - this parameter represents the total number of setup calls on asecond. It should not be 0. The default value is 1000.Prefix - this parameter was added in case when calls are coming with differentprefixes from the same IP source. In case of two such prefixes - the user canassign two different directions for the same IP source.Maxcost - this parameter will be used in further developments.

Nrdig - with this parameter - you can control the number of expected digits foreach call coming from the specified IP.Endcause - this field is the release code used when the received number has adifferent number of digits then the expected ones - "NrDig" value. The defaultvalue is 34.

b) DIRIPOUT section - this section is used to perform settings for outgoingVoIP calls.

Here the software application feature a possibility to allow overflow over an IPdirection. The user defines for each direction name a protocol (SIP or H323), adestination IP, a port used for signaling for example 1720 for H323 and 5060for SIP), the maximum number of outgoing calls.

In order to route a call on VoIP to a destination IP address - there are twopossibilities of setting in "Routing Table".- if you use "DIRIP" in "action" field then you can provide a VoIP protocol(SIP/H323) but just one IP.- if you use "DIR" in "action" field then you can provide a direction name (youdon't have any VoIP channel assign to that direction - because all VoIPchannels are assigned to "MYVOIP" direction). Here in "DIR IP OUT" section

you'll make the relation to an IP address and a VoIP protocol (SIP/H323).

- RTPProxy - must be enabled if the destination IP is behind a NAT.- Transcoding - must be enabled when the source and the destination hasdifferent codecs. The codec may be changed if, for instance if the destinationIP does “know” just one codec, so we must perform a transcoding;

- Priority - this parameter represents the priority of the direction. Thisparameter can be also set in "Signaling2" field in the direction definition("Define calls direction");

3.8. Routing table Click on the icon button "Routing table" (" ") to open the window with therouting table. You can define a maximum of 128 routing rules (also there aresituations in which the TOPEX machine can handle more routing records suchas 1024 or 4000 records). The user can consult the current settings of theTOPEX machine regarding the number of directions and routing records in thelicence window);

To add a routing rule to the table click the "Add" button. A new record will beadded at the bottom of the list (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To insert a new record over the selected record from the table the "Insert"button can be used (the new line will have an empty "Prefix" field).To delete a rule for routing select it from the list and then click the "Del"button (the deleted line will have an empty "Prefix" field).You can have the same prefix more then once - case in which you can use"Move" buttons to change the prefix order - for the same prefix - the upperline will have a greater priority than the lower one.To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

For several fields a text length limitations is used: for "Prefix","Insert" and"Insert_Id" fields a maximum of 16 digits, for "IP" 15 characters and 4 for"Signaling", "Tax" and "Port" fields.

Incoming direction - this parameter is used in case of using several routingrecords with the same prefix in order to make the difference between incomingsource. It have to be interpreted here as incoming source direction. A"DEFAULT" value means that there is not rule to be applied.Prefix - the routing digits (the first digits which are necessary to route a call)- if you leave empty the field the respective routing rule will Not be taken intoaccount at saving action; The maximum allowed is 16 digits;- inside a prefix string the value 'f' can be used to indicate any digit from '0' to

'9'. For example "1f2" means all prefixes from "102", "112" until "192". Thisfeature is very useful because it allows to reduce the number of records in therouting table.Action - the action to be taken: (there is a list with six strings: "PORT", "DIR","SERV","HUNT", "DIRIP" and "LCR".- PORT- the call will get out through the port specified in the 'Dest' list- DIR - the call will get out by the direction specified in the 'Dest' list- SERV - the call will get out through the service that was specified in the'Dest' list- HUNT - the call will get out through the hunting group that was specified inthe 'Dest' list;- DIRIP - in such a case the "Dest" field will be interpreted as VoIP protocol -SIP or H323. The user must provide destinations IP address and port (in casewhen the default values of 1720 for H323 and 5060 for SIP are not used).- LCR - the call will get out by analising the LCR table for the index specifyedin the "Dest" field. This field can take a value from 0 to 6. Each valuerepresents a rule to be applied in order to find a direction at the specifiedmoment.Dest - the destination may be:- a port number (in range 0-127)- a direction name specified in "Define directions names" (from the list)- a service number (from 0 to 19)- a number of a group of hunting (from 0 to 19);- an index to the LCR tableIgnore - the number of digits that will be ignored (omitted) from the digits(numbering) sent out through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert - Adds to the number sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits; Themaximum allowed is 16 digits;Ignore _Id - the number of digits that will be ignored from the Caller ID sentout through 'Dest'. There is a list with values from 0 to 20;Insert_id - Adds to the Caller ID sent out through 'Dest' the specified digits;The maximum allowed is 16 digitsIP - is used in the situation when "DIRIP" is used to fill the action field. It isthe remote IP address used to establish voice over IP connection.Port - is the number of port used in voice over IP signaling. It is used when"DIRIP" is specified in the action field.Signaling - contains 4 digits 'xyzw' with the following significance :

Digits

Bit (fromright to left) Interpretation

Alloc BSS - this option is used in thesituations when the ring-back tone

x (digit 1)

bit 3 (mask0x8000)

must be identified in order to declarethe call as answered. This option isuseful in cases when the gatewayapplication must make the differencebetween a call answered withoutring-back tone and a call answeredafter a ring-back tone. Additionalsoftware must be installed on thegateway.

bit 1 (mask2000)

Simulate Tax - is used in case of FXOjunction - in which the answer atdestination can't be recognized. Insuch a situation this option has to bevalidated. The call is considered asanswered as soon as the call is madeon output link.

bit 0 (mask0x1000)

Retry Attempt - when this bit is 1one retry attempt will be made incase of a first failure on thisdirection; when this bit is 0 no retryattempts will be made

y (digit 2)

Check Operator (mask 0x0800) - is used whenportability facility is desired. For each call, adatabase interrogation is performed. The portabilitydatabase can be located on the same gateway or onanother PC. Additional software must be installedon the gateway.

Restrict ID (mask 0x0400) - is used for SS7direction in order to indicate that the identity isrestricted. The identity can be hidden if in the routing record -the ignore identity field is put to maximum digitallowed - 20.

z (digit 3) enable to set the number of digits which are waitingto take the action specified in the field "Action"

w digit 4)enable to set the number of seconds in which digitsare waiting to take the action specified in the field"Action"

Value of 'z' can take values in range '0' to 'f' (where 'f' means 15 digits). Whena bigger number of digits is required, the value of 'y' may be used. A group of'yz' with values '10' means 16 digits.

By pressing button "..." when action="DIR" or "DIRIP", a window for setting"Signaling" field will appear:

The field called "Number of Seconds" can be filled with values from 0 to 15 andthe field "Number of Digits" with values from 0 to 20. A message error isshown when a bad value is inserted into the specified fields.

Note: there are situations when the "Computing Signaling Field"window will look different. When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "FLASHING", the window willlook like in the next image:

When the two specified fields have these values ("SERV", respectively "4"), theincoming calls will be forwarded to a "FLASING" tone. With the "Signaling"field you can specify actions about the tones heard by the incoming user:- "Connect To Music" - the gateway flashing tonality is provided to the

incoming call;- "Connect To DSP" - the tonality will be obtained from a DSP (with possiblevalues from 0 to 63);- "Loop" - the "Tx" and "Rx" sense are looped together;- "Quiet" - no tonality will be provided to the incoming call; the user will nothear anything;

The "Timer" field is used as follows: if a "0" value is used then the tonality willbe heard continously; otherwise the value will specify the amount of time onwhich the tonality will be played to the incoming call.

When "Action" field is "SERV" and "Dest" field is "PLAY_RELEASE", the windowwill look like in the next image:

The release cause for the prefix specified in routing table with action = "SERV"and destination = "PLAY_RELEASE" will be released with the cause specified in"Release Cause". A message to be played on such a situation can be alsorecorded and stored on the TOPEX equipment.

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=SELECT PORT" is used for testing thequality of voice through the two GSM modules from the gateway (as explainedin "Facilities-Commands" chapter).

The pair of settings "SERV" and "Dest=DISA" is used for DISA operation onISDN channels. For example a record could be:"Prefix = 8""Action = SERV""Destination = DISA""Ignore =1""Signaling = 0000"The meaning of this record is: calls are coming from ISDN with the prefix (firstdigit) '8'. This digit is deleted (because the value in the field "Ignore" is 1).DISA tone is provided. All those new digits, which are collected in DTMF tone,will be analyzed according to the routing table. If you want to be sure that allthe digits from the original number are deleted you can use instead "Ignore =20". If you want to force the call to be outputted only on a GSM direction, you can

have in the list starting with '8' the "Insert" field filled with the first digit of amobile call. For example "Insert = 0". Then, in the record for prefix "0" in therouting table you must set "Ignore =1" so one digit is deleted.Note: for a GSM port, DISA tone is provided from the GSM port by selectingthe appropriate setting in the "Category" zone.

Tax - type of billing. You can establish the prefixes that will be charged withbilling pulses in “Routing Table”. To can handle charging issues you mustchange the field “Tax”.

Prefix Action Dest. IP Port Ign Ins Ign_id Ins_id Signaling Tax

0 DIR GSM 0 0 0 00a4 110a

There are three methods (rules) for configuring calculation of tax pulse. Thefirst digit (the leftmost of the four) of “Tax” field is used to differentiatebetween those methods. Allowed values for the method are: 0 – no method, 1– method 1, 2 – method 2 and 3 – method 3.

Method 1)“1xyy” – upon answering the call is charged with “x” pulses. During the stateof conversation the call is charged with one pulses every “yy” seconds. So ifyou select “1” you must specify the number of pulses at response (10 in theexample below) and the time period for pulse generation (20 seconds in theexample below).

Method 2)“200x” – the calls are charged according to several zones and tariffs. Thezones are geographical areas where the tariff is the same. This kind oftaxation is performed by several fixed telephony (PSTN) operators. If youselect Method 2 you may change only the “Tariff Index” value.

The list of all zones and tariffs is defined in the next window, “Pulse calculationbased on Zones” that is displayed by pressing “…” button.

You can easily handle zones and tariffs.A maximum number of ten zones and four tariffs can be defined. In the image above you can notice the tariff allocation on each day of theweek.First, you have the day-tariff assignment. “day=>1,0” means that the tariff 0is applied on each “Monday”. The days of the week are allocated beginningwith Monday – 1 up to Sunday – 7. There is also an 8th day of the week, theholidays the first value is 8. These special days that begin with 8 are defined in“Define Holidays”

After day – tariff allocation the tariff – zone correspondence follows:- each line starts with a triplet “tariff=x,yy,zz”, where “x” is the number of thetariff and “yy-zz” is the time interval when the settings that follow are applied.- After the characters “tariff=x,yy,zz” come the ten columns, the zonesshowing time period when a pulse is generated. The temporization values arein msec, so if a value is “60000” this means 60 seconds

Method 3)“ 3xxx” – the calls are charged according with a tariff. This is an extension(refinement) of Method1. Besides the number of pulses upon answering andthe period for generating pulses, now you can specify also a period without taxpulses and the number of pulses per taxing period. This kind of billing is usedby several mobile telephony carriers. If you select method 3, you may changeonly the “Tariff Index” value. There are maximum 10 tariffs, so values for “Tariff Index” can be value from 0to 9.

The list of all tariffs is defined in the window “Pulse Calculation based onTariffs”, which is displayed by pressing the button “…”.

In the picture above, “Tariff1” is defined as follows:- one pulse is sent upon answering- then follows a one minute pause, for 60 seconds no pulses are sent- after 60 seconds one pulse is sent every 10 seconds.

Note. In the “Tax” field, there is also a facility for limiting the maximumduration of a call limit. For this, you select “4” for the value of the field“Method”. This is NOT really a method for calculating the charge for a call!

With this, you may impose a time limit for the call. The value for “Time” is inminutes, so the example above means that no calls longer that one hour willbe allowed.

SecondSign - here the user can specify in case of a SS7 route some

translations parameters as follows:

The first zone is related to "Nature of Address" information. We offer theposibillity to override the "Called Party" nature of address and "Calling Party"nature of address.The "Called Party" nature of address is changed by enabling the first twooptions "Check Called Party NAI" and "Override Called Party NAI".The original "Called Party NAI" - Subscriber,Unknown,National,Internationaland UK Specific - can be changed to "Override Called Party NAI" whichcontains the same list as the first one.

Moreover the "Calling Party NAI" can be override by selecting a value from"Override Calling Party NAI" and enabling the "Override Calling Party NAI"option.

The second zone named "Type of Media Required" - the route will be availablejust for the specified type of media.Possible values are "speech", "64k_unrestr" and "3K1Hz_audio".

The "Translation Occured" is to indicate for SS7 that a translation of numberhas occured

Ctime - this parameter establish the maximum call duration (in minutes). It issimilar to "Tax" method 4. If this value is set here (not 0) the "Tax" method 4will be ignored.

Search Mode - this parameter is used for routing in case of using routes withthe same prefix. In such a case a method for overflowing and dividing the

traffic between several routes must be provided. Each routes from such agroup must have "Retry Atempt" option in "Signaling field" (0x1000).

Overflow is performed if one of the following situations occurs:- when the call is routed on VoIP - the main application is checking if thenumber of simultaneously calls is greater then the maximum number of outputcalls established in diripout settings (see DIRIPOUT section).- when the call is dropped from the remote side with a release cause which isset for rerouting in "trafic.cfg". For example to reroute on congestion messagethe line "rerouteoncause 34 1" must be added in "trafic.cfg".

We assume this premise in the following explanations. This parameter is usedin conjunction with "Search Param" parameters:

SearchMode

SearchParam

Significance

ASR notused

the route will be choosenbased on ASR value

ACD notused

the route will be choosenbased on ACD value

Priority notused

The call will be routedbased on direction priority(direction specified in"dest" field).Calls from the routinggroup (with the sameprefix) will go mostly onthe direction with thehighest priority. If themaximum number of callsis reached (for examplefor a direction specified in"DIR IP OUT" settingswhen "Max Calls Out"value is passed

the route will be choosenfrom the first to the last

Down notused

one. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe first route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Up notused

the route will be choosenfrom the last to the firstone. Depending on theposition in routing tablethe last route from thegroup will have thehighest priority.

Circular notused

the route will be choosencirculary.

Percentspecifiesthepercent

Calls will be routed basedon percentage. The"Search Parameters"represents in this casethe percentage value. Theapplication running onTOPEX machine knows thenumber of calls on eachmachine.

Sign1 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

Sign2 - is used for a SS7 route for translating purposes: the "IN Category" canbe override. The “Computing Translation Parameters (for SS7 route)” isdisplayed by pressing the “…” button.

To override the incoming category - the "Check IN Category" and "Override INCategory" must be selected. In the "IN Catgory" list - you select the incomingcategory which will be replaced with "Override IN Category". The possiblevalues are: "unknown""op_french""op_english""op_german"

"op_russian""op_spain""op_rsrv1""op_rsrv2""op_rsrv3""notused""ord_subscr""prio_subscr""data_call""test_call""payphone""uk_oper_call""uk_admin_diverted"

Sign3 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development. Sign4 - contains 8 digits which will be fully used in further development.

3.9. LCR TableIf you click the appropriate icon the "LCR index table" (" ") window willappear, where the table with the 8 indexes of LCR rules is displayed. Eachindex includes information about the selected direction for specified timeintervals on each day of the week and even the days that were declarednational holidays (non-working days).

To edit a certain LCR index, double click on that index and the next windowwill be displayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears the informationis displayed by default for "Monday".

For each day of the week, a list shows up with the time periods (intervals) thatspecify the direction to be used. In the image above , for 00:00 until 24:00the direction "LOCAL" will be used. The periods are structured as hours andminutes separated by character ":". When the user modifies the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are filled with the line information: period "From" to"Until" and the current direction. Those values can be modify and validate byoption "Mod". If you select"the Add" option, a new line will be added in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of a declared name direction arenot saved in the "LCR" file. The format of the "LCR" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size. An example of LCR file content is as follows:

#---LCR INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_lcr day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min dir(%x)l 00 1 00:00 24:00 0l 00 1e 00:00 24:00 1l 00 20 00:00 00:01 fl 00 20 00:01 12:01 11l 00 20 12:01 14:01 13l 00 20 14:01 23:01 al 00 20 23:01 24:01 9l 07 13 00:00 24:00 1l 07 4 00:00 11:45 1l 07 4 11:45 12:23 8l 07 4 12:23 12:31 1l 07 4 12:31 18:50 8

Each line is containing a letter 'l', a LCR index number (for example 00 and07), a mask (each day of the week has an identifier constant (Mon=0x01Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and finally an index to

specify the direction used. This is the index in the "Directions Names" table (avalue from 0 to 19).Note: if the same periods and the same direction are used on different days(but for the same LCR index) then instead of two records in the file will bewritten only one record with the field "mask" completed by an OR operationbetween those days. For example "1e" is used to identify Tuesday, Wednesday,Thursday and Friday.

3.10. Classes of restrictions If you select "Restriction Classes" from the icon (" ") then the window"Restriction Classes" will show, allowing you to define certain classes ofrestrictions for the calls.

The window "Restriction Classes" includes 20 classes with 20 restrictions each.To edit (change) the restrictions from a class, double click on that class. A newwindow will appear, called "Edit restriction classes", as shown below. Using thiswindow you can establish up to 20 restrictions for each class.

Rules for establishing restrictions:- each restriction has 8 charactersThe characters can be any figure or the letters 'a' or 'f' - 'a' represents the figure 0 (zero). For instance a subscriber with therestriction aa000000 won't be able to make calls started with digits "00"(international phone calls).- 'f' represents "any figure". For example, if you define the restrictionf0000000 for a certain port it won't be able to call any number - it will be ableonly to receive phone calls.- '0' signifies the end of the restriction rule. If in a restriction field there areeight "0" figures this means that no restriction has been defined for that field.- a class can inherit one or more restriction classes. For instance, if in a classwe have the restriction 000000xx, where xx is the hexadecimal valuecorresponding to another class of restrictions, then our class will inherit all therestrictions that have been defined in the xx class, to which there will beadded the restrictions defined in the current class.

3.11. Table with indexes for selection of active SIM cardsIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "SIM card index table" window willappear, where a table with the 4 indexes of SIM cards is displayed. Each indexincludes information about the SIM selected for each hour interval of each dayof the week and even the days that were declared national holidays (non-working days)

To edit a SIM index double click on that index and the next window will bedisplayed on the screen:

Note: when the dialog window for "Table modification" appears, by default theinformation is displayed for "Monday".

A list is displayed with the periods (intervals) when the SIM card (1,2,3 or 4)can be used. The periods are structured in hours and minutes separated by ":"character. When the user changes the selection in the list, the fields which are located atthe bottom of the window are automatically filled with the line information:period "From" to "Until" and the active SIM card. These values can be modified

and validated by option "Mod". If user selects "Add" option a new line will beadded in the list.The "Del" option is used to delete a record from the list.

The periods are checked before adding or modifing operation. An errormessage is generated if the character ":" is not preserved or the values usedare wrong (hours or minutes).

The lines that are containing "255" instead of an active SIM card are not savedin the "simindex" file. The format of the "simindex" file is compacted in orderto have a smaller size.

An example of simindex file content is as follows:

#---SIM INDEX FILE---#Day type Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10 Sat=0x20Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80#s index_sim day_type_bitmap(%x) start_hour:min end_hour:min sim(%x)#---HOLYDAYS---#h holydayday holydaymons 00 1f 00:00 06:00 2s 00 17 06:00 20:00 0s 00 1f 20:00 21:30 3s 00 1f 21:30 24:00 0s 00 8 06:00 20:00 1s 00 60 00:00 24:00 0s 00 80 00:00 12:00 0s 00 80 12:00 24:00 1s 01 ff 00:00 06:00 0s 01 ff 06:00 12:00 1s 01 ff 12:00 18:00 2s 01 ff 18:00 24:00 3s 02 ff 00:00 24:00 1s 03 ff 00:00 24:00 0h 01 01h 01 01h 25 12h 08 01

Each line that specifies a sim index begins with the letter 's', then follows aSIM index number (00, 01, 02 and 03), a mask (each week day has anidentifier constant (Mon=0x01 Tue=0x02 Wen=0x04 Thu=0x08 Fri=0x10Sat=0x20 Sun=0x40 Holyday=0x80), periods used to define an interval and aSIM card value. In the file the active sim card is written from 0 to 3. In alllocations in the "gwconfig" software values from 1 to 4 are used for SIM cards

(on GSM holders values 1,2,3 and 4 are shown).Note: if the same time periods and the same active SIM card is used ondifferent days (for the same SIM index) then instead of two records in the filewill be written only one record with the field "mask" completed by an ORoperation between those days. For example "1f" is used to identify Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday.

Note: the records starting with 'h' character are used for holidays definition.

3.12. Defining the holidaysIn order to define the non-working days with special GSM tariffs, click on theappropriate icon (" ") to show the window named "Holidays Changing". Thiswindow shows a default list with the national holidays and you can edit thelist, add or remove non-working dates.

To add a holiday in the list click the "Add" button. Once a record has beenadded you have to double click on it in order to be available for editing, asshown in the window below.

To delete a holiday from the list, select the date from the list and click the"Del" button.

3.13. Callback TableIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "Callback table" window will appear:

Callback services assure lower costs for the mobile subscribers: from a mobilephone you just call the Topex gateway and hang up. The software checksidentity on incoming calls and if the telephone numbers are in its databasecalls them back. You don't have to pay anything for the connection! This isvery useful for mobile users in the field that have prepaid cards, which featurean expensive tariff. They can ring the Topex gateway located at headquarters,

and the equipment will call them back, put them into connection with othermobile subscriber or allow them to send e-mail messages via SMS.

Callback table is containing the following fields: "Identity", "Action","Callback", "CallTo" and "MailTo".

Callback has several implementations (depending on the "Action" field whichcan take the values "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA"):- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACK" then the caller party will becalled back. The back call is sent to the phone number specified in "Callback"field (can be the same number with the number specified in the "Identity" fieldor a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phone number, then thecaller will be called and put into connection with this phone number;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "CALLBACKONSMS" then the caller partywill be called back. The callback is sent to the phone number specified in"Callback" field (can be the same number with the number specified in the"Identity" field or a different number). If "CallTo" field is filled with a phonenumber then the caller will be called and put into connection with this phonenumber;

- if the caller identity of an incoming SMS is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "SMSTOMAIL" then the text content of theSMS will be sent to the IP address which is specified in the field "MailTo";

- if the caller identity of an incoming call is found in the "Callback table" andthe field action contains the mask "DISA" then a "DISA" tone will be providedto the caller part; The subscriber who ringed to the TOPEX gateway is calledback and receives DISA tone (if the field "CallTo" does not contain anotherphone number). "Direct Inward Services Access' allows the mobile subscriberto get access to private telephonic facilities (he can dial numbering).

To edit a routing rule double click it and the editing window will show up:

To edit the "Action" field the button "..." must be pressed. The followingoptions are available "CALLBACK", "CALLBACKONSMS", "SMSTOMAIL" and"DISA".

Note: Callback calls are recorded in the SMS files.

3.14. MTP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "MTP Configuration" window willappear:

In this window the signaling point (SP) definitions are performed:- "SP definition (own codes)" - this is the zone where the own (gateway)signaling points are defined. Each "SP" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each SP the "Code" and "Flag" must be set. For"Flag" a value of "1" is indicating that this node is an STP (signaling transferpoint). - "Adjacent SP definition (LinkSet)"- this is the zone where the adjacentsignaling points are defined. Each "Linkset" is enabled by marking it in theappropriate checkbox. For each linkset the associated "SP" and the "Code"must be set. The SP list is filled with the SP values enabled in "SP definition(own codes)" zone.- "Destinations" - this is the zone where the destinations are defined. Each"Destination (Connection ID)" is defined by enabling the appropriate checkbox"Dest" field. The first four destinations are filled based on "Linkset" definitions- "SP" and "Code" fields are completed directly if the correspondance "Linkset"is defined. User can define indirect routes using the "Priority" fields. For eachpriority, the linkset is set as follows: there are three priorities - represented as

three columns: "Priority 1", "Priority 2" and "Priority 3". Priority 0 is reservedfor the direct route between the own SP and the destination. For each priorityand for each destination, user can select one of the enabled linksets (thelinkset list is filled with the linkset values enabled in "Adjacent SP definition(LinkSet)" zone). For each destination (with a number greater than 3) theassociate "SP","Code", "Priority" and "Linkset" can be set. The SP list is filledwith the SP values enabled in "SP definition (own codes)" zone.

Note: the own SP code, the adjacent SP code and the nonadjacent SP codemust have the same "NI" field.

Note: the ">>" button is used for destinations from 16 to 31.

Note: the zone "Code value" is used to automatically convert a hex code usedto define a signaling point to the other known formats: "Code 2-3-8-3" and"Code NI-SP". The user must point with the mouse inside a "Code" edit field.The fields from the "Code value" zone will be filled with values . The option"Apply" is used to fill back the original "Code" edit field (an <ENTER" action onone of the fields from the "Code value" zone will cause a recalculation to beperformed).

Examples:1) to declare an own SP0 code "8b38", non-STP - check "SP0" in the "SPdefinition (own codes)" zone and then click the mouse on the edit field locatedin the right side of the "SP0" checkbox - you can directly complete the pointcode or you can edit the code value in the "Code value" computing zone. Hereyou can input the code in different formats. When you finish you press<ENTER> key and "Apply" button. You select "0" in the "Flags" field. 2) to declare an adjacent destination code (code "8103") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0- check "Linkset 0", select '0' in "SP" list and fill the point code valuewith "8103".3) to declare a non-adjacent destination code (code "8547") - to the SP0 usinglinkset 0 on Connection ID 4. Select "Dest 4" checkbox, select "0" from "SP"list, complete code field and select linkset on the highest priority available box.4) to declare an indirect route (linkset 1) to an adjacent destination code"8103" (linkset 0) - select linkset 1 in the highest priority available - on therow starting with "Dest 0".

3.15. ISUP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" ") the "ISUP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "ISUP Configuration" window allows the allocation of the circuit groups (inrange from 0 to 7). - each circuit group is enabled by the option "Group x", where "x" is from 0 to6. - "Connection ID" can take values from 0 to 31. The " Connection ID" fields arecompleted in "MTP Configuration" window displayed after the user selects " "icon. - "First Port" contains the first port from a SS7 card. - "First CIC" (Circuit Identification Codes (CIC)) and "Range" are used to defineall CIC values.

The SS7 trunks can be placed on card 16 (trunk 2), 17 (trunk 3), 32 (trunk 6)and 33 (trunk 7). Ports for card 16 are in range 128-159, for card 17 in range160-191, for card 32 in range 256-287 and for card 33 in range 288-319. Forexample the field "First Port" must be filled with the value 256 for an SS7 cardinstalled on card 32. The range is establishing the total number of channelsfrom the field "First Port". For a single SS7 card the range field will be 32. Iftwo consecutive SS7 cards are used (for example 32 and 33) the range cantake the value "64".

3.16. VoIP ConfigurationIf you click the appropriate icon (" "), the "VOIP Configuration" window will

appear:

The "VOIP Configuration" window contains two zones: "VOIP" and "H323". Thetype of protocol (H323 or SIP) is choosed from the "Protocol Type" field. Whenthe "OK" option is clicked - the OAM application will load the settings fromVoIP zone and depending upon "Protocol Type" selection - the settings fromH323 or SIP zone will be saved.

For the VoIP zone you can change the following settings:- Version: with or without RTP transcoding. Transcoding means that ourequipment performs conversion of codecs, that is the codecs used on theoutput are different from the ones used on the incoming call. For an incomingcall from VoIP that goes out also through VoIP, the RTP channel is processedby the multiACCESS/QUTEX/EONES equipment and transcoding may beperformed. No transcoding means that the equipment performs VoIP signaling,but does not process the RTP channel, it goes directly from source IP todestination without going through the Topex equipment. In this casetranscoding cannot be performed.The conversion of codecs may be required if the caller uses codec g711, butthe destination supports only g728, so the Topex equipment must perfomtranscodig. But if the called party also supports g711, no transcondig is

required, and the RTP channel from the caller may be connected directly todestination.

- "PG Card IP Address" - the IP address of the processor card (PG card).Thisfield is supposed to be filled with the same value as the ones you havespecified in the "Network settings - IPADDR" (icon "Gateway Parameters").

- "VoIP Card IP Address" - the IP address of the VoIP card. There are two situations concerning the PG Card IP address and respectivelythe VoIP card IP address.1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in a LAN, then both addresses must bein the range IP addresses of that LAN. In this case the following ports must beopened if a firewall is used: the ports declared for RTP when the VoIP card wasinstalled (for example 3000-3063; to see the range of ports assigned for RTP,go to window "H323 Settings" - window which is described on the bottom ofthe window in the area called "IP Card Settings"). RTP ports are UDP and mustbe forwarded to the IP address of the VoIP card.The ports 1718, 1719 and1720 are TCP and they must be forwarded to the IP address of the processorcard (PG).2) when the PG card is using a public IP address then the VoIP card must alsouse a public IP address.

- "VoIP Card MAC" - this value represent the MAC address assigned to theVoIP card. This value is preset or is given by TOPEX.

- "Public IP Address" - when the TOPEX gateway is used inside a LAN andwhen the H323 signaling is performed with a machine from the internet, thenin this field you enter the external IP address of the LAN gateway. When H323signaling is performed with a machine located inside the same LAN, then inthis field you enter the same value as in the "VoIP Card IP Address" field.

- "IP GATEWAY MAC" - this field is filled in case of making RTP connectionsto a machine which is NOT in the same address range. This field will disappearin future developments (the MAC address will be obtained automatically in allcases, so you no longer need to fill in the value for the remote MAC).1) when the VoIP gateway is installed in the same LAN, then a program(MSPD) running on the Topex equipment automatically detects and fills theMAC of the target gateway. You will enter in the field “MSPD Parameters” thecommand “--no-gw”. This means no outside access is required. 2) when the remote VoIP gateway is on the the public IP address, then youmust first use an utility (MSPD executable) to search and find out the MAC ofthe target gateway, then you must type this MAC address in the field “IPGateway MAC”.

- “Audio Codecs”: a list of pairs <codec no><packetization time>, which areNOT delimited by commas. This is the list of codecs to be used by the RTPprotocol. VoIP uses several different codecs, having different parameters (bitrate and complexity).The codecs used by Topex EONES are coded with one ortwo digit numbers, such as 0 for g711u, 4 for g723.1, 8 for g711 or g711a, 15for g728 and 18 for g729. The packetization time is usually 20 (milliseconds), but it may be as long as 30msec or as short as 10 msec. For a specified codec, like g729, the number ofchannels supported depends of the packetization time. Increasing thepacketization time reduces the packetization overhead, so when going form 20msec to 10 msec the number of voice channels goes down form 60 to only 40.

- "Enable VAD" - this checkbox option allows the "Voice Activity Detection"facility to be used. Typical voice conversations can contain up to 35 to 50 percent silence. OnVoIP networks, both conversation and silence is packetized. VAD sends out RTPpackets only when voice is detected, thus decreasing bandwidth by 30-50 %.This way the Topex EONES will send voice packets only when it has voiceinput. When it detects silence on RTP, it will send to the other side a “silencepacket” that use less bandwidth and allows to be interpreted for generatingcomfort noise.- “LOG on MSPD” – enables logging on MSPD. The name of the log file will be“day-month-year_mspd.log”,such as 08-03-06_mspd.log

- "Port MSPD" - MSPD is a program that controls the VoIP, in this field youcan enter the number of the port to be used by MSPD, such as 9677 that is thedefault. - “RTCP” – RTP Control Protocol - This checkbox establishes if the equipmentuses or not the control protocol for RTP.The control protocol for RTP, RTCP is used for control and diagnostic on RTPsessions. Like RTP, RTCP typically runs on top of UDP and is defined in theIETF RFC1889. RTCP is a companion protocol to RTP that is used to maintainQuality of Service . RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodicallysend each other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

DTMFThis configuration area establishes the means of sending out DTMF in the RTPpackets. There are two methods, transmission of DTMF out of band in RTPpackets, or sending out INFO messages (as telephone-events). In SIP protocol,the INFO method would be used for the carrying of mid-call signalinginformation along the session signaling path (for example to send the DTMF

digits generated during a SIP session)SIP INFO method can be used by SIP network elements to transmit DTMFtones out-of-band in a reliable manner independent of the media stream. Ithas advantages of reliabilty (the tones are not affected by low-rate codecs), ofProvides DTMF tone generation for SIP requests and for Enables transport ofDTMF digits along the signaling path.The options available are:- “DTMF-RTP”: if you chek this options, you must also complete the Parametersfield to the right

- “DTMF INFO”: you select to send out DTMF tones as INFO messages- “None” : the sending of dual-tone multifrequency signals is not treated bythe Topex equipment.

Example for DTMF-RTP option: dtmfRTP 101 100 1

The syntax is : - payload type for DTMF in RTP (according to RFC 2833)- payload type for DTMF in RTP redundancy- redundancy scheme: 0 or 1, where 0=IETF and 1=AAL2

For the H323 zone the user can change:- enable "Gatekeeper" - enabling this option will allow using a gatekeeper.Type the IP address of the gatekeeper in the "Gatekeeper" field. The H323negociation will be performed by connecting at the specified gatekeeper IPaddress. If you check the "Gatekeeper" option, the fields "User", "Password"and "ID" must also be filled in. They will be used in the login procedure.

- "Prefixes" - is used to inform the gatekeeper about the digits routed by thegateway on that link. This value is the same with the "prefix" establshed in"Routing Table" to route the call on the VoIP card.

- "Trace H323" - allows the generating of an H323 log file, which will besaved on the HDD of the Topex gateway The name of the file is given bycurrent day.

- enabling "Fast Start" - this option determines the method used for codecsand voice activity detection negotiations. If the options is enabled, then bothcodecs and VAD will be negociated on call setup or on response by usingadditional parameters. When this option is disabled, then the negociation isperformed after response by using the standar H245 protocol. This negociation

will delay the start of the media session. If you enable "Fast Start”, thestarting of the session will be faster.

Examples:1) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from the same LAN.

Input data: the address of the PG card is “192.168.244.70”, the address of theVoIP card is “192.168.244.123” (MAC address “00:52:C2:40:3A:12”).Outgoing calls beginning with the prefix “0” will be routed through the “VOIP”direction to address “192.168.244.76” as shown in the next image.

PG Card IP Address – 192.168.244.70

VoIP Card IP Address –192.168.244.123

Public IP Address – 192.168.244.123(because H323 signaling is performedwith an IP address from the samerange, here is filled the same addresslike in the “Voip CARD IP address”

MSPD Parameters – “- -v –-no-gw –mem 16”. The log option is fixed andlog file is “/mnt/app/out/mspd.log”.Because the other machine is in thesame LAN the option "--no-gw" used.

Port use for communication betweenH323 and gateway main application –9010.

Codecs – “g729b,g729”

VAD – disabled

Fast Start – enabled

Gatekeeper - not used

Trace H323 – log on H323 enabled

Routing table: the gateway will route calls starting with "5" and "6" to the“VOIP” direction and H323 signaling will be started by connecting to“192.168.244.76” (remote machine).

2) TOPEX gateway with VoIP installed in a LAN and making VoIP callswith a machine from internet.

The difference regards the “Public IP Address” which will be set with the LANgateway external address. The firewall of the LAN gateway must allow portforwarding for the ports which were already presented in this document.

3) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be filledwith the same value - meaning the external IP address of the VoIP card.

4) TOPEX gateway with one external IP for PG card and anotherexternal IP for VoIP card. In this case a gatekeeper is used (optiongatekeeper enabled and an IP address specified).

In this case the “Voip Card IP Address” and “Public IP address” will be thesame. The H323 signaling will be initiated for a call with the gatekeeper(instead of the IP address taken from the routing table). For login (identifing)to the gatekeeper field “Users”, “Password” or “ID” are used. If in routing tablethe prefix for routing calls on VoIP is “0” the in “Prefixes” field you must setalso “0”.

3.17. AlertsThis option (" ") establishes sending out the alerts, recording of ASR valuesand enables several debug and testing functions. Alerts are used in case ofalarms or if ASR values fall below a selectable level.

In case of occurrence of different pre-programmed events, the TOPEX systemcan issue warnings (alerts) and also send out a description of the events. Thealarms may be sent to the administrator of the equipment in three ways:- by e-mail (a warning message that has attached the alarm files)- by SMS- as a call on the mobile phone of the operator (several beeps)

The "Alerts" command shows the window for setting up the parameters for the

alerts:

The zone called "Alert zone" which is used to activate (enable) thetransmission of the alerts. For activate the alerts the option ("Alert activated")must be checked.

The field "ASR alert limit" is used to set a level for activating ASR alerttransmission when ASR value falls below the specified value. The ASR value isread at time interval specified in "Time period for checking". To validate theASR alert a minimum number of calls must be set. Of course, if during the

specified time period you have only one call, and it is not connected, this won'tbe relevant for ASR, so it is not taken into account.

There is the possibility to validate the type of alarms for which alerts aretransmitted: "CCS-ISDN", "ASR" and "ALL".

For testing alerts purposes you can use the field "Timer for testing alerts". Fora "0" value in this field the alerts will be sent only in real situations. Fortesting purposes a non-zero value (specyfing the number of minutes) must beused.

"DIAL alert" is used if you want the alerts to be sent via phone calls. You mustenter the phone number to be called upon alert. You may also set the numberof beeps (1,2,3 etc) to be sent out in case of alert. By means of this variablenumber of beeps an operator can determine from which TOPEX system thealert is coming from: gateway A sends one beep, gateway B send two beepsand so on.

"SMS alert" is used in case of alerts by sending a SMS message to a mobilephone. You must enter the phone number to be alerted by SMS. You can alsochange the content text of the SMS alert message. This SMS alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by pressing "File..." option to the right ofthe "SMS alert" area.

"MAIL alert" is used in case of sending e-mail alert messages to an emailaddress. In case of activation of this kind of alert the following e-mail relatedparameters must be set: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject","Server" and "Port". You also have the facility to send the alert message with the current alarm filefor the TOPEX gateway as an attachment. The text of the e-mail alert messagecan be edited in a edit type window by clicking "File..." option to the right ofthe "MAIL alert" area. The following fields must not contain spaces inside thevalue: "Gateway address", "MailFrom", "MailTo", "Subject" and "Server";

"SMS2MAIL" - this option is used to forward all incoming SMS to an emailaddress. This option is placed here because it is working together with thesettings estabished in "MAIL alert" zone. The SMS content is sent to theaddress specified in "MailTo" field.

The "ASR Reading Parameters" zone is for establishing the ASR readingprocedure. First, to activate the ASR reading process the option "Validate ASRreading" must be checked. Then the interval (in minutes) for reading andsaving ASR values is set in "ASR read period" field. Please note that this valuemust be the same with the value entered above in the field "Time period for

checking" used for ASR alerts.

The "Debug Parameters" zone is used for the debugging process. This facility isintended to help debugging the TOPEX system: log files for the equipment arecreated and respectively displayed. If the "Validate Debug" box is checked thenall activities on ports specified in range "From" and "To" is displayed. If"Validate Saving" is also checked, this information will be saved in log files ontarget.

The "GSM" zone is used for:1)- "CELL, LEVEL and Channel" interrogation. The GSM scanning is launchedby checking the option "Validate Cell Interrogation". The "GSMScan" value isthe value in seconds at which each GSM module is searched upon cell, leveland channel. If a call is passing through a GSM module and if the "GSMScan"value is reached, the interrogation upon the mentioned values will be doneafter the call ending.2)- the reset of the "Load Sim" values - the user can enable the option"Validate Reset of Load Sim values" and specify the "Day and Time" at whichthose time of SIM using values are resetting. User will fill the time moment in"hour minut day" format. These values are separated by space character. The"Load Sim" values can be reset in each day at the specified time "hour minut"if the "day" is filled with "0". The "Load Sim" values can be reset on eachmonth at the specified time "hour minut" if the "day" is filled with the desiredday. If one of the values "hour" and "minut" are wrong then the reset will notoccur.

There are the following text limits at the fields: "ASR alert limit", "ASR readperiod", first port and last port - 3, "Time period for checking" - 4, "Minimumcalls number" - 4, "Timer for testing alerts" - 3,"Beep Number Identifier" - 2,"Gateway address","Mail From", "Mail To", "Subject" and "Server" - 40.

"Simserver zone" - is used in case of a multiACCESS/QUTEX equipment whichis working with GSM cards simserver ready. The "simserver" zone contains anactivation checkbox "Activate", the IP of the simserver and the port to connectto (default value is 13001). Finally the "Name" is the gateway identificationname, name which is also set in simserver to recognize the gateway client.

3.18. Test callsFor enabling test calls you can use the icon"Test calls" (icon " "):

In "TESTING calls" window is enabled to define call tests which can beperformed by the gateway. Test calls must be first enabled with the option"run 1" (to disable test calls a line with option "run 0" must be used). For eachtest call two parameters will be used: "pause xx" and "con yy" which representthe time period between two attempts (xx) and the time to keep the call (yy).After the record preceded by "#nr" the test calls definition follows: each linewill contains the number to be dialed, the identity of the call, the caller portand a value of 0 or 1. With value '0' in a record the number will be firstanalyzed with the definition of the direction (the direction that contains thespecified port) and after that will be analyzed according to the routing table.With a value of '1' in a record, the number will be sent out directly from theport.

For example a test record can be "12345 101 257 1". It means an outgoingcall with number '12345" and identity "101' is sent on port 257.

Note1) a good method for testing calls and to analyse the routing process is toadd a subscriber card and to add a record in the "TESTING calls" window withan installed port from the subscriber card (that port must have also the optionof making calls). For example if the card 15 is a subscriber card then a recordfor port "120" will be:"0700000000 120 120 0"Note2) for making test calls on E1 trunks or GSM cards an example was givingbefore:

"12345 101 257 1",For sending the number digit by digit a value "0000" must be used to fill the"Signaling" field for the direction that contains the test port.Note3) test calls are very useful in finding the available number of GSMchannels. Test calls are simultaneously generated towards the vocalmessaging. After the test calls sequence is started, the number of connectedcalls can be observed by using "Live monitoring" facility.

Moreover a new method can be use to generate non-simultaneously calls - thetime delay between attempts and the time for keeping the calls connected wasthe same for all test calls from the list. This new method allows the user tocreate a list of test calls in order to have variable time delays between them.Also, not all calls from the list are launched at the same time.

This new method includes the following parameters: (the lines beginning with"#" are comments, used just to show you the structure of commands for testcalls):#traffic_run 1/0 nr_simultaneous_calls(max 4 calls) call_typetraffic_run 0 1 test#traffic_idle t_idle(seconds of idle time betwen calls) rand_add(random addedseconds)traffic_idle 10 5#traffic_sel t_sel(seconds of selection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_sel 5 3#traffic_con t_con(seconds of connection time for each call) rand_add(randomadded seconds)traffic_con 1 2#traffic_call nr id#traffic_call 5113 100traffic_call 5112 100traffic_call 5777 100

You must notice that each line contains the prefix "traffic_" concatenated with"run", "idle", "sel" ,"con’ and "call". In order for this new method to work, theuser must create a direction with the name "SENDCALL" (icon "DirectionsNames"). The "Type" field must be completed with "DIR" in "Calls directions".All those test calls are generated from this fictive direction "SENDCALL".

- "traffic_run 0 1 test" – to disable this second method for launching calls: youcan type "0" after "traffic_run". To enable the method – you must type "1".

The second number specified in this line is the number of test calls that can begenerated at the same time (in the example above it is "1"). The list with the

test calls is described by the lines beginning with "trafic_call".

The "test" word is used to specify the tonality heard by the called part (in thiscase a flashing tone).

- "traffic_idle 10 5" – specifies the time to wait before to launch a new testcall. The first digit (in this case 10) means the number of seconds to wait. Tothis value you may add the next value (it can be present or not ) which meansa range for a random value. The random number can be between zero andthat value. In the above example, the random range of five means that therandom value is between 0 and 5. Consequently, the waiting time will getrandom values between 10 (10+0) and 15 (10+5).

- "traffic_sel 5 3 " – specifies the value used to simulate the selection time fortest calls. Here also the first digit (in this case 5) means the starting numberof seconds to simulate the selection time. To this start value may be added thenext digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,three means a random value between 0 and 3. Thus the number used tosimulate the selection time for test calls will have get random values between5 (5+0) and 8 (5+3).

- "traffic_con 1 2" – specifies the value used to simulate the conversation timefor test calls. The first digit (in this case 1) means the starting number ofseconds to simulate the conversation time. To this start value may be addedthe next digit (which can be or not present) for randomizing. In this example,two means a random value between 0 and 2. Hence, the value used tosimulate the duration of the test calls will take random values between 1(1+0) and 3 (1+2)

- "traffic_call nr id" – specifies the number("nr") to be dialed and the identify("id")

3.19. Transferring filesYou can transfer files from and into the TOPEX gateway.By choosing the associated icon (" ") , a window for file exchange will bedisplayed.

The left panel ("Gateway Files - current") shows up the structure of files andfolders from the system associated directory.You will see directories named "Alarms","Billing","Activity","Log" and "Viewer".

You can change between those directories and the root directory of theconnected system.

The right panel of the window ("Gateway files") shows the files and foldersstructure located on the TOPEX multiACCESS/QUTEX gateway that isconnected to the PC. Directory content ("bin" directory) of gateway files isautomatic downloaded. On the gateway you can consult three directories "bin"(where is located the telephony application), "cfg" (where the configurationfiles are stored) and "out" (where system makes files for alarms, billing andmonitoring (activity)). You may navigate through these directories of the rightpanel by double clicking.

When you want to download a file from gateway you enter in the directoryfrom which you want to make download. You choose a file. The file isdownloaded (you have a progress indication) on to the OAM computer.

It is mandatory to download files to appropriate destination: alarms (*.alrformat) and asr (*.asr format) in "Alarms", billing (*.tax format) in "Billing"and activity (*.mon format) in "Activity". If you want to view a text file youcan download it to "Viewer" folder. Options from tree commands "Alarms","Billing" and "Activity" are working with files with the previous extensions.

Automatic file transfer is allowed in connection state. You click on the "AutoDownloading Files" icon button (" ") to show the window called "DownloadFiles From Gateway".

The purpose of the automatc file transfer is to generate automatically requestsfor billing, alarms, activity, ASR and SMS files on the selected time interval.The finalization mode for each downloaded file will be either "ERROR" or "OK".The files are automatically saved in directories according to their type. Thedefault value for the time interval is the current day.

The option "Download Billing Records (for today) starting with hour: " is usedto download the records which are started with the specified hour from thebilling current day file. The specified hour may be changed. The option "Download Billing Records (for today) last: 100 (records)" is used todownload last 100 records from the billing current day file. The number of lastrecords to be downloaded may be changed. For one of these last two options (which cannot be set in the same time) theresulted billing records will be automatically displayed.

3.20. Clean HDD SpaceThis option (" ") allows you to delete files from the TOPEX system. This can beneeded if the equipment has been in use for a long time and has stored manylarge files on the hard disk. You may want to delete the older or not importantfiles to make room for new files. You must choose the associated icon ("Clean HDD Space").The window "Deleting Files From Gateway" allows you to choose a time period

and the type of files to be deleted. The type of files can be:- billing files (extension "*.tax")- alarms files (extension "*.alr") - activity files (extension "*.mon")- ASR files (extension "*.asr") - SMS files (extension "*.sms")- log files (extension "*.log"); these files are created by the gatewayapplication when "Validate Debug" and "Validate Saving to File" are checked in"Parameters for ALERTING" window (icon option " "). Informations that aresaved in this kind of files is about the port activity for all ports in range "From"until "To", values which are specified in the same window for defining alerts.- status files (extension "*.sta"); these files are used to store the state for allports (by state of a port we are meaning uninstalled, free, busy or alarm).These files are used by the web application.

By pressing "OK" option the requests for deleting files are sent to the gateway.The process of deleting the files can be observed in a listbox which is displayedin the "Deleting Files From Gateway". At the end of deleting process a requestfor reading HDD occupied space is sent to the gateway. The indicator of theHDD space from the status bar will be changed if the occupied HDD space waschanged on the gateway.

3.21. File EditorThis option (" ") allows you to edit the configuration (.txt) files that can beloaded later into the TOPEX system. You must choose the associated icon ("FileEditor").

The first window "File Editor Selection" allows you to navigate through thesubdirectories structure in the system root folder.

From this window you choose the text file to edit, then a new dialog windowwill show up, with the content of the file. The selection is done by doubleclicking on the name of the file, so there is no need for an "OK" button - thiswindow has only a "Cancel" button at the bottom.

There is a limit for the size of files to be edited, they should not be over65,535 bytes in length.

File content is saved by "Save" option.

3.22. Loading hourYou can upload the time into the TOPEX system. When you click on the icon ("

") for loading hour a dialog box will appear in which you can change also thecomputer time. Loading hour is very important because you modify thegateway clock: time and date. So this action is protected by password. Thispassword is always "topex".

The default value shown is the date and time that are set on the computerwhere the OAM program is running. Before sending the time to the system,the program performs a validity check, so if you enter for the time and datevalues that are not valid you will receive an error message: 'Error in changinghour'.

3.23. Automatic download of alarms and ASRAllows auto-download of alarms and ASR info from all of the TOPEX systemsthat are connected (with IP communication). The icon command (" ") is"Automatic Requests". When you click it, the OAM program will automaticallylaunch (at pre-established time intervals) interrogation requests for theinstalled TOPEX systems. The requests may be about alarmed modules andabout ASR value (both general and instantaneous). This is very useful whenyou have several TOPEX gateways, because you no longer need to manuallyconnect to each one and ask it for the alarms and ASR information.

You must set a "Period" (in seconds) for the interrogation cycle of all TOPEXsystems that are connected. The values must be greater or at least equal to 60seconds.Then you select a threshold for the ASR value: when the general orinstantaneous value is under the established level, the value is shown in awindow (called "ASR"). By double-clicking with left mouse button a statistic isshown with the last 24 values for general and instantaneous ASR (for thesystem which is currently in process of automatic interrogation).

The "ALARMS Alert " panel of the Automatic Requests window allows you toselect different kind of alarms. When these alarms occur in the TOPEX system,they will be shown and stored.

When the interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown inthe dialog window title, as you see in the first image. After you have selectedthe types of alarms, you may press either "Start" or "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed at any moment byselecting "Change" value.

When interrogation process is not started the text "STOPPED" is shown in thedialog window title. Valid options are "Start" and "Cancel". The start of theautomatic interrogation process is allowed by choosing "Start" option. Theinterrogation period and ASR alert value may be changed whenever bychoosing "Change" value. When automatic interrogation process is started onthe status bar in the first box (leftmost) the following text will appear: "AUTOREQUEST ACTIVATED in xxx !!!" where "xxx" is the number of seconds untilthe interrogation request will be made.

When interrogation process is started the text "STARTED" is shown in thedialog box title. Valid options are "Stop" for canceling the interrogationprocedure, "Change" for changing parameters and "Cancel". There is also"View" option for displaying a statistics with the last 24 values forinstantaneous ASR (for the TOPEX systems which are in process of automaticinterrogation).

When the specified period expires the request for system interrogation will belaunched. On status bar will be displayed the text "AUTO REQUEST INPROGRESS !!!". In the next box to the right side all messages will be enclosedby the system name (connection name).(For example "cfg_GSM")

During the automatic interrogation procedure it is allowed to connect to asystem only if the OAM software is in a pause between two interrogations. Inthe contrary case it is allowed to stop the automatic procedure which is inprocess (when in the status bar is written "AUTO REQUEST IN PROGRESS !!!")by selecting the "Disconnect" command from any of the systems. Then theOAM program will again wait for the established time period before issuingautomatic requests for interrogation.

Notes:

- normally if you have connected to a TOPEX system you can perform"Disconnect" only from that system. But when in automatic request mode, the"Disconnect" command may be sent from any system!- If the connection is broken with "Disconnect" command, only the ASR andalarms that have already been scanned will be downloaded.

3.24. GSM Reprogramming

This reset command (" ") is useful in situations when there is need to refreshthe settings for all the GSM modules. This GSM refresh must be issued to allow the proper setting of the receiving orsending of the identity through GSM modules and also the setting of the audiolevel.

There is a confirmation message which is requested to the user, before to startthe reprogramming procedure.

3.25. Halt and Reboot commandsThose two commands are similar to the LINUX commands. First commandHALTS (" ")(stops) the machine and the second REBOOT (" ") the machine.After HALT command, the TOPEX system may be safely disconnect from thepower supply. Incorrect shut down of the equipment may cause damage of thefile system and other problems such as a large delay in startup due to the filesystem check.

3.26. Visualization ListThe icon " " display a visualization window with the settings of all ports(rights, number, target, direction, SIM index regarding type of port).

The list is build in physical order of ports starting with 000.

In the picture above it can be seen GSM positions for which are given thefollowing settings: 'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT',direction, SIM index, target, Pin1,Pin2, Pin3 and Pin4 values. Also it can be seen ISDN channels settings:'Installed', 'IN', 'OUT' and direction.

By using the 'FIND' and 'NEXT' buttons you may search for a text string in thiswindow.

4. Print options

In all situations involving a print command a dialog box will appear. It willcontains two options:

- print to printer (a printer must be installed into system)

- print to file (in this situation a file name will be given for saving data)

5. NOTE

There are two types of windows used. There is a window for viewing filescontent and another window for viewing or modifying system configuration.When we are working with files content we can operate on the tree commandsfor the chosen system and when we are finishing we press the right button and

hide the window. If we are working viewing a configuration we can hide it bypressing right button. If you are connected and the configuration window isabove by pressing right button you are questioning if you want to disconnect.

At the right side of the status bar there is an indicator for connection: it is bluewhen we are connected to a system and it is red when we are not connected toany system.